Anda di halaman 1dari 277

Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-

2013
Date of preparing:10/08/2012

Period 1:
INTRODUCTION
I. Objectives:
- To introduce the textbook- English 10
- To introduce the way of testing.
- To set up some class regulations.
- To give a fifteen- minute test.
II. Procedures:
1. Textbook introduction:
a. Contents: - Six themes:+ You and me
+ Education
+ Community
+ Nature and the environment
+ Recreation.
+ People and places.
- Sixteen units.
b. The Structure of the book: - There are sixteen units . In each
unit , there are five main parts: Reading, Speaking, Listening,
Writing
+ Language focus: - Pronunciation
- Grammar and vocabulary.
2. The system of testing.
3. A fifteen- minute test.
I. Complete the following sentences with the correct form of
the verbs in brackets
1. The sun always (rise) .............. in the east. Look, it
(rise) ..........................................
2. I don't think I (go) ...................... tonight. I'm too tired.
3. Where you ( spend) ........................... your summer holiday last
year, Tam?
4. Mai (be) ........... very happy when she (receive) ........... a letter
from her sister this morning.
5. Would you like (join) .. ...... my class next Sunday? We
( visit) ......... the local museum.
II Complete the second setence so that it has a similar
meaning to the first one.
1. I haven't been to Portugal since 1990.
I
last .....................................................................................................
......................
2. When did you start your course?
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
How long
have ...................................................................................................
.........
3. I know it belongs to them , because there's a label on it.
I know
it's.......................................................................................................
.............
4. I recognized him at once.
At once I
knew....................................................................................................
........
5. The phone call interrupted my breakfast.
I
was .....................................................................................................
.......................
III. Choose the best answer
1. The boy like ( playing/ play) games but hate ( doing/ do) lessons.
2. Please stop( talking/ to talk/ talk); I'm trying ( to finish/ finishing/
finish) a letter to the Y& Y Green Group.
3. His doctor advised him( to give/giving) ( to smoke/ smoking).
4. By (working/ to work) day and night he succeeded in ( finishing/
to finish) the job in time.
5. After filling in the form , please (bring/take) it back to me.
6. The tourist needs ( finding/ to find) the police station because he
has lost money.
7. is he able (can join/ to join) the Y & Y Green Group?
8. He doesn't enjoy ( playing/ to play) basketball.
9. Let him (does/ do) what he wants.
10. My mother is busy ( to cook/ cooking)

Date of preparing:11/08/2012

Period 2: UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF......


LESSON 1: READING

Date of Students absence Notes


Class teaching
10
10
10

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
I- Objectives:
- Students read and guess the meaning of words in contexts.
- They read and answer questions about the texts.
- They practise scanning specific information in the texts
II Language focus :
1.Vocabulary: - Words concerning daily activities of people.
2.Grammar: - The present simple tense
- The past simple tense.
- Adverb of frequency.
III- Skill: -Reading: read a passage about a day in the life of a farmer.
IV. Teaching aids: - picture, board, chalks, textbook, handouts
V. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Warm- up:
5 + Aims: to introduce the topic of the
lesson and to raise sts' interest.
- Ask sts to close their books - close their books
- Deliver handouts, and ask sts to match a - match two columns
noun in column A with a phrase in column
B.
A B
1. a teacher a. does homework
2. a doctor b. works in the field
3. a student c. delivers letters
4. a postman d. looks after patients
5. a farmer e. gives lessons
- Ask ss to match quickly in one minute,
then ask some ss to stand up to answer T's T : What does a teacher do?
questions. S1 : He gives lessons
T : What does a doctor do?
S2 : He looks after patients.
.........
T : What does a farmer do?
- After the last question, T introduces the S5 : He works in the field.
new lesson.
2. Before you read:
10 - Aims: to revise the present simple and to
provide sts with some new words.
- Ask sts to open their books and look at
"Before you read" , explain what they are
going to do.
- Do the first example.
T: What time do you often get up? S: I often get up at six
- Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and S1: What time do you often go to
answer about their daily routine, using the school?
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
cues in the textbook. S2: I often go to school at 6.30
- Ask them to work in 3 minutes, S3: What time do you often have
meanwhile T moves round to help if breakfast?
necessary. S4: I often have breakfast at 6.15.
- Ask some pairs to report . ............
- Ask sts to look at the picture in the S11: What do you often do in the
textbook and guess the man's job. evening?
- Introduce the topic of the reading S12: I often do my homework.
passage: " A day in the life of a farmer"
S: I think he is a farmer.
- Introduce some new words:
- plough (v) ( the action of the man in the
picture)
- 'harrow (v) : ba
- a plot of land (n) ( point at the picture)
- 'peasant (n) : a poor farmer
- pump(v) : bm
- trans'plant (v)( use 2 words"plant" and - Listen and repeat.
"trans-" to explain). - plough - peasant
do the transplanting - harrow - pump
- Ask sts to listen and repeat these words - a plot of land - transplant
twice, then ask some sts to read again.
20 3. While you read:
- Aims: Sts practise reading
+ Task 1:
- Ask sts to read the passage about a
farmer, Mr. Vy and his wife, Mrs. Tuyet.
and do Task1.
- Ask sts to work individually in 5 minutes
to do this task.
- Guide sts to read through the passage ,
then focus on only the sentences
surrounding the italicised words to do the
task effectively. 1. C
- Ask them to share their ideas with their 2. C
parners. 3. A
- Ask 4 sts to stand up to answer , then 4. A
give remarks.
- Translate number 4 into Vietnamese in
case sts do not know the word " contented
with" and three options.
+ Task 2: S1: What is Mr. Vy's occupation?
- Ask sts to read the passage again and S2: He is a farmer.
answer the questions about Mr. Vy and S3: What time does he get up and
Mrs. Tuyet. what does he do after that?
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask them to work in pairs , one asks and S4: He gets up at 4.30, then he
one answers. goes down to the kitchen to boil
- Move round to make sure that all sts are some water for his morning tea.
working and to help them if necessary. S5: What does he do in the
- Ask some sts to report and give morning?
feedback . S6: In the morning he ploughs
and harrows his plot of land,
+ Task 3: drinks tea and smokes local
- Ask sts to read the passage again , and tobacco during his break.
explain what they are going to do. S7: What do Mr. Vy and his wife
- Ask them to complete the note in 7 do in the afternoon?
minutes, then discuss their answers with S8: They repair the banks of their
their partners . plot of land. Mr. Vy pumps water
- Ask three sts to report their answers into it while his wife does the
aloud. transplanting.
- Check and give remarks. S9: Are they happy with their
lives or not? Why?
S10: Yes, they are. Because they
- Work in groups to discuss. love working and they love their
- Ask one member of their groups to report children.
if possible.
9 4. After you read: - In the morning:
- Aims: to help sts to consolidate what + 4.30: The alrm goes off and
they have read. Mr. Vy gets up, goes down to the
- Ask sts to close their books. kitchen, boil water for tea, has a
- Ask them to work in small groups of quick breakfast, leads the buffalo
three or four to talk about Mr. Vy and Mrs. to the field.
Tuyet's daily routines basing on their note + 5.15: he leaves the house
in Task 3. + 5.30: he arrives in the field,
- Encourage them to use their own words. ploughs and harrows his plot of
- Ask one or two pairs to report. land.
+7.45: He takes a rest
+ 10.30: he gose home
+ 11.30: he has lunch with his
family.
- In the afternoon:
+ 2.30: they go to the field again,
repair the bank of the plot of land.
He pumps water into it, she does
the transplanting.
+ 6.00: they finish work.
+ 7.00: they have dinner.
- After dinner:
+ They watch TV, sometimes they
see their neighbours for a cup of
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
tea and chat with them.
+10.00: they go to bed.
1 5. Homework:
- Ask sts to write full passage about Mr.
Vy and Mrs. Tuyet basing on what they
have discussed in Post- Reading.

VI-EXPERIENCES:
.
.
.
.

Date of preparing:12/08/2012
Period 3: UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF......
LESSON 2: SPEAKING
I. Objectives:
- Students work in pairs to ask and answer about one's daily activities using a
timetable or pictures
- They can talk about their daily routines.
II-Language focus :
1.Vocabulary: - Words concerning daily activities of people.
2.Grammar: - The present simple tense
- The past simple tense.
- Adverb of frequency.
III- Skill: -Speaking: Speak about time table of a student.
IV. Teaching aids: - picture, board, chalks, textbook, handouts
V. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Warm-up:
5 - Aims: to revise the names of school - Close their books.
subjects . - Work in groups of three or four
- Ask sts to close their books. to match as quickly as possible.
- Deliver the first handout.
A B
1. Civic education a. Ton hc - Speak aloud their answers:
2. Technology b. Vt l 1-f ; 2-i ; 3 - a; 4 - g; 5 - b; 6 - j;
3. Maths c. Tin 7 - k; 8 - d; 9 - e; 10 - h; 11 - c.
hc
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
4. Literature d. Th
dc
5. Physics e. a l
6. Biology f. Gio
dc CD
7. Chemistry g. Vn
hc
8. Physical education h. Lch
s
9. Geography i. Cng
ngh
10. History j. Sinh
hc
11. Informatics k. Ho
hc
9 - Ask them to match one item in column
A with one item in column B.
- Ask them to work in groups in 2 - The present simple tense.
minutes, then check this exercise in
chorus.
- Ask sts to read aloud the names of these
subjects in chorus.
2. Pre-Speaking S: seven thirty or half past seven.
- Aims: to introduce the verb tense and
the way to tell clock time.
- Introduce briefly what sts are going to
do in this lesson. S: The question begins with "
- Ask sts about the verb tense to use in What time..........?"
talking about daily routines.
- Remind sts of some rules of the present S: What time does Mai go to
simple tense. school?
- Recall the way of telling time.
T: ( write on the board) 7.30 ans ask a st
to read it aloud.
- Write some more examples and ask sts
20 to read aloud. - Open the textbook.
- Ask sts about the question : - Listen to the teacher.
- Ask sts to make question for the - Look at the timetable and try to
following sentence: understand it.
" Mai goes to school at 6.30 a.m"
- Ask sts to give more examples. S: He has a Civic Education
3. While- Speaking lesson at 7.15a.m
- Aims: Sts practise speaking in pairs S: At 7.15 on Monday he has a
+ Task 1: Civic Education lesson.

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask sts to open their books. S1: What time does Quan have a
- Introduce the requirement of the task. Literature lesson on Tuesday?
- Ask sts to look at the timetable in the S2: He has a literature lesson at
textbook and read through it. 8.05 a.m
- Do the first example with a student. S3: What lesson dose Quan have
T: What time does Quan have a Civic at 10.40 a.m on Thursday?
Education lesson on Monday? S4: he has a Chemistry lesson.
T: What lesson does Quan have at 7.15 S5: What time does Quan have a
a.m on Monday? Physics lesson on Wednesday?
- Ask the whole class to read these S6: He has a Physics lesson at
sentences again. 9.55 a.m
- ask two pairs to read again. S7: What lesson does Quan have
- Ask sts to work in pairs in 10 minutes at 8.55 on Friday?
to ask and answer about Quan basing on S8: He has an English lesson.
the timetable. S9: What time does Quan have a
- Move round to hepl sts and to correct Class Meeting on Sarturday?
any mistakes if there are. S10: He has a class meeting at
10.40 a.m.
- Ask five pairs to report because of the
time limit. - look at pitures in task 2 and
think of the phrases to talk about
- Listen and give remarks. Quan's activities.(eg: do his
+ Task 2: homework, get up,etc)
- " Quan is at school in the morning, and
what does he do in the afternoon? Please
look at pictures in task 2"
- Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and S: He gets up at 2.00 p.m
answer about Quan's activities.
- do the first example:
T: ( look at picture 1) What does Quan
do at 2.00 p.m?
10 - Ask sts to work in the same way, " At 2.00 p.m Quan gets up, he
remind sts to use the present simple tense starts to study at 2.15 p.m. he
with the third person. studies until 4.30 and then he
- Move round to control the activity and watches T.V. At 5.00 he rides to
to help sts if necessary. the football yard. At 5.15 he
- After sts have discussed, T can aks a begins playing football. He goes
student to talk about all Quan's activities home at about 6.30 p.m......."
in the afternoon.
4. Post -Speaking:
- Aims: sts practise speaking freely, they
can express their own ideas.
+ Task 3:
- Ask sts to think about themselves, and - Think about theit daily activities
then work in small groups to tell their and talk to their friends.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
friends about their daily routines. - - Try to use English to talk.
1 Remind sts that they are using the
present simple with the first person.
- Move round to check the activities and
to make sure that sts are working
effectively.
- Ask one or two sts to report in front of
the whole class.
- check and give remarks.
5. Homework:
- Write a paragraph ( about 80 words)
about their daily routines in their
workbook.

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:15/08/2012
UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF......
Period : 4 LESSON 3: LISTENING

Date of Students absence Notes


Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
Students know how hard manual labourer in Vietnam work and appreciate them.
II-Languge focus:
1.Vocabulary: - Words concerning daily activities of people.
2.Grammar: - The present simple tense.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- The past simple tense.
- Adverb of frequency.
III- Skills: + Listening comprehension.
- Students listen and number the pictures in their correct order.
- Students listen and decide whether the staments are true or false.
IV- Teaching aids: - Tape, board, chalk, textbook.
V-- Procedures:

Time Teachers activities Students activities


5 1. Homework checking:( 5 mins)
Two sts tell the whole class about their
daily routines
2. Before you listen:
Aims: focus sts on the topic and review/
10 introduce the words and phrases used to
describe a cyclo drivers daily activities.
a. T asks sts to work in groups and make a - work in groups and recall the
list of vehicles and the people who operate vehicles and their operators then
them, then compare their list with other make a list on a sheet of paper
groups - compare theirs notes.
- listen to the T and open their
- Introduce the topic of the listening text: books
A day in the life of a cyclo driver and
asks sts to open their books.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and - Work in pairs to ask and answer.
answer the questions in the textbook - Some pairs stand up and report.
Have you ever traveled by cyclo? S1: Have you ever traveled by
When was it? cyclo?
Is it interesting to travel by cyclo? S2: Yes, I have.
Which do you prefer, going by bicycle S3: When was it?
or by cyclo? Give reasons. S4: Last summer holiday...
- Move around to help sts then ask some S5: Is it interesting to travel by
pairs to report. cycle?
- Give remarks. S6: Yes, it is.
S7: Which do you prefer, going by
bicycle or by cyclo?
S8: I prefer traveling by cyclo
because I have time to look around
and Im not tired.

b. T asks S to look at the words in the


book and read after T . - look at the words and read after T
- Introduce some new words .
- 'passenger (n): (in the pictures) - copy the words and phrases.
- 'district (n): e.g.: Ba Dinh district,
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Thanh Mien district
- drop (v): when the passenger gets off
the cyclo.
- 'pedal (v) = cycle (v)
- 'purchases (n) = the shopping: The
things someone has bought
- food stall (n) : (In the picture)
- Read the words aloud and asks sts to - listen and repeat.
repeat. - Some individuals read the words
- Ask some sts to read the words again. aloud
3. While you listen:
20 + Task 1:
Aims: Practise listening and ordering
pictures.
- Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the
pictures in the textbook and describe each - look at the pictures and listen to
picture. the T.
- Do the first example:
In the first picture, a cyclo driver is - describe the other pictures in
cycling his cyclo and taking a woman to pairs.
somewhere.
- listen to the teacher.
- Introduce the situation about Mr. Lam, a
cyclo driver in Hochiminh city talking
about his daily routines. T asks sts to listen
to the tape/ teacher and number the - listen to the tape / the teacher and
pictures in the correct order. do the task
- play the tape/ read the text twice. - Share their answers.
- give feedback.
- Ask sts to share their answers in pairs. - check their answers , and then
- Get sts answers. correct their work if they have any
- play the tape once again, stop where wrong answers.
necessary and conduct the correction. Key: 5 6 1 3 2 4

+ Task 2:
Aims: Practice listening for specific
information by deciding if the given
statements are true or false. - Read the statements , underline
- ask sts to have a look at the statements the key words in each sentence.
and read them in pairs and make sure they - Try to guess whether each
understand the statements. sentence is true or false.
-Ask sts to listen to the tape/T again and - Listen and do the task.
tick the box to indicate if the statements - Share their answers with their
are true or false. partners.
- Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Give answers.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Checks sts answers.
- Play the tape once again, stop where - Listen again and check.
necessary and conduct the correction. Key: 1F; 2T; 3F; 4F; 5F.

4. After you listen:


8 - Ask sts to work in pairs and use the - Work in pairs to ask and answer
suggested words to ask and answer about questions such as:
the cyclo driver. " What is the man's name?"
- Move round to check the activities and to " What does he do?"
make sure that sts are working effectively. .............
- Ask one or two sts to retell the cyclo
drivers routines in front of the whole
class.
- Check and give remarks.
5. Homework:
2 - Write a short paragraph about Mr. Lam's
routines

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:16/08/2012
UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF......
Period : 5 LESSON 4: WRITING

Date of Students absence Notes


Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
-By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a narrative.
II-Languge focus:
1.Vocabulary: - Words concerning daily activities of people.
2.Grammar: - The present simple tense.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- The past simple tense.
- Adverb of frequency.
III. Skills: + Reading: Students read a passage to find the verbs in the past simple
and the connectors.
+ Writing a narrative using the prompts.
+ Speaking: - Students discuss in groups to share their answers.
IV. Teaching aids: - A picture, board, chalk, textbook.
V. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Warm- up:
5 Aims: To raise students' interest. - Look at the picture.
-Show a picture that teacher prepared
in advance about the explosion in
Twin Towers in 2001.
- Ask some questions: S: The buildings are on fire.
T: What is happening ? S: It happened in the U.S.A
T: Do you know where it happened? S: It happened on September 11th
T: When did it happen? , 2001
T: How did it happen? S: Two planes carrying bombs
- Tell sts that they are going to write a crashed into two buildings and
narrative of past events. killed a lot of people.
20 2. Before you write:
- Aims: to provide sts with the
materials ( vocabulary, grammar,
form) to write. - Look at Task 1.
+ Task 1: - Read through the passage
- Ask sts to look at Task 1 . individually .
- Ask them to read through the passage - S: The most frightening
in two minutes to get the main idea. experience of the writer's life
- Ask one student to report. when he(she) travelled on a
- Explain some new words/ phrases in plane on 14th July 1995.
the passage:
+ stare death in the face ( explain the - Listen and repeat:
meaning of each word ,then let sts + stare death in the face
guess the meaning of the whole phrase) + fasten
+ 'fasten(v)( demonstrate) + dip
+ dip (v) : move to a lower level.
- Ask sts to listen and read these words
again.
- Ask them to read the passage again
more carefully and do task 1 in 5
minutes. - Read the passage again and do
- Move round to make sure that all sts task 1.
are working. + Verbs used in the past simple:
- Ask them to share their answers with stared, was, arrived, got, took off,
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
their partners. began,thought, were told,
- Check the task by asking two sts to seemed, realised, were,
report. screamed, thought, had, felt,
- Give remarks. gained, announced, landed.
+ Task 2: + Connectors( expressions of
- Ask sts to read the passage again and time): on that day, at first, then, a
in groups to do task 2. few minutes later.
- Divide the class into three regions:
one identifies the events, one identifies
the climax and the rest identifies the - work in groups.
conclusion. - Report the answers:
- Ask sts to work in only 2 minutes. + The events: people got on
- Ask three representatives of three plane, plane took off, hostesses
groups to report. were just beginning to serve
- Draw the conclusion about writing a lunch when plane began to shake,
narrative. plane seemed to dip, people
+ Form: 3 parts: - introduction. screamed in panic.
- body: events, climax + The climax: We thought we had
- conclusion only minutes to live.
+ Verb tense: the past simple tense. + The conclusion: the pilot that
+ Connectors: at that time, on that everything was all right, we
day,then, after that, a few minutes later, landed safely, it was the most
until, etc. frightening experience of my life.
- Ask sts to do task 3 but before that
explain some new words: - Listen and repeat these words.
+ 'discotheque (n) : disco
+ choke (v): to be unable to breath
- Ask sts to listen and read these words
again.
10 3. While you write:
- Aims: students practise cotrolled-
writing. - Write the passage into their
+ Task 3: notebooks.
- Ask sts to build up a narrative about a
hotel fire using the prompts. Last year I spent my summer
- Ask them to work individually. holidays at a seaside town. The
- Move round to conduct the activity hotel was modern and
and to note down sts' mistakes. comfortable. I had a wonderful
- Ask sts to share their answers with holiday until the fire.
their partners. It was Saturday evening and
4. After you write: everyone was sitting in the
9 -Aims: to get feedback. discotheque on the ground floor.
- Ask sts to report their work sentence It was crowded with people. They
by sentence. were dancing and singing
- Remind sts that they should use the happily. Suddenly we smelt
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
past simple to write. smoke. Then black smoke began
to fill the room. Everybody
started to scream in panic.
People ran away toward the fire
exits. One door was blocked.
Many people began to cough and
to choke.
Then just as we thought we had
only minutes to live, the fire
brigade arrived. Firemen fought
their way into the room and soon
everyone was safely out of the
building. Luckily, nobody was
seriously hurt. It was the most
frightening experience of my life.
5. Homework
1 - Ex 1, 2 (page 9)
VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:17/08/2012
UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF......
Period : 6 LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS

Date of Students absence Notes


Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students can distinguish the sound / i / from the sound /i:/ and pronounce them
correctly.
- Students revise the present simple tense and the past simple tense.
II-Languge focus:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
1.Vocabulary: - Words concerning daily activities of people.
2.Grammar: - The present simple tense.
- The past simple tense.
- Adverb of frequency
III- Skills: -Practise pronounciation and grammar.
IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
V. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking. Exercise1:
7 - Ask one student to do exercise 1 1. I first went to school when I
(page 9) on the board. was six years old.
2. My father held my hand
firmly and took me to the school
gate.
3. I was frightened by all the
strange faces and the large
buildings.
4. I quickly found another gate
- Check Ex 2 with the whole class. on the other side of the
Check this exercise sentence by playground.
sentence. .........
Exercise 2:
- Give remarks and marks. 1. Last summer 5. so
2. In the morning 6. At first
17 2. Pronunciation: 3. Once in a while 7. in the
- Aims: to introduce the two sounds end
and to help sts to read these sounds 4. However 8. On the
correctly. whole
- Introduce two sounds / I / and /
i: /.
- Read each sound twice and then
ask sts to listen and repeat. - Look at the board.
- Ask sts to look at the book, then - Listen to the teacher and then
listen and repeat. listen and repeat / I / and /i:/
- Ask sts to practise reading these - Listen and repeat.
words in groups. /I/ / i:/
- Ask some sts to read aloud and hit kick heat
give remarks. repeat
- Ask sts to look at part 2 and tell bit click beat
sts what they are going to do. read
- Do the first example:( read the little interested meat
sentence aloud and underline the eaten
sounds)
1. Is he coming to the cinema ?
/I/ /i:/ /I/ /I/
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask sts to work in pairs to practise
reading and to find the sounds in
the rest sentences. 2. We 'll miss the begining of the
film.
- Remind them of the intonation of 3. Is it an interesting film, Jim?
the questions. ( sound //)
- move round to help if necessary. 4. The beans and the meat were
- Ask some sts to read these quite cheap.
sentences aloud.
- Give remarks. 5. He's going to leave here for
3. Grammar and vocabulary: the Green Mountains.
20 - Aims: to revise the present simple 6. Would you like to have meat,
tense and the past simple tense. peas and cheese?
- Ask sts to think about the present ( sound / i:/)
simple tense and ask some to tell
the whole class about the form and
the use of the tense.
- Ask sts about the position of + Form: (+) S + V/ Vs/ Ves
adverbs of frequency. +.......
(- ) S + don't/ doesn't +
- Ask sts to do Ex 1 individually in V +......
5 minutes, then share their answers (?) Do/ Does + S + V
with their partners. +..........?
- Explain any new words if
necessary. + Use: to talk about present
- Ask some sts to report and give habits or present states.
remarks.
+ Position:
- Ask sts to do Ex 2 orally in pairs - after " to be" but before other
in 2 minutes. verbs.
- Move round to conduct the - " As a rule" is placed at the
activity. beginning of a sentence.
- Ask 2 sts to report. 1. is 7. catch
2. fish 8. go
- Present the past simple tense. 3. worry 9. give up
- Ask some students to tell the 4. are 10. say
whole class about the form and the 5. catch 11. realise
use of this tense. 6. am 12. am
Sample answers:
- Ask sts to look at Ex 3 and explain He always get up early.
what sts are going to do. She is sometimes late for school.
- Ask sts to do this exercise in 5 Lan normally practises
minutes , then share their answers speaking English.
with their partners. As a rule, Thao is a hard-
- Ask them to pay attention to the working student.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
past form of irregular verbs and
some verbs are put in passive voice. + Form: (+ ) S + V-ed/
- Ask 2 sts to do this exercise on the V( irregular) +........
board. ( - ) S + didn't + V
- Move round to help sts if +..........
necessary. ( ? ) Did + S + V
- Check and give remarks. + .............?
+ Use: to indicate that somthing
happen in the past.
1. was done 7. began 13. was
2. cooked 8. felt
14. leapt
3. were 9 put out
15. hurried
4. smelt 10. crep 16. found
5. told 11. slept 17.
wound
1 4. Homework 6. sang 12. woke
-Ex 1, 2 ( page 6) 18. flowed

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:17/08/2012
UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS
Period: 7 LESSON 1 : READING

Date of Students absence Notes


Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know more about school and related problems.
II. Language focus
1. Vocabulary: - Words to ask for personal information in a form.
2. Grammar: - Wh- questions.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- V-ing and To-infinitive.
III. Skills: - Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups.
- Reading comprehension: to fill in the blanks and to answer the
questions
IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk.
V. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm-up:
5 - Aims: to raise sts' interest and to
introduce the topic.
-Ask students to work in pairs and
discuss this question:
"When you meet your friends, - Work in pairs orally.
which of the following topics do - some sts report.
you often talk about?" S1: When I meet my friends, I
- Ask sts to look at the cues in the often talk about films, our study,
textbook. and other students.
- Encourage them to think of other S2: I often talk about my favourite
topics. singers, some film stars, or my
- Ask them to work in 2 minutes then hobbies.
ask some pairs to report. S3: I usually talk sports and
- Check and give remarks. games .
- Introduce the topic of this lesson.
2. Before you read:
10 - Aims: to introduce vocabulary
and the grammatical item relating
to the reading text.
a. Vocabulary pre-teach:
- Provide the students with these
new words/phrases in this way:
+ Read and write each word/phrase - Copy down
on the blackboard then give the - Listen to the teacher then repeat.
meaning of the word/phrase - Practise reading these words with
+ corner shop(NP): a shop at the their partners.
corner of a street
+ pro'fession(n): = job, occupation .
+ stuck(adj): b tc, b kt
+ 'attitude(n): what you think about - Some sts read these words aloud.
or behave toward something.
+ mall (n): an area containing a lot
of shops .
eg: a shopping mall
- Ask sts to listen and repeat, then
practise with their partners.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask some sts read all the
word/phrases aloud, listen and help like hope
the students to read the love + V- ing want + to-
words/phrases correctly. V
b. Gerund and to- infinitive enjoy decide
introduction:
-Recall the usages of gerund and to-
infinitive to the students.
- Ask sts to tell the teacher the cases
to use gerund and to-infinitive.
- Ask sts to discuss quickly in 1
minute, then one of them stand up
to report.
- Listen and give remarks.
3. While you read: - Listen to the teacher.
20 - Aims: sts practise reading and
then do the tasks relating to the
text.
- Introduce briefly the content of
the reading text. - Read through the talks, then
"You are going to read three talks discuss their contents.
given by a student, a teacher and a
students father about school. You
read them and do the tasks - Read the text again and do the
assigned." task.
- Ask sts to read through three talks - Share their ideas with their
and tell teacher the main ideas of partners.
these talks. - Some sts read their answers
Task 1: Gap-filling. aloud.
- Ask the students to read again
these talks, then 1. enjoy 2. traffic 3. worry
work independently and fill each 4. crowded 5. language
blank with one of the words in the
box. There are more words than the - Work in pairs to discuss.
blanks. - Share their ideas with other
- Have sts compare the answer with pairs'.
a partner. - Some pairs stand up and report.
- Get feedback and give correct - S1: enjoys teaching
answers. S2: Miss phuong
Task 2: Finding who... - S3: has to get up early
- Ask students to work in pairs. S4: Phong
Read the small talks again and find - S5: lives far from school
out who..... S6: Phong
- Move round to check sts'work. - S7: loves working with children
- Ask sts to share their answers with - S8: Miss Phuong
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
other pairs'. ...........................
- 9-10 pairs are required to give
answers in front of the class(1 pair/ - Discuss in pairs.
1 time/ 1 answer). - Some pairs report .
- Listen and check. P1: He studies at Chu Van An
high school
P2: He studies many subjects such
Task 3: Answering questions. as Math, Physics, Chemistry.....
- Ask students to keep on working P3: Because it is an international
in pairs. Read the talks more language.
carefully and answer the questions. P4: She says that teaching is hard
- Move round to check the activity. work, but she enjoys it because she
- Ask some pairs to report in front loves working with children.
of the class. P5: Because his son has to ride
- Get feedback and give correct his bike in narrow and crowded
answers. streets on the way to school
4. After you read:
- Aims; to give sts a chance to talk - Discuss in groups of three or four
about themselves. one of three topics.
- Tell students to work in groups: - Assign one member of each
Choose one of the following topics group to be the secretary to take
8 and talk about it for about 5 notes their group's ideas.
minutes. - Some sts stand up to present their
a.What subjects you like learning ideas.
best and why.
b. What you like and dislike doing
at school .
c. What you worry about at school .
- Go round to help students with
their work.
- Ask some sts to talk about their
topic in front of the class.
- check and give remarks.
5. Homework:
2 - Part A ( page 10- workbook)

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:20/08/2012
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS
Period : 8 LESSON 2 : SPEAKING

Date of Students absence Notes


Class teaching
10
10
10

I.Objectives:
- Sts can make small talks in daily situations
II. Language focus
1. Vocabulary: - Words to ask for personal information in a form.
2. Grammar: - Wh- questions.
- V-ing and To-infinitive.
III. Skills:
- Speaking: - Asking and answering in small talks..
- Starting and closing a conversations.
- Reading: - Reading the sentences and then rearranging them into a
conversation
IV. Teaching aids:
- board, chalk, textbook.
V. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1-Warm - up:
5 - Aims: to focus sts on the topic of the
lesson and to raise their interest.
- Introduce the situation and write a - Look at the board and listen.
short dialogue on board:
"Suppose that you meet a friend at the
supermarket. You are very busy .What
will you say to open and end the
conversation."
A: ............................... ( 1)
B: Hi Lan. How are you? - Work in pairs to ask and answer.
A: Im fine. Thank you. And you?
B: Im very well. Thanks. I havent - Some pairs stand up to report.
seen you for a long time. Lets go (1) Hello, Mai/ Hi Mai
somewhere for a drink (2) Im very busy now .
A: Sorry, ..................... ( 2) I really must go now, Perhaps
- Ask sts to complete the dialogue in another time.
pairs.
- Ask some pairs to report.

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
"Today we will practice speaking
conversation having starting and
closing sentences."
12 2.Before you speak:
Aims: Introduce phrases used to start - Work in pairs to put the phrases
or to close a conversation. into the correct columns.
+ Task 1: - Ask two sts to give feedback.
- Ask sts to look at the phrases in the Starting a conversation
book and to work in pairs to put the Closing a conversation
expressions in starting and closing a
conversation Good morning
- Make sure that sts understand all the Goodbye. See you later
expressions = + Hows everything at
school?= How 's your studying? Hows everything?
+ Catch you later = See you later. Well, its been nice talking to you.
- Move round to conduct the activity.
- Ask two sts to give answers. Hello. How are you?
- Get feedback and give remarks. Sorry. Ive got to go. Talk to you
- Ask sts to read all the expressions later.
aloud in chorus.
Hi. How is school?
Great. Ill see you tomorrow.

Hello. What are you doing?


12 3. While you speak: Catch up with you later.
Aims: Sts can practise making a
conversation using the suggested
words.
+ Task 2:
- Ask sts to read through all the - Read and rearrange the sentences
sentences and rearrange them into an into a conversation.
appropriate conversation. - Share their ideas with their
- Ask sts to do the task individually partners.
and then discuss with their partners.
- Go around to help sts Answers : D - F - B - H - E - C -
- Get feedback and give correct G - A.
answers. - Practise reading in pairs.
- Ask sts practise reading this dialogue - Some pairs stand up to read the
in pairs. dialogue aloud.
- Ask some pairs to read aloud.
- Read all the words and phrases as
+ Task 3: well as the dialogue.
- Ask sts to read all the given
expressions and the incomplete - Work individually ,then work in
dialogue. pairs.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask sts to complete the conversation - Some pairs read the dialogue
with suitable words, phrases or aloud.
sentences in the box. A: ..................... Whats the matter
- Ask sts to work individually first and with you?
then work in pairs B: ....... I feel tired .Ive got a
- Get feedback and give correct headache
answers. A: .................. Youd better go
- Ask some pairs to practise in front of home and have a rest
the class.
- Listen and help sts if necessary.
- Listen to the teacher and try to
brainstorm about the topics.
15 4- After you speak:
Aims: Sts can make small talk on
suggested topics.
+ Task 4: - Listen to the teacher.
- Introduce the topics:
The weather - Work in pairs to make small
Last nights TV programmes talks.
Football - Some of sts act out in front of the
Plans for the next weekend class.
- Divide the class in to four groups. 1. The weather:
Each group gets one topic and use the A: Hi, Lan. How was your trip to
starting and ending of a conversation Vung Tau?
to practise. B: Hi Hung. It was wonderful|. I
- Ask sts to work in pairs to make really enjoyed it.
small talks about the topic they are A: What did you like most in Vung
assigned. Tau?
- Go round to help sts. B: The weather.
- Call on some pairs to act out the A: What was the weather like in
dialogues in front of the class. Vung Tau?
- Ask others sts to comment on their B: It was warm. I prefer the
conversations. weather in Vung Tau to Nha
- Get feedback and correct any Trang.
mistakes if there are A: Oh, really? I love it, too.
B: By the way, do you want to see
my photos?
: Sure ...
5- Homework:
- Write down what they have
1 discussed.
VI-EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date of preparing:21/08/2012
UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS
Period : 9 LESSON 3 : LISTENING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Sts are able to make mini conversations about daily topics such as study at
school, wheather and travelling....
II. Language focus
1. Vocabulary: - Words to ask for personal information in a form.
2. Grammar: - Wh- questions.
- V-ing and To-infinitive.
III. Skills: Sts develop the following skills:
- Listening and numbering the pictures in the correct order.
- Listening and answering given questions
- Listening and filling in the gaps.
- Speaking : describe the pictures and talk about their problems at school.
IV. Teaching aids:
- textbook, chalk, board.
V. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1 Homework checking:
5 Two pairs of sts make small talks
about their daily life
2. Before you listen:
10 Aims: focus sts on the topic and
review/ introduce the words and
sentence models used in small talks.
- Ask sts to read the questions and
answers in the book and work in pairs -Work in pairs and do the
to match the question with the matching.
appropriate answer, and then compare 1-c; 2-e; 3-a; 4-b; 5-d.
their list with other pairs. - Work in pairs to ask and answer:
- Check sts work - Some pairs stand up and
- Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and present.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
answer. S1:What subjects are you taking
- Move around to help sts. this semester?
- Ask some pairs to present and gives S2: Im taking maths.
remarks S1: How do you like the class?
- Introduce some new words/ phrases S2: I really like it
+ semester (n): e.g.: .........................
Semester 1: 5 Sept -> Jan. - Copy the words and phrases.
Semester2: January -> May
+ enjoy oneself (n): somebody does
something and likes it.
+ go for a swim (v): e.g.: go for a
walk/ a drive - Listen and repeat.
- Read the words sts to repeat. - Read the words in pairs and
- Ask sts to read the words in pairs. correct each others mistakes.
- Ask some sts to read the words again. - Some individuals read the
3. While you listen: words aloud
- Aims: Sts practise listening and
20 numbering pictures, listenning for
specific information by answering
questions and by filling in the blanks
with missing words.
+ Task 1:
- Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the
pictures in the textbook and use the - Look at the pictures and listen
following suggestions to ask and to the T.
answer about each picture.
What/ who/ see?
Who/ they?
Where/ they?
What / think / talk about?
- Give one example:
T: What can you see in picture a? S: A hotel
T: Who do you see? S: Two people
T: What do you think they are talking S: Maybe they are talking about
about? the hotel or the holiday.
- Ask sts to do the same. - Ask and answer about the
- Move around to help sts. pictures in pairs.
- Introduce that sts will listen to four - Listen to the teacher.
short conversations and ask sts to look
at the pictures and listen to the T.
- Play the tape/ read the conversations - Listen to the tape / the teacher
once. and do the task
- Ask sts to compare their answer in - Compare their answers and then
pairs. correct their work if they have
- Check sts answers. wrong answers.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Play the tape once again, stop the tape - Report their answers.
after each conversation and conduct the Key: b c d a
correction.
+ Task 2:
- Ask sts to read the questions in pairs - Work in pairs to read the
and make sure they understand the questions.
statements and know what information
they need to answer the questions. - Listen and do the task.
- Ask sts to listen to the tape/T twice
and take short notes to answer the - Compare their notes.
questions. - Report their answers.
- Ask sts to compare their answer in 1. (She is taking) English;
pairs. 2. (She is) in Miss Lan Phuongs
- Ask some sts to report the answers. Class;
- Play the tape once again, stop the tape 3. (He is) at a party;
where necessary and conduct the 4. (He plans to stay there) for a
correction. week.
+ Task 3: 5. No, she doesnt. She travels
- Ask sts to read the conversation in alone.
pairs and see what information they
need to fill in the gaps. They may guess - Work in pairs to read the
the answers in some gaps. conversation and try to fill in the
- Ask sts to listen to the tape/T once gaps before they listen.
and fill in the gaps.
- Ask sts to compare their answer in - Listen and do the task.
pairs. - Compare their answer in pairs.
- Ask some sts to report their answers. - Report the answers.
- Play the tape once again, stop the tape 1: it here 5: travelling
where necessary and conduct the 2: very nice 6: No
correction. 3: big 7: alone
4. After you listen: 4: comfortable 8: for a drink
- Ask sts to work in groups and talk
8 about the problems they have - Listen to the teacher.
experienced at school (difficulties in
learning, having bad marks, being late
for school, disobeying the
regulations ...) Sts may use the
following suggested questions to ask
and answer. -Ask and answer in groups.
+What problems have you experienced
at school?
+ What are the reasons? - One/ two pairs present.
+ What have you done to solve them?
- Move round to check the activities
and to make sure that sts are working
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
effectively.
- Ask one or two pair to retell theirs
problems in
front of the whole class.
- Check and give remarks
2 5. Homework
Write a short paragraph about their
problems at school .
VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:30/08/2012
UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS
Period : 10 LESSON 4 : WRITING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know how to fill in an English form.
II. Language focus
1. Vocabulary: - Words to ask for personal information in a form.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
2. Grammar: - Wh- questions.
- V-ing and To-infinitive.
III. Skills: Sts develop the following skills:
- Speaking: discuss in pairs.
- Writing: fill in a form.
IV. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk.
V. Procedures:
T Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking
5 - Ask one st to tell the whole class - Listen to their friend attentively.
about his or her problems at school in
front of the whole class.
- Check and give marks.
2. Before you write:
20 - Aims: To introduce the topic of this
lesson, and to guide sts to fill in a - Open their books and look at the
form. tasks.
- Introduce the topic of this lesson:"
Filling in a form" and ask sts to look
at the textbook.
+ Task 1:
- Ask sts to work in pairs to discuss - Pair 1:
two questions in 2 minutes. 1. When you want to send some
1. On what occasions do you have to money/ parcels at a post office.
fill in a form? 2. Your surname, your first name,
2. What sort of information do you your age.
often have to provide when you fill in - Pair 2:
a form? 1. When you apply for a job or
- Move round to help sts if necessary. attend an examination to a high
- Ask some pairs to stand up to report school/ a university.
their ideas. 2. Your address, your job, your date
- Add some more ideas. of birth....
- Give remarks.
+ Task 2: - Look at task 2 and listen to the
- Ask sts to look at the introduction in teacher.
task 2 and explain more clearly.
- Ask them to look through column A - Read through the task .
and column B.
- Explain the phrase: "'marital - Write this phrase in their
'status"= Are you married or single? notebooks.
- Ask sts to listen and repeat this
phrase. - listen and repeat.
- Ask sts to match a line in A with a
question in B individually 2 minutes. - Do the task individually.
- Ask them to share their answers with - discuss in pairs.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
their partners after completing the - Give feedback.
task. 1- d; 2 - f; 3 - e; 4 - g; 5 - b; 6 - c; 7
- Get feedback and check. - a.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and S1: What do you do?
answer about the questions in column S2: I'm a student.
B. S3: Where are you living at the
- Ask them to give short answers. moment?
- Move round to conduct the activity. S4: At 32 Tran Hung Dao Street.
- Ask some pairs to report. S5: Are you married or single?
- Give remarks. S6: Single.
+ Task 3: S7: What 's your first name?
- Tell sts that forms ask them to do S8: Binh. .........
certain things so they should follow
the requirements. - Listen to the teacher.
- Ask sts to read through five points ,
then explain some new words: - write these words into their
- de'lete( v) : to omit something. notebooks.
- 'applicable (adj): suitable.
- Ask sts to listen and read these
words again.
- Ask sts to read the task again and fill - Read thes e words again.
in the blanks as they are required.
- Ask them to work individually in 2
minutes and then compare their - Do the task silently and the share
answers with their partners. their answers with their partners.
- Move round to check the activity.
- Ask 2 two sts to write their answers 1. NGUYEN THI NHUNG.
on the board. 2. Nhung
- Check and give remarks. 3. I am a student. (Delete other
- Ask sts to look at Task 4 and read choices)
through this task. 4.
- Explain some new words: 5.
- en'rol (v): to become a member/ a
student in a course.
en'rolment( n) - Write these words in their
- natio'nality( n): eg: Vietnamese, notebooks.
French, etc
- 'specify (v): tell clearly.
- Ask sts to listen and read these
words again. - Listen and repeat.
3. While you write:
10 - Aims: Sts practse filling in a form.
- Ask sts to read the form again and - Fill in the form.
fill in it.
- Ask them to work individually in 8
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
minutes .
- Copy the form on the board. - Discuss in pairs .
- Go round the classroom to make + Sample :
sure that all sts are writing and they Mr/ Mrs/ miss
know how to do. Surname: PHAM
- Ask them to share their answers with First name: VAN TUNG
their partners. Date of birth: FEBRUARY 20th,
4. After you write: 1991.
- Aims: to get feedback. Nationality: VIETNAMESE.
9 - Ask one st to fill in the form on the ...........................
board. - Self- correct.
- Ask another st to give remarks.
- Check and correct any mistakes.

- Ask sts to read their forms again and


correct the mistakes if there are.
1 5. Homework:
- Part D ( page 27- textbook)

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:30/08/2011
UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS
Period : 11 LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students can distinguish the sound / / from the sound /a:/ and pronounce them
correctly.
- Students revise Wh-questions and V-ing and to infinitive.

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
II. Language focus
1. Vocabulary: - Words to ask for personal information in a form.
2. Grammar: - Wh- questions.
- V-ing and To-infinitive.
III. Skills: Sts develop the following skills:
+ Speaking: - work in pairs to ask and answer Wh- questions.
+ Reading: - Read words and sentences aloud.
-Read the passages and sentences silently to do the
exercises.
IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
V. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Warm-up:
3 - Aims: to introduce the topic and to
raise sts' interest.
- Write on the boards two sentences: - Look at the board.
eg: My cousin is my uncle's son.
I want to read this example.
- Ask one st to read the examples - One st read the sentences aloud.
aloud.
- Check whether they pronounce - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
correctly, then ask the whole class to
read the sentences again.
- Point at underlined words and
introduce the topic;" Today we will
practise pronouncing two sounds / /
and /a:/.
2. Pronunciation:
10 - Aims: to introduce two sounds // - Write down two sounds.
and /a:/ and help sts to practise these - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
sounds. - Look at the book , listen and
a. Write two sounds on the board and repeat.
pronounce them clearly twice, then study far
ask sts to repeat. subject father
- Tell sts the difference between two cousin marvellous
sounds. .................
- Ask them to look at the textbook, - Read these words in pairs and
listen and repeat. check for their partners.

- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read - Look at the book and work in
the words again so that they can check pairs.-
for each other.
- Move around to help . Answers:
- Ask two sts to read again and give / / /a:/
love dancing
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
remarks. much stars
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page cousin Martha,
29 in the book. Charles
- Ask the to work in pairs to read the month dark
sentences and then find out the words lunch garden
containing sound // and the words
containing sound /a:/.
- Ask them to work in 4 minutes.
- Move around to conduct the activity.
- Ask one st to report and other sts to
give remarks.
30 - Check and give remarks. - S: They are questions beginning
3. Grammar and vocabulary: with " what, who, where,
- Aims: to revise Wh- questions and how,etc".
the use of gerund and To- infinitive - S1: What 's his job?
as well as give sts a chance to - S2: How do you go to school?
practise these grammar issues by - S3: Who teach you maths?
doing some exercises. ................
a. Wh- questions: - Look at the textbook.
- T: What are Wh- questions? - make questions then ask and
answer with their partners.
- Ask sts to give examples.
- Ask some sts to say aloud. S1: When did you come?
S2: Just a few days ago.
S3: How long did you stay in
- Ask sts to look at Ex 1 in page 29, Quang Ninh?
then make questions for the answers. S4: For a few days.
- Ask them to work individually , then S5: Who did you come with?
work in pairs to ask and answer. S6: I came with a friend.
- Let them work in 4 minutes and then ............
ask some pairs to report.
- Check and give remarks. V-ing:
- After some verbs:
admit, avoid,admit,give up, like,
love, enjoy, finish, keep, mind,
postpone, practise, suggest,
b. V-ing and To infinitive: consider, etc.
- Ask some sts to tell the whole class - Go + V-ing: go camping
the cases to use V-ing: go dancing, go shopping, go
swimming, etc.
- After prepositions.
To infinitive:
- after some verbs: afford,
arrange, choose, manage, refuse,
promise, want, need, hope, agree,
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask them about the cases to use to plan, decide, etc.
infinitive. - V + O + to infinitive:
want, advise, tell, request, order,
etc.
- Check and add any information if
necessary. EX 2:
- Ask sts to read the letter in Ex 2 and 1. to hear 6. to pay
then give the correct form of the verbs 2. going 7. to go
in brackets. 3. remembering 8. visiting
- Ask them to work alone in 5 minutes 4. doing 9. seeing
and then check it with their partners. 5. worrying 10. hearing.
- Ask two sts to write the answers on
the board. EX 3:
- Check and give remarks. 1. to go 6. making
2. waiting 7. to call
- Ask sts to do Ex 3 in 3 minutes . 3. having 8. to lend
- Ask 2 sts to do this exercise on the 4. to find 9. talking
board. 5. living 10. to post.
- Tell sts to work individually , then
share their answers with their parters.
- Ask one st to give remarks on their
friends ' task.
2 - Check and give remarks.
4. Homework:
- Part B ( page 11- workbook)
VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:04/09/2012

UNIT 3: PEOPLES BACKGROUND


Period : 12+13 LESSON 1 : READING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Students know more about famous scientists especially about Marie Curie,
and admire her.
II. Language focus
1. Vocabulary: Words to describe peoples background and studying.
2. Grammar:
- The past perfect tense.
- Past perfect vs Past simple
III. Skills: - Reading: read the text and do Matching and True or False exercise and
answer the questions.
- Speaking: discuss in pairs and in groups.
IV. Teaching Aids: textbook, chalk, board.
V. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm-up: Network...
5 + Aims: to raise sts' interest in the
reading text. - Work in groups
- Ask students to work in groups of 3-4
students . - Some Students report orally.
- Ask the students to give a list of
famous scientists and their inventions.
- Move round to check the activity.
- Ask them to work in 4 minutes and
then get feedback. The group which
has the longest list will be the winner
2. Before you read:
12 - Aims; to introduce the content of the - Discuss in pairs and then
text and provide sts with some new answer the questions.
words. - Some sts stand up to answer.
- Students are required to work in pairs
to answer the following questions:
+ Have you ever heard of Marie
Curie? - Listen to the teacher and Copy
+ What do you know about her? down
- give the correct information.
- Read and write new words on the
board.
+ background (n): lai lch
+ ease (v): lm du
+ mature (adj): full-grown
+ interrupt (v): t qung
+ humanitarian (adj): Nhn
o
humane (adj): Nhn c - Repeat the words.
+ tragic(adj): bi thng - Work in pairs to check for each
other.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
+ ambitious(adj): tham vng
+ atomic(adj): thuc v - 1 student/ 1 time
nguyn t
- Read each word 3 times and ask the
sts to repeat it.
- Leave sts 1 minute to self-practice.
- Ask 4-5 sts to read all the words aloud
in front of the class
25 - Listen and help the sts to read the - Work individually.
words correctly.
3. While you read:
- Aims: Sts practise reading and do the
tasks
+ Task 1: Matching. - Discuss in pairs to share their
- Ask the students to read the passage ideas.
independently and match the words or -Listen and self-correct the
phrases in A with their meaning in B. exercise.
- Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help - Copy down
and encourage them try to guess the * Key:
meanings of the words in the context of 1.c 2. e 3. a 4. d
the reading. 5. b
- Ask them to compare the answers
with their friends. - listen to the teacher.
- Call on some sts to read and explain - Students do the work
their answers aloud in front of the individually.
class. - Discuss the answers with their
- Give feedback and correct answers: partners.
+ Task 2: True or False. - some sts do orally while others
- Ask the sts to read the passage more watch
carefully and decide whether the + Key:
statements are true(T) or false(F). 1. T
Correct the false information. 2. F( Her dream was to become a
- Ask the sts to highlight or underline scientist)
the information in the passage that 3. T
helps the students to find the correct 4. F (She married Pierre Curie in
answers. 1895)
- Move round to help sts if necessary, 5. T
then ask them to share their answers - Self-correct the work
with their partners.
- Ask some sts to give answers.
- Listen and help the students to do the - Work in pairs orally
exercise correctly - Share their ideas.
- 9-10 pairs work orally in front
+ Task 3: Answering questions. of the class.
- Ask students to work in pairs to Key:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
answer the questions. 1.Marie Curie was born in
- Tell the students to compare their Warsaw on November 7,1867
answers with other pairs. Let them 2.She was a brilliant and mature
discuss and correct for one another. students .
- Call some pairs of students to read 3. She work as a tutor to save
aloud the questions and answers in money for a study tour abroad.
front of the class. 4.She was awarded a Nobel Prize
- Feedback and give correct answers. in Chemistry for determining the
atomic weight of radium.
5. No it wasnt. her real joy was
easing human suffering

4. After you read:


- Aims: to check sts' understanding and
to summarize the text.
* For advanced students doing at
1 home.

5. Homework:
- Ask students to write a passage of
about 60 words about a famous
scientist.

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:05/09/2012

UNIT 3: PEOPLES BACKGROUND


Period : 14 LESSON 2 : SPEAKING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
10
I.Objectives:
- Sts know how to interview a person and talk about a person's background.
II. Language focus
1. Vocabulary: Words to describe peoples background and studying.
2. Grammar:
- The past perfect tense.
- Past perfect vs Past simple
III. Skills:
- Speaking: - Asking about another person's background.
- Talking about a person's background basing on what they have
interviewed
IV. Teaching aids:
- board, chalk, textbook.
V. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
2.Before you speak
10 Aims: to guide sts how to do and
to provide them with needed
vocabulary and grammar.
+ Task 1: - Think about people's background.
- Ask sts to think about people's - Work in pairs to choose the correct
background, and then read the items.
cues in this task. + family + education
- Ask them to discuss in pairs to + experience
choose which items to tell about - Work in pairs to discuss the
someone's background. questions.
- Get feedback and give the correct- Some pairs stand up to give
answers. answers.
- Ask sts to continue working in Family:
pairs to discuss what questions - How many people are there in
they can ask when they want to your family?
know about these things. - What does your father/ mother
- Move round to conduct the do?
activity. Education:
- Ask some pairs to give answers. - Where did you study at primary
school/ junior secondary school?
- What subject do you like best?
- What degree do you have?
- Write the questions on the board Experience:
and give remarks. - How long have you been a
member of our school's speaking
club?
- Have you ever won any prizes?
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
3. While you speak:
Aims: Sts can practise making an
interwiew and then talking about
20 the person they have interwiewed. - Work in pairs to ask and answer.
+ Task 2: - One pair stand up and report:
- Ask sts to imagine they are S1: Hello. Can you tell me
journalists and ask them to work in something about yorself?
pairs to interview their partners S2: Oh, of course. What do you
about his/her background or that of want to know?
a person he/ she knows well. S1: When and where were you
- Ask them to follow the stages in born?
the textbook. S2: I was born on September 11th,
- Go around to suggest the 1991 in Hai Duong.
questions if necessary. S1: How many people are there in
- Ask one pair to report. your family?
- Give remarks so that other pairs S2: There are four: my parents, my
can correct their mistakes. sister and I.
S1: What do your parents do?
S2: my dad is a doctor and my
mum is a nurse.
+ Task 3: ...............................
- Ask sts to work in small groups
to talk about the person they have - Discuss in groups using the
learnt about from the interview. information they have got from the
- Ask them to work in 7 minutes. interview.
- Move around to conduct the
activity.
4- After you speak: - Sample answer:
Aims: Sts present what they have " Quan's cousin, Minh, was born on
8 discussed in the previous stage. November 2nd, 1985 in Hai Duong
- Ask two sts to tell the whole City. He is the only child in his
class about the people they family. His father is an engineer
interviewed about. and his mother is a teacher. As a
- Listen to them attentively and brilliant student, he always got
correct the mistakes. good marks when he was a student
- Give remarks on the whole at To Hieu Primary School and then
activity. at Le Quy Don Secondary School.
When he was fifteen , he passed the
exam to Nguyen Trai High School.
He said he liked all subjects at
school but among them he liked
English best. He has attended the
2 English Speaking Contest twice and
won the fisrt prize in 2003. At the
moment he is studying at a
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
university in Australia and he is
5- Homework: very successful..."
- Write about the people they have
interviewed about.

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:05/09/2011
UNIT 3: PEOPLES BACKGROUND
Period : 15 LESSON 3 : LISTENING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Sts know about the background of a famous person
II. Language focus
1. Vocabulary: Words to describe peoples background and studying.
2. Grammar:
- The past perfect tense.
- Past perfect vs Past simple
III. Skills: Sts develop the following skills:
- Listening and marking True/False
- Listening and filling in gaps
- Asking and answering about sbs background.
IV. Teaching aids:
- Handouts
V. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1. Homework checking:
5 - Two sts tell the whole class about two - Two sts stand in front of the
people's background. class to speak.
- Listen and give remarks and marks.
2. Before you listen:
10 Aims: focus sts on the topic and review/
introduce the words and phrases used to
describe the background of a sports star.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
+ Ask sts to work in groups and make a
list of sports and the names of the sports - Work in groups and recall the
competitions, then compare their list names of sports and the names
with other groups of the sports competitions then
make a list on a sheet of paper
- Compare theirs notes.
- Introduce the topic of the listening - Listen to the T and open the
text: A conversation between a reporter book
and an Olympic Champion and ask sts
to open their books. - Work in pairs.
T asks sts to work in pairs to ask and - Some pairs stand up and
answer the questions in the textbook report.
Can you name any Olympic S1: Can you name any Olympic
champions? champions?
What would you like to know about S2: Tran Hieu Ngan, Sergey
these people? Bubka
- Move around to help sts. S3: What would you like to
- Ask some pairs to present and gives know about these people?
remarks S4: Date and place of birth,
- Ask sts to work in pairs and recall the study, family, achievements,
forms of question used to get the hobbies
information. - Note down the forms of
- Ask some sts to speak aloud. questions:
When/where were you born?
Where did you get a general
+ Ask sts to look at the words in the education?
book and read after T / the tape. What achievement have you
- Introduce some new words got?
- Olympic champion (n): (in the What do you like doing in your
picture) free time?
- di'ploma (n): sb receive this when - Look at the words and read
he finishes a course /graduates from after T /the tape.
college or university.
- ro'mantic (adj): Romeo and Juliet - Copy the words and phrases.
is a romantic play.
- Read the words and ask sts to repeat.
- Ask sts to read the words in pairs. - Listen and repeat.
3. While you listen: - Read the words in pairs and
+ Task 1: correct each others mistakes.
20 Aims: Practice listening for specific - Some individuals read the
information by deciding whether the words aloud.
given statements are true or false.
- Introduce the conversation between a
reporter and an Olympic champion then
ask sts to listen to the conversation and
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
tick on the box to indicate True or False
statements.
- Ask sts to have a look at the statements
and read them in pairs and make sure
they understand the statements.
- Ask sts to listen to the tape/T and tick - Work in pairs to read the
the box to indicate if the statements are statements.
true or false.
- Read/ play the tape twice.
- Ask sts to compare their answer in - Listen and do the task.
pairs.
- Check sts answers. - discuss their answers in pairs.
- Read/play the tape once again, stop the - Gives their answers:
tape where necessary and conduct the 1T; 2T; 3F; 4T; 5F.
correction. - Say their answers aloud, and
+ Task 2: then correct their work if they
- Aims: sts listen for specific have the wrong answer.
information to fill in the blanks.
- Ask sts to listen to the conversation
again and fill in the gaps with the
suitable words/ phrases. - Listen to the tape / the teacher
- Read the conversation twice. and do the task
- Ask sts to compare their answer in - compare their answers.
pairs. - Give their answers.
- Check sts answers. 1. a general education 4. love
- Read/play the tape once again, stop thestories
tape where necessary and conduct the 2. lives; family 5.
correction. teacher's diploma
3. different; swimming
- Check their answers, and then
4. After you listen: correct their work if they have
- Aims: to check sts'comprehension in the wrong answers.
8 the previous stage.
- Ask sts to work in pairs and use the
information in Task 1 and 2 to ask and
answer about the Olympic champion.
- Move round to check the activities and - Ask and answer in pairs.
to make sure that sts are working
effectively.
- Check and give remarks.
- T can ask sts to ask and answer about - One/ two sts present.
the sports star(s) they like
5. Homework:
- Write a short paragraph about the
2 Olympic champion .
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:10/09/2011
UNIT 3: PEOPLES BACKGROUND
Period : 16 LESSON 4 : WRITING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students can write a simple C. V( curriculum vitae)
- They can write about a person's background basing on a C. V
II. Language focus
1. Vocabulary: Words to describe peoples background and studying.
2. Grammar:
- The past perfect tense.
- Past perfect vs Past simple
III. Skills: - Reading: read a model curriculum vitae.
- Speaking: discuss in pairs.
- Writing: fill in a curriculum, write about a person's background.
IV. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk.
V. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking:
5 - Aks one st to talk about Sally in - One st speaks.
front of the whole class. - Others listen to their friend.
- Give remarks and a mark. - Give remarks.
2. Before you write:
20 - Aims: to focus sts on the topic and
to introduce the structure of a simple
C.V, to guide sts to fill in the C.V.
+ Task 1:
- Ask sts to look at the C.V in the - look at the C.V.
textbook and introduce some new
words: - Copy these words into their
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
+ C.V( curriculum vitae) : a form notebooks.
with details about somebody's past
education and jobs.
+ tourist guide (n): a person who
goes with tourists to point out
interesting sights on a journey.
+ hotel telephonist (n): a person who
answers the phone in a hotel.
+ travel agency ( n) : a business of - Listen to the teacher and read
organising travelling for people. these words again.
- Read these words aloud and ask sts
to listen and repeat. - Read the C.V in the textbook
- Ask some sts to read again and and answer T's questions.
check. S1: His full name is David
- Ask sts to read the model C.V in Brown.
the textbook about Mr. Brown and S2: He was born on November
then answer the questions: 12th, 1969 in Boston.
T: What is his full name? S3: He attended Kensington High
T: When and where was he born? School.
S4; He passed exams in English,
T: What school did he attend? French and Mathematics.
T: What exams did he pass? S5: He was a tourist guide and a
hotel telephonist.
T: What did he do before?

- Ask sts another question: - Discuss the question in pairs


" What kind of information do you then one of them will answer.
find in the C.V?" S: We can find some information
- Ask sts to discuss this question in such as his name, his date of
pairs then ask one st to answer. birth and his place of birth, his
- Give remarks. education and his previous jobs,
etc.
- Introduce the elements of a C.V:
+Personal information: name, sex, - Copy this part into their
date of birth, place of birth. notebooks.
+ Education : name of a high
school/ a university...
+ Previous jobs: teacher/ tourist
guide/ etc. ( time)
+ Interest: dancing/ swimming/ etc.
+ Task 2: - Read the form .
- Ask sts to read the incomplete form - Work in pairs to ask and answer.
in the book. - Complete the form with suitable
- Ask them to work in pairs in 5 information.
minutes to ask and answer about
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
their partner's father/ mother then
complete the form with suitable
information. - Some sts stand up and read
- Move round to conduct the activity aloud, other sts listen and give
and to help if necessary. remarks.
- Ask some sts to read aloud the
information they have collected and
ask some other sts to give remarks.
- Check and give remarks.
3. While you write:
10 - Aims: Sts practise writing about a
person's background using the - Read Mr. Brown's C.V again.
information in a C.V and the cues in - Use the suggested words/
the textbook. phrases to write a paragraph
- Ask sts to look at Task 1 again. about Mr. Brown.
- Ask them to work independently
and write a paragraph about Mr.
Brown ,using the suggested words - Share their paragraph with their
and phrases. friends'.
- Ask sts to use the past simple to
write.
- Move around to help if necessary. - Some sts stand up and read their
- Ask sts to write in about 9 minutes, work aloud.
then compare their paragraph with - Other sts give remarks.
their partners'. " Mr. Brown was born on
4. After you write: November 12th, 1969 in Boston.
8 - Get feedback by asking some sts to He went to Kensington High
read their work aloud. School and passed examed in
- Ask some other sts to give remarks. English, French and
- Check and give the correct answer. Mathematics. He worked as a
tourist guide in a travel agency
from June 1991 to December
1998. And from 1999 to 2002 , he
worked as a hotel telephonist. He
likes music and dancing."
2 5. Homework:
- Because time is not allowed, the
writing activity in Task 3 will be
assigned as homework.

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date of preparing:12/09/2011

UNIT 3: PEOPLES BACKGROUND


Period : 17 LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS

Date of Students absence Notes


Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students can distinguish the sound / e / from the sound / / and pronounce them
correctly.
- Students revise the past perfect and distinguish it from the past simple.
II. Language focus
1. Vocabulary: Words to describe peoples background and studying.
2. Grammar:
- The past perfect tense.
- Past perfect vs Past simple
III. Skills: + Pronounciation: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises.
- Read words and sentences aloud.
+Grammar- Read the passages and sentences silently to do the exercises.
IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
V. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking:
5 - Ask one st to read aloud the paragraph - One st read his/ her paragraph
that he/she wrote about his/ her aloud.
partner's parent.
- Listen to him/her. - Listen to their friends.
- Ask one st to give remarks. - Give remarks.
- check and give a mark. - Listen to the teacher.
2. Pronunciation:
10 - Aims: to introduce two sounds /e/
and // and help sts to practise these
sounds. - Write down two sounds.
a. Write two sounds on the board and
pronounce them clearly twice, then ask - Listen to the teacher and
sts to repeat. repeat.
- Tell sts the difference between two - Look at the book , listen and
sounds. repeat.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen men man
and repeat. said sad
met mat
- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read .................
the words again so that they can check - Read these words in pairs and
for each other. check for their partners.
- Move around to help .
- Ask two sts to read again and give - Look at the book and work in
remarks. pairs.
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page - Answers:
39 in the book. /e/ / /
- Ask the to work in pairs to read the red fat
sentences and then find out the words pen man
containing sound /e/ and the words sent handbag
containing sound / /. Helen apples
- Ask them to work in 4 minutes. said pans
- Move around to conduct the activity. ................
- Ask one st to report and other sts to
give remarks.
- Check and give the correct answers.
- Ask some sts to read these sentences
aloud. - Look at the example .
- Listen and give remarks. - One st stands up and answers:
27 3. Grammar: " had started"
- Aims: To revise the past perfect tense - Form: (+ ) S + had +
and the past simple tense as well as to PII ............
give them some exercises to do. ( - ) S + had + not +
- Write an example on the board. PII .........
"When I arrived at the cinema,the film ( ? ) Had + S +
had started" PII ..........?
- Ask sts to look at the example and
identify the verb in the past perfect. - Uses:
- Ask sts to recall the form of the past + The past perfect refers to a
perfect tense and to tell the whole class. past activity or situation that
took place before another past
- Revise the use of the past perfect by activity or situation.
giving some examples. - Copy the examples and listen
Eg1: to the teacher.
When the police came , the robbers
had escaped.
The train had left when Mary arrived + The past perfect can be used
at the station. as the past form of the present
- Tell sts about the chronological order perfect.
between the past perfect and the past - Copy the examples.
simple. - Listen and repeat.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Eg 2:
I was nervous because I had never - Read through all sentences in
spoken before an audience.( I spoke this exercise.
before an audience yesterday) - Do the exercise and then share
The house was dirty. We hadn't their answers with their partners.
cleaned it for weeks. EX 1:
- Ask sts to read these examples again. 1. had broken 6. had been
+ EX1: 2. had done 7. had left
- Ask sts to read Ex 1 in page 39, then 3. had met 8. had
do the task. moned
- Ask them to work individually to put 4. hadn't turned on
the verbs into the past perfect, then 9. hadn't seen
compare their answers with their 5. had ever seen 10.had broken
partners. in.
- Let them work in 5 minutes and then
ask some sts to report. - Read the sentences carefully
- Check and give remarks. and do the exercise individually.
- Share their answers with their
partners.
EX 2:
+ EX2: 1. had just finished..... came.
- Ask sts to read the sentences in Ex 2 2. had seldom travelled .......
and then give the correct form of the went.
verbs in brackets. 3. went...... had already taken.
- Ask sts to pay attention to the 4. Did you manage........ had he
difference between the past perfect and gone.
the past simple. 5. had just got.... phoned......
- Ask them to work alone in 3 minutes had been.
and then check it with their partners.
- Ask some sts to read the answers
aloud.
- Check and give remarks.
3
4. Homework:
- Because time is not allowed, Ex3 is
assigned as homework.
- Part B ( page 19,20- workbook)

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Date of preparing:25/08/2011
Period: 18
TEST YOURSELF A
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Sts revise what they have learned in unit 1. unit 2 and unit 3.
II. Language focus: - General knowledge in unit 1, unit 2 and unit 3.
- Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units.
III. Skills: listening, speaking and writing.
IV. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board.
V. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking:
5 - Ask one st to do Ex 3 in the textbook Sentence
on the board. Mistake
- Ask one st to give remarks. Correction
- Give remarks and marks.
2. The new lesson: 1
39 - Ask sts to do part II, part III and part had climbed
IV at home in advance to save time. climbed
- Give sts the time duration for each 3
part : part II: 10 minutes, part III: 10 had turned
minutes, part IV: 15 minutes. turned
- Ask sts to do listening in class.
10 2.1. Listening: 5
- Ask sts to read the table in the had called
textbook. called
- Introduce new words: 7
+ 'minister (n): priest, vicar. had heard
+ black freedom movement (n): phong heard
tro gii phng ngi da en. 9
+ me'morial (n): an institute built to went
remind people of a person or an event. had already gone
- Read the text twice and ask sts to try - Look at the textbook and try to
to complete the table in the second understand the information in the
time. table.
- Ask sts to share their ideas with their - Copy these words into their
partners. notebooks.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Read the text again so that sts can - Listen and read after the teacher.
check their task for the last time. - Listen carefully and do the task.
- Ask 2 sts to write their answers on - Work in pairs to discuss their
the board. answers.
- Ask other sts to give remarks. 1. 15th January 1929 6. a
- Check and give feedback. minister at a
10 2.2. Reading: 2. In 1951 7. the black
- Ask sts to work in groups to freedom movement
compare their answers. 3. for 4 years 8. heard his
- Ask one st to report his/ her answers speech at the
aloud. 4. he met 9. In 1986
- listen and check. 5. they got married 10. 4th April
10 2.3. Grammar: 1968
- Ask sts to discuss their answers in - work in groups to share their
groups. ideas.
- Ask 2 sts to write their answers on - one st stands up to report.
the board. 1.F 2. C 3. A 4. D
- Ask two other sts to give remarks. 5. B
- Check and give the correct answers. - Discuss in groups.
9 2.4. Writing: - Answers:
- Ask some sts to to read their letters 1. to apply 5. got
aloud. 9. am able
- Ask some sts to give ramarks. 2. am 6. can
- Listen and give remarks on: 10. hearing
+ form + grammar and 3. attended 7. reading
vocabulary 4. passed 8. know
+ ideas + style - Read their letters aloud
3. Homework:
1 - Part D ( Page 22- workbook) - Listen to the teacher's remarks.

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:30/09/2012
Period 19+20 REVISION
I. Objectives:
- Sts revise what they have learned in unit 1. unit 2 and unit 3.
II. Language focus: - General knowledge in unit 1, unit 2 and unit 3.
- Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units.
III. Skills: ,Practising grammar.
IV. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board,copies of paper.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
V. Procedures:
I- To-infinitive& Gerund
Choose the most correct answer:
1. We are looking forward _____ you again soon.
A. to see B. to seeing C. saw D. have
seen
2. My mother was afraid to let the boy _____ the tree.
A. to risk climbing B. to risk to climb C. risk climbing D. risk to climb
3. I remember _____ but he said I did not.
A. to buy him a book B. buy him a book
C. buying him a book D. to have bought him a book
4. Remember _____ john a present . today is his birthday.
A. send B. to send C. sent D. sending
5. I suggest _____ some more mathematical puzzles.
A. do B. to do C. doing D. done
6. Would you mind _____ the door?
A. open B. to open C. opening D. opened
7. You should give up _____ or you will die of cancer.
A. smoke B. to smoke C. smoking D. smoked
8. The driver stopped _____ a coffee because he felt sleepy.
A. have B. to have C. having D. had
9. That old man tried to stop _____ because of his bad health.
A. smoke B. smokes C. smoked D. smoking
10.There is nothing prevent us from______ the mystery of that palace.
A. discover B. discovery C. discovering D. discoveries
II- Basic Tense
Choose the most correct answer:
1.I _______this film twice.
A. see B. saw C. will see D. have seen
2.Peter, please help me do the washing up. Sorry, Mum. I ______ TV.
A. watch B. am watching C. had watched D. watched
3.The farmers _____ in the field now.
A. were working B. have worked C. worked D. are working
4.The war _____ out three years ago.
A. broke B. had broken C. has broken D. was breaking
5.He ______ a cup of coffee every morning.
A. drinks B. drank C. is drinking D. has drunk
6.She ______ a lot of new books.
A. had just bought B. has just bought C. buys D.
bought
7.Up to the present, Nam_____ good work in his class.
A. does B. has done C. had done D. did
8.At present, that author ______ a historical novel.
A. is writing B. was writing C. has written D. had written

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
9.How long _____ able to drive? since 1990.
A. could you B. have you been C. were you D. are you
10.They ______ since eight oclock.
A. are talking B. have been talking C. talk D. talk
11.My brother _______ in the army from 1990 to 1995.
A. served B. has served C. had served D. is serving
12.I _____ the money from him yet.
A. havent received B. dont receive C. will receive D. am receiving
13.This is the most interesting book _____ .
A. Ive read B. I had read C. Ive ever read D. Ive ever read
14.I ____ him ten days ago.
A. see B. saw C. have seen D. will see
15.It ______ a long time since I last saw him.
A. is B. was C. will be
D. had been
16.Mr. John_______ to Los Angeles in 1992.
A. had gone B. has gone C. went D. was going
17.What ______ to you yesterday?
A. happened B. did happen C. had happened D. has
happened
18.I never go to Australia. I _____ to Australia yet.
A. will go B. went C. havent been D. have been
Why ______ you come yesterday?
19.
A. couldnt B. cant C. didnt D. A and C
20.My mother ______ in this factory since 1990
A. works B. worked C. has worked D. had worked

Date of preparing:30/08/2012
Period 21: Forty five minute test (1)
I. Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words.
1. A. food B. foot C. school D. afternoon
2. A. put B. full C. June D. pull
3. A. biology B. ecology C. historical D. morning
4. A. she B. ten C. sent D. red
5. A. make B. made C. dad D. date
II. Choose the best answer among A, B, C or D that best completes each sentence.
6. Many people lost their homes in the Earthquake. The government is trying to establish more shelters to
care for
A. the childless B. the homeless C. the blind D. the deaf
7. I can't........ to her any more.
A. talk B. tell C. say D. utter
8. Most of the children come from large and poor families, which.........them from having proper schooling.
A. makes B. prevents C. leads D. gets
9. What.........when I saw you yesterday?
A. were you doing B. you did C. did you do D. have you done
10. He........in hospital for a week so far.

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
A. was B. would be C. had been D. has been
11. Our teacher is very proud.........her work.
A. in B. at C. of D. with
12. The man...........I had seen before wasn't at the party.
A. whom B. that C. D. All are correct.
13. Information technology is very............to our lives.
A. useful B. useless C. use D. usefully
14. A computer is a............typewriter which allows you to type and print any kind of document.
A. magically B. magical C. magic D. magician
15. Can you help me find the man...........saved the girl?
A. which B. whom C. who D. whose
16. All of those..........in favour of the motion, raise your hands.
A. who are B. who is C. whom are D. whom is
17. Now Peter has got a new house. He an old one.
A. use to live B. use to lived C. used to live D. used to living
18 ..his homework yet?
A. Does he do B. Has he done C. Did he do D. Had he done
19. I enjoy to the radio while I am driving.
A. hearing B. watching C. seeing D. listening
20. Let's.for a walk.
A. went B. to go C. go D. going
III. Choose the underlined part among A, B, C or D that needs correcting.
21. They aren't used to drive on the left.
A B C D
22. How long has you known the teacher?
A B C D
23. Many ethnic children doesn't know how to read and write.
A B C D
24. She has breakfast at 8.30, then she go to work immediately.
A B C D
25. That's the man who daughter is studying with me.
A B C D
IV. Choose the correct sentence among A, B, C or D which has the same meaning as the given one.
26. The last time she used the Braille alphabet was one year ago.
A. She hasn't used the Braille alphabet a year ago B. She haven't used the
Braille alphabet a year ago.
C. She has used the Braille alphabet for a year. D. She hasn't used the Braille
alphabet for a year.
27.There are a lot of people. The people like to do things together.
A. There are a lot of people who like to do things together.B. There are a lot of people
whom like to do things together.
C. There are a lot of people who like do things together. D. There are a lot of people
which like do things together.
28. She has just made this dress.
A. She could make this dress but she didn't. B. She didn't make this dress before.
C. She has never made any dress before. D. This dress has just been made by her.
29. I have never seen such an interesting film.
A. This is the first time I have seen such an interesting film. B. This film is the best I have ever seen.
C. This is the first time I saw such an interesting film. D. This is the best film that I saw.
30. I'm not used to getting up early on Sundays.
A. I have to get up early on Sundays. B. I don't want to get up early on Sundays.
C. I feel strange to get up early on Sundays. D. I always get up early on Sundays.
V. Read the text below and choose the correct word or phrase for each space.
Computers are helpful (31) ....... many ways. First, they are fast. They can work with information (32) ........
more quickly than a person. Second, computers can work with (33).........information at the same time. Third,
they can (34) .........information for a long time. They do not forget things the common people do. Also,
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
computers are (35)........always correct. They are not perfect, of course, but they usually do not make
mistakes.
31. A. in B. by C. through D. on
32. A. hardly B. even C. wholly D. entirely
33. A. a little B. a lot of C. plenty D. much of
34. A. stay B. remain C. hold D. keep
35. A. most B. mostly C. almost D. hardly
VI. Read the text and questions below. For each question, circle the letter you choose A, B, C or D.
Louis Braille was born in France in 1809. His father had a small business. He
made shoes and other things from leather. Louis liked to help his father in the store
even when he was very small. One day when Louis was 3 years old, he was cutting
some leather. Suddenly the knife slipped and hit him in the eye. He soon became
completely blind. When he was ten years old, he entered the National Institute for the
blind in Paris. One day his class went to visit a special exhibit by a captain in the
army. One thing in the exhibit was very interesting for Louis. It showed message in
code. Armies send messages in secret codes so no one else can read them. The
captain wrote this code in raised letters on very thickjjaper.
Louis thought a lot about this code. Then he decided to write in the sames way so the
blind could "read" with their fingers. It is very difficult to feel the differences
between raised letters. Instead of letters, Louis used a "cell" of six dots. He arranged
the dots with two dots across and three down. So blind people can read and write
even write music by Braille.
36. Louis Braille's father made things from..........
A. leather B. wool C. exhibit D. codes
37. When Louis was ten years old. he began to study..........
A. at a local school B. at a university C. at a special school for the blind D. in the army
38. He saw a special exhibit. It showed...........in code.
A. messages B. systems C. arrangements D. computers
39. It is difficult to feel the differences between..........
A. coded messages B. arrangements of dots C a system of raised dots D. raised letters
40. Which of these sentences is probably not true?
A. Braille invented a system of reading for blind people. B. Braille visited an exhibit of codes.
C. Braille system is used for everyone. D. Louis Braille was an intelligent boy.
- THE END-
Correcting the test
1B 2C 3D 4A 5C 6B 7A 8B 9A 10D
11C 12D 13A 14B 15C 16A 17C 18B 19D 20C
21C 22B 23B 24C 25B 26D 27A 28D 29A 30C
31A 32B 33B 34D 35C 36A 37C 38A 39D 40C

Date of preparing:
UNIT 4: SPECIAL EDUCATION
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Period LESSON 1: READING
I. Objectives:
- Students know more about the study of disabled children
- Students know about special education and the Braille Alphabet.
II-Language focus:
1.Grammar: - Used to + infinitive
- The +adjectives
-Which as a conector.
2.Vocabulary:
- Vocabulary concerning special education.
III- Skill: Reading:
- Reading comprehension: to match words in column A with their meaning in
column B, to choose the best answers.
IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk.
V. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm-up:
3ms - Aims: Sts get used to the topic.
- Ask sts to match an adjective in A
with its meaning in B:
A B - Look at the board and listen to
1. deaf a. unable to see. the teacher.
2. dumb b. unable to hear.
3. blind c. unable to use a part of
of their body normally.
4. disabled d. unable to speak - Work in groups to match an
- Ask sts to work in groups to match adjective in A with its meaning in
the items. B.
- Ask one st from one group to present - One st presents the ideas.
the ideas. 1 - b; 2 - d; 3 - a; 4 - c
- Ask other sts to give remarks. - Listen to the teacher's remarks.
- Check and ask sts to read the - Listen and repeat.
adjectives in A aloud.
2. Before you read:
- Aims: to prepare information and - Work in groups to list out.
vocabularies for the topic. Eg: get up, wash my face, have
- Ask sts to work in groups of three or breakfast, go to school by bike,
four to list out their daily activities. listen to the teachers, write the
- Ask some sts from different groups to lessons, talk to friends, play
report their ideas. soccer, watch TV , etc.
12ms - Point out some activities.
- Write the list on the board ask sts to Eg: go to school by bike, listen to
point out what activities would be the teachers, write the lessons,
difficult for disabled people to do. talk to friends, play soccer, watch
TV, etc.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask sts to study the Braille Alphabet - The message:
and then work in pairs to work out the " We are the world"
message below the alphabet.
- Introduce some new words:
+ retarded ( adj) : less developed than - Copy the words into their
normal. notebooks.
+ Proper schooling(phr): enough and
good study at schooling.
+ Opposition(n): opposing ideas/
disagreeing ideas(viewpoints).
Opposed to ( adj)
+ Make efforts (v): try, attempt.
+ To be proud of..... (phr): = To take
pride in.....
+ add( v) : + ; subtract ( v ) : - - listen and repeat.
+ finger (n) ( demonstration )
- Ask sts to listen and read the words - some sts stand up to read the
again then ask some sts to read again. words again.
- Listen and check.
3.While you read:
- Aims: Read the passage for
information to do the tasks.
+ Task 1: Matching. - Read the passage and do the
- Ask the sts to read the passage task individually.
individually and do Task 1: the words
20 in A appear in the reading passage.
Match them with their definition in B. - Share their answers with their
- Encourage sts to guess the meaning of partners.
the words in the context. - Some sts give out their answers.
- Tell sts to compare their answers 1. c; 2 e; 3 a;4 - b ; 5 - d.
with a partner. -Listen and self-correct the
- Call on some sts to read their answers exercise.
aloud in front of the class. - Copy down
- Give correct answers and explain all
the words carefully to make sure the
students understand the meaning of the
words
+ Task 2:Multiple choice.
- Ask the students to read the passage - Students do the work
more carefully and complete the individually
sentences by circling the corresponding - Compare their answers with
letter A, B, C, or D. their partners.
- Move around to conduct the activity. - 5-6 students do orally while
- Ask sts to share the answers with their others listen to them.
partners. 1. D 2. B 3. A 4. C
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- 5-6 students are required to give 5. D
answers in front of the class(1 students/ - Self-correct the work
1 time/ 1 answer).
- Listen and help the sts to do the
exercise correctly - Read the summary passage
carefully.
- Give explanation to some words/ - Do the task individually.
phrases or expressions if needed
4. After you read:
8ms - Aims: Give the summary of the topic. - 10 students give answers orally
- Ask sts to work individually and read 1. disabled 2. read
the summary of the passage carefully. 3. write 4. efforts
- Encourage them to guess the missing 5. opposition 6. time-consuming
words. 7. maths 8. arms
- Have sts complete the summary. 9. figures 10. proud
- Note: Sts may not be familiar with - self-correct
this kind of exercise. T should provide
help when necessary.
- Call on some sts to read the
completed summary aloud in front of
the class.
- Give feedback and correct answers:
2ms 5. Homework:
- Asks students to learn by heart the
new words.
-Prepare part B.

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:
UNIT 4: SPECIAL EDUCATION
Period LESSON 2: SPEAKING
I. Objectives
- Sts can talk about someones school life and actively engage in an interview
II-Language focus:
1.Grammar: - Used to + infinitive
- The +adjectives
-Which as a conector.
2.Vocabulary:
- Vocabulary concerning special education.
III- Skill: Speaking:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Making an interview : Matching
- Asking and answering about school life of a student.
- Reporting on results.
IV. Teaching aids
- textbook, chalk, board.
V. Procedures
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm-up
3ms Aims: Sts recall the words on school.
- Asks sts to work in groups and make - Work in groups.
a list of words relating to school. The - Suggested words:
words must be correctly spelled and Subjects: English, maths,
related to the topic. literature,...........
- Ask some groups to report. Tests, breaks, homework, teacher,
- The group with the longest list will students,.....Secondary school ,
be the winner. high school.......
2.Before you speak:
Aims: Sts can match the words, give Sts answer:
15 the correct answers - My favourite subjects are Math,
ms - Asks sts some questions: English....
+ What are your favourite subjects? - I dont like ..........
+ Which one dont you like? - It takes me about ........
+ How much time do you prepare for
your lessons every day? - Work in pairs to fill the right
+ Task 1: Fill in blanks with the right questions into the blanks.
questions - Some sts give their answers
- Asks sts to study the questions in the A - 4 ; B - 1 ; C - 2 ; D -6;
interview carefully and work in pairs. E - 3 ; F - 5 ; G - 7
- Ask some sts to give their answers in - Two sts read the interview aloud
front of the class.
- Listen and give the correct answers.
- Ask sts to work in pairs and carry
out the interview using the right
questions .
3. While you speak: - Work in pairs , ask and answer
Aims: Sts can ask and answer about the questions on board using his or
15 school life of their partner. her own information to answer the
ms + Task 2 questions.
- Write the questions in task 1 on - The student in role of the
board and ask sts to work in pairs ,ask interviewer takes notes the
and answer about their school life information of the partner in their
using the questions on board. notebook.
- Go round to help sts when necessary. - One pair stand up to present their
T can play the role of the interviewee interview.

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
to help sts if necessary. S1: Which lower- secondary
school did you go to?
- Ask one pair to present in front of S2: I went to Nguyen Luong Bang
the whole class. lower- secondary school in Thanh
Mien District.
........................
- Listen and ask other sts to give
remarks.
- Give remarks.
4. After you speak: - Work individually using the
Aims: Sts can tell about their example in the textbook as the
partners school life. beginning:
+ Task 3: " Hanh went to Lequi don lower
10m - Ask some sts to tell the whole class school......"
s what they know about their partner
using the notes from the interview.
- Ask other sts to listen to their
classmates and comment on
presenters work.
- Listen and make necessary
corrections.
5 Homework:
Write a paragraph about their partner's
2ms study at school( about 150 words)

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:
UNIT 4: SPECIAL EDUCATION
Period LESSON 3: LISTENING
I. Objectives:
- Sts know about a special photography club.
II-Language focus:
1.Grammar: - Used to + infinitive
- The +adjectives
-Which as a conector.
2.Vocabulary:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Vocabulary concerning special education
- Verbs to describe everyday activities
- Vocabulary on photography
III- Skill: Listening:
Sts develop the following skills:- marking True/false statements, filling in the gaps
- retelling the story.
IV. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board.
V. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1. Homework checking:
5ms Two sts talk about their school. Others listen and give remarks
2. Before you listen:
Aims: to focus sts on the topic and
review/ introduce the words in the
listening text. - Work in groups to discuss the
a. Ask sts to discuss the following questions.
questions in groups:
+ Have you ever taken part in a
club? What kind of club is it? - Some sts present.
+ What are the club activities?
+ What do you think of the club
activities?
- Ask sts to present.
b. Introduce some words related to
photographs:
15m - 'photograph (n) = photo
s - pho'tography (n) : the art of taking
photos.
- photog'raphic (adj)
- pho'tographer (n): the person - Read the words after T and some
whose job is to take photos. read individually
- photo'genic(n): looking more - Work in pairs read the text and do
beautiful in photos the task
- Ask sts to read the words after T - Some sts give answers and give
and calls on some sts to read remarks
individually
- Ask sts to read the text carefully
and use the given words to fill in
the gaps. Sts work in pairs.
- Ask some sts to give answers and
give remarks .
* Introduce some new words/ - Copy the words and phrases.
phrases
- sur'roundings (n): everything
around you/ the place
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
where you live - Listen and repeat.
- 'sorrow (n): sadness - Read the words in pairs and correct
- mute (v): = dumb (unable to each others mistakes.
speak) - Some individuals read the words
- exhi'bition (n) an exhibition of aloud
paintings/ photos ...
ex'hibit (v)
- 'labourer (n): a person who does
hard work (with his
hands and body)
- 'stimulate(v): = encourage(v)
- Read the words and ask sts to
repeat.
- Ask sts to read the words in pairs.
- Ask some sts to read the words
again.
3. While you listen:
+Task 1 - Listen to the T
Aims: Practice listening for
specific information by deciding if
the given statements are true or
false. - Work in pairs to read the statement.
- Introduce the talk about a very
special photography club: The Vang
Trang Khuyet Club. T asks sts to - Listen and do the task.
listen and tick on the box to indicate
True or False statements. - Compare their answers
- Ask sts to have a look at the - Give their answers.
statements and read them in pairs
and make sure they understand the Key: 1-T; 2-F; 3-T; 4-F; 5-T.
statements.
- Ask sts to listen to the tape/T and - Check their answers and then
tick the box to indicate if the correct their work if they have the
statements are true or false. T wrong answers.
20 reads/plays the tape twice.
ms - Ask sts to compare their answer in
pairs.
- Check sts answer.
- Read/ play the tape once again,
stop the tape where necessary and
conduct the correction.
+ Task 2
- Ask sts to listen to the talk again
and fill in the gaps with the suitable - Listen to the tape / the teacher and
word. do the task
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Encourage sts to fill in / guess the - Compare their answers.
most suitable words to fill in the - Give their answers.
gaps 1. photography 6. simple
- Read the conversation / play the 2. 19 7. peaceful
tape twice. 3. exhibition 8. chickens
- Ask sts to compare their answer in 4. 50 9. stimulated
pairs. 5. beauty 10. escape
- Check sts answers. - Check their answers, say it aloud,
- Read/ play the tape once again, and then correct their work if they
stop the tape where necessary and have the wrong answers.
conduct the correction.
IV. After you listen:( for advanced Sts ask and answer in groups.
students}
- Ask sts to work in groups and tell
each other about the photography
club. Sts may need to use the
following suggested questions:
5ms - Who are the members?
- What are they doing?
- How many photos are on
display?
- What are the photos about? One/ two pairs present.
- What does the passion help
them?
- Move round to check the activities
and to make sure that sts are
working effectively.
- Ask one or two sts to present in
front of the whole class.
- Give remarks.
IV. Homework:
- Write a short paragraph about the
Vang Trang Khuyet Club/ another
1ms club.
VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparin
UNIT 4: SPECIAL EDUCATION
Period LESSON 4: WRITING
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
I. Objectives:
- Students can write a letter of complaint.
II-Language focus:
1.Grammar: - Used to + infinitive
- The +adjectives
-Which as a conector.
2.Vocabulary:
- Vocabulary concerning special education.
III- Skill: Writing:
- Reading: read the advertisement.
- Speaking: work in pairs to complete the dialogue.
- Writing: complete a letter of complaint using the suggested information.
IV. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk.
V. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Warm-up:
3ms - Aims: to introduce the topic and
to raise sts' interest in the topic.
- Ask sts: " What kind of letter do - Listen to the teacher's question.
you write when you feel angry
about something or unhappy with
something?" - " a letter of complain"
- Suggest: " A letter of complaint or
a thank-you letter?" - "Yes/ No"
- " Have you ever written a
complaint letter?"
- " Do you know how to write a
complaint letter?"
- Introduce the topic of the lesson.
2. Before you write: - Read the advertisement in pairs .
20ms - Aims: to help sts to prepare
vocabulary and information before
they write. - Copy these words into theit
+ Ask sts to work in pairs and read notebooks.
the advertisement.
- Explain some new words:
+ native teacher (n): teacher
from English - speaking
counties( England, The USA,
Australia...) - Listen and read after the teacher.
+ free (a): cost nothing - Some sts stand up and read aloud,
+ air-con'ditioned (a): to be other sts listen and give remarks.
equipped with air- conditioner.
- Ask sts to listen and repeat and
then some sts stand up to read - Answer teacher's questions:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
again.
- Move round to conduct the S1: No, there are only native
activity and to help sts if necessary. teachers.
- Ask some questions to make sure S2: No more than 20 students.
that sts understand the S3: No, they are free.
advertisement. S4: Yes, all the rooms are air-
T: Do Vietnamese teachers teach in conditioned.
this center? S5: They start at 5.30 p.m and finish
T: How many students are there in at 8.30p.m
a class?
T: Do you have to pay for books
and cassette tapes?
T: Are there air- conditioners in the
classrooms. - one st asks the teacher and other
T: What time do the classes start listen carefully.
and finish? S: Are you happy with your study at
- Give the correct answers. English For Today Center?
+ Task 1: S: Are all the teachers native
- Ask sts to read the requirement of speakers?
this task and make sure they know - Work in pairs to complete the
what they are going to do. dialogue.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to - Two pairs report their answers .
complete the dialogue. - Sample answers:
- Give the first example:( ask one st 3. that's not true. My class has over
to play A's role) 30 students.
4. I had to pay for them.
T:( reply) No, I'm not happy with it 5. only some of them. Mine is not.
at all. 6. in fact classes often start late and
T: No, not all of them are native finish early.
speakers.
- Note sts that their answers may - Read the incomplete letter.
vary from one to another.
- Move round to help sts and to - Listen to the teacher.
encourage them to speak naturally.
- Ask two pairs to report .
- Ask other sts give remarks. - Copy to their notebooks.
- Check and give the correct
answers. - Listen to the teacher.
+ Task 2: - Read the dialogue in task 1 again
- Ask sts to read the letter of and prepare to write.
complaint in the book.
- Introduce briefly the structure of a
complaint letter.
A letter of complaint usually
includes three main parts: -
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Opening
- Explaining the problem.
- Suggesting a resolution
- Ask sts to write the second part of
the letter basing on the dialogue in
task 1. - Do the writing task.
- Remind sts that this is a formal
letter so they should not use
contractions and that they should
use connectors to make their
writing smoother.
- Suggest some connectors: first of
all, firstly, secondly, furthermore, in
addition, to make the matter worse,
finally...
3. While you write:
- Aims: Sts practise writing the
second part of the letter basing on
15ms the information in task 1 .
- Let sts write the letter.
- Move around to conduct the - Read their writing:
activity. " First of all you say that there are
only native teachers, but my class
4. After you write: has one Vietnamese teacher and two
5ms - Get feedback by asking one or two native teachers. You also say that
sts to read their work aloud. each class has no more than 20
- Ask some other sts to give students but there are over 30
remarks. students in my class. In the
- Check and give the correct advertisement , you say we can have
answer. books and cassette tapes free of
charge but in fact we had to pay for
them. To make the matter worse, the
classroom is not air-conditioned.
That is quite different from the
advertisement. Finally, the class time
is not the same as what the
1ms advertisement says. Classes not only
start late but also finish early."

5. Homework:
- Part D ( page 16- workbook)

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date of preparing
UNIT 4: SPECIAL EDUCATION
Period LESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS
I. Objectives:
- Students can distinguish the sound /o/ from the sound / o:/ and pronounce them
correctly.
- Students can use " the + adjective" as a noun, review "used to + infinitive" and
combine two sentences with " which".
II-Language focus:
1.Grammar: - Used to + infinitive
- The +adjectives
-Which as a conector.
- Pronunciation: /o/ and / o:/
2.Vocabulary:
- Vocabulary concerning special education.
III- Skill: Language focus
- Read words and sentences aloud.
- Read the sentences silently to do the exercises.
IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
V. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking: ( 5mins)
- Ask one st to do the homework on the - One does the exercise on the
5ms board board.
- Look at their friend's task.
- Ask one st to give remarks. - Give remarks.
- check and give a mark. - Listen to the teacher.
2. Pronunciation:( 10 mins)
- Aims: to introduce two sound /o/ and /
10ms o:/ and help sts to practise these sounds.
a. Write two sounds on the board and - Write down two sounds.
pronounce them clearly twice, then ask
sts to repeat. - Listen to the teacher and
- Tell sts the difference between two repeat.
sounds. - Look at the book , listen and
- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen repeat.
and repeat. top call
boss sport
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read doctor four
the words again so that they can check .................
for each other. - Read these words in pairs and
- Move around to help . check for their partners.
- Ask two sts to read again and give - Look at the book and work in
remarks. pairs.
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page
52 in the book. - Answers:
- Ask them to work in pairs to read the /o/ / o:/
sentences and then find out the words socks lost
containing sound /a/ and the words on doctor
containing sound / o:/. top walking
- Ask them to work in 2 minutes. box called
- Move around to conduct the activity. job sport
- Ask one st to report and other sts to ................
give remarks.
- Check and give the correct answers.
- Ask some sts to read these sentences
aloud.
- Listen and give remarks.
3. Grammar: - Read the examples.
27ms a. Aims: to introduce " the + - Try to guess the meaning
adjective"as a noun and have sts do Ex S: - The young = young people
1. - The old = old people.
- Present the use of " the + adjective" by
giving examples.
E.g: The young are very active.
Her real joy is looking after the - Copy these words.
old.
- Focus sts on the underlined words and
ask them to try to guess their meaning.
- Give the answer: " we use "the +
adjective" to describe a group of
people."
- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the
task. - Listen and repeat.
- Explain any new words if necessary - Some sts read again.
+ 'ambulance (n) : a kind of vehicles EX 1:
used to carry sick/injured people. 1. the injured
+ unemp'loyed (n) : without a paid job. 2. the unemployed
- Read these words aloud and ask sts to 3. the sick
listen and read these words again. 4. the rich..... the poor
- Ask some sts to read again and check.
- Ask sts to do the exercise individually
and then compare their answers in pairs.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Check the exercise sentence by
sentence.
- Listen and give remarks.
b. Aims: to review " used to + infinitive"
and get sts to do Ex 2.
- Ask sts to recall the use of " used to"
by giving an example:
" She used to get bad marks when she - Think about the teacher's
was at primary school" question and answer:
- S: We use " used to +
- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and infinitive" to talk about past
then share the answers with their actions or past habits that no
friends. longer exist.
- Move round to help if necessary. - Do the exercise individually
- Ask two sts to do this exercise on the and compare their answers with
board. their partners.
- Ask one st to give remarks. - Do the exercise on the board.
2. used to have 3. used
- Check and give remarks. to live
4. used to eat 5. used
to be
c. Aims: to revise the use of " which" as 6. used to take 7. used
a connector and ask sts to do exercise 3. to be
- Recall sts of the relative clauses with " 8. did you use to go
which" used to refer to the whole of the
earlier clause.
- Ask sts to read the requirement of Ex2
and read the example carefully.
- Explain the example if necessary.
- Ask sts to do this exercise.
- Go round to conduct the activity. - Listen to the teacher.
- Ask some sts to read sentence by
sentence. - Read the requirement and the
- Listen and give remarks. example carefully.
5. Homework - Do Ex 3.
3ms - Part B ( Page 24- workbook) 2-c 5-a
3-f 6-d
4-g 7-b
VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:10/09/2012
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
UNIT 5: TECHNOLOGY AND
YOU
Period: 27 + 28 LESSON 1: READING
I. Objectives:
- Students know more about computers.
II. Language focus:
1Vocabulary:-Words to talk about modern technology.
2.Grammar: -Present perfect.
-Present perfect passive.
-Relative pronouns: who, which,that
III. Skills: Reading
- Reading comprehension: to match words in column A with their
meaning in column B, to find the best title for the reading passage and then answer
the questions.
IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk.
V. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1. Homework checking
5ms - Ask two sts to do EX2 and EX 2:
EX4 in the workbook on the 1. stimulate 2. origin 3.
board. disabled 4. sorrow 5. professional
6. opposition 7. time - consuming
8. exhibit
EX 4:
1. She used to play the piano but she
hasn't played the piano for years.
2. She used to be very lazy but she
works very hard these days.
- Ask other sts to give remarks. .............................
- Give remarks and marks. - Look at the board and listen to the
2. Before you read teacher.
- Aims: to prepare information
12ms and vocabularies for the topic.
- Ask sts to look at the textbook
and work in pairs to match each - Work in pairs to match the items with
numbered item with one of the words/ phrases.
words or phrases in the box.
- Move round to conduct the - Key: 1- D ; 2 - E ; 3 - G ; 4 - C ;
activity. 5-A;6-F;7-B;8-H
- Ask some sts to give feedback. - Listen to the teacher's remarks.
- Check and give remarks.
- Introduce some new words: - Copy the words into their notebooks.
+ mi'raculous ( adj ) :
remarkable.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
+ de'vice ( n ) : a thing for
special purposes.
+ a'ppropriate ( adj ) : suitable
+ 'storage ( n ) : the storing of
information
+ 'data ( n - U ) : information. - listen and repeat.
+ 'memo ( n ) : a record of - some sts stand up to read the words
agreement. again.
+ leave ( n ) : the time that a
person is permitted to be absent
from work.
- Ask sts to listen and read the
words again then ask some sts to
read again. - Read the passage and do the task
- Listen and check. individually.
3.While you read:
- Aims: Read the passage for
23ms information to do the tasks.
+ Task 1: Matching. - Share their answers with their
- Ask the sts to read the passage partners.
individually and do Task 1: the - Some sts give out their answers.
words in A appear in the reading 1. c; 2 - e; 3 a; 4 - b ; 5 - d.
passage. Match them with their -Listen and self-correct the exercise.
definition in B. - Copy down
- Encourage sts to guess the
meaning of the words in the
context. - Students do the work individually
- Tell sts to compare their
answers with a partner.
- Call on some sts to read their - Compare their answers with their
answers aloud in front of the partners.
class. - C . What can the computer do?
- Give correct answers and
explain all the words carefully - Self-correct the work
to make sure the students
understand the meaning of the
words
+ Task 2: Passage Headings.
- Ask the students to read the - Work in pairs to to ask and answer.
passage more carefully and - Answers:
choose the best title for it. S1 : What can the computer do to help
- Move around to conduct the us in our daily life?
activity. S2: It can help us visit shops, offices
- Let sts dicuss the answer with and places of interest; pay bills; read
their partners. newspapers.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask one st to give the answer S3: Why is a computer a miraculous
and encourage them to explain device?
their choice. S4: Because it is capable of doing
- Give further explanation and anything you ask; it can speed up the
tyhe correct answer. caculations, ect.
- Give explanation to some
words/ phrases or expressions if
needed. - Suggested ideas:
+ Task 3: Answering questions. 1. Advantages:
- Ask sts to work in pairs and - storing data
answer the questions using the - a means of entertainment
cues. - a useful device in many services.
- Go around the class and 2. Disadvantages
provide help if necessary. - a waste of time and money on games.
- Call on some pairs to report in - being harmful to people's health
front of the whole class. - spam or electronic junk mail.
- Listen and give remarks.
4. After you read
- Aims: Give sts a chance to
discuss the topic..
- Ask sts to work in groups to
discuss two questions:
1. What are the advantages of
8ms computers?
2. What are the disadvantages
of computers?
- Move around to conduct the
activity.
- Ask some representatives to
report.
5. Homework:
2ms - Part A ( page 28 ).
VI-EXPERIENCES:

UNIT 5: TECHNOLOGY AND


YOU
Period: 29 LESSON 2: SPEAKING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
10

I. Objectives:
- Sts know about the uses of modern inventions
- General knowledge: Sts can talk about the uses of the modern inventions in daily
life such as radio, TV, fax machine, air conditioner......
. II. Language focus:
1Vocabulary:-Words to talk about modern technology.
2.Grammar: -Present perfect.
-Present perfect passive.
-Relative pronouns: who, which,that .
III. Skills:
+ Speaking: - Asking and answering about the uses of the modern inventions.
-Talking about the uses of the information technology.
+ Reading: - Using the suitable verbs to complete the sentences.
IV. Teaching aids
Textbook, chalk, board, pictures of some modern inventions.
V. Procedures:

Time Teachers activities Students activities


1. Homework checking
5ms - Ask two sts to talk about the
uses of computers in daily life.
- Listen and give the corrections.
2. Before you speak
Aims: Sts get used to the topic
and then they ask and answer
10m about the uses of modern - Look at the board and think about
s inventions. these inventions.
- Give some pictures and writes
the names of these inventions on
board:
a. Electric cooker e. Computer
b. Refrigerato f. Cassette player - Sts read the name of the inventions
c. Television g. Air conditioner in chorus and then individually.
d. Washing machine
h. Fax machine
- Ask sts to give name for the
each modern invention. - Work in pairs.
- Ask some sts to read their -Suggested answers:
names aloud and then give 1. Could you tell me what the radio is
remarks. used for?
+ Task 1: Asking and answering Well, its used to listen to the news
- Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and learn foreign languages.
and answer about the uses of 2. Could you tell me what the TV is
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
mordern inventions basing on the used for?
cues. Well, its used to watch the news,
- Do the first example: performances and football matches.
+ Have you got a cell phone? 3. Could you tell me what the fax
Yes, ....../ No,........ machine is used for?
+Could you tell me what the Well, its used to send and receive
cell phone used for? letters quickly.
Well, it s used to talk to 4. Could you tell me what the electric
people when you are away from cooker is used for?
home. Well, its used to cook rice, meat, fish
- Give sts the form of the and keep food, rice warm.
questions and answer: 5. Could you tell me what the air
Question: conditioners is used for?
What is the ............. used Well, its used to keep the air cool or
to..........? cold when its hot or cold.
Answer:
It is used to ........+ infinitive
or infinitive phrase.
- Go around to help sts if
necessary. - Read all the new words and make
- Ask some pairs to report. sure they know them.
- Listen and give remarks. - Read the new words .
- Work in pairs to find the suitable
3. While you speak verbs
Aims: Sts practice completing
the suitable verbs to talk about - Some sts to read the sentences
the uses of modern inventions. 1. store 2. transmit 3. process
+ Task 2: Completing sentences 4. send 5. hold 6. make
- Ask sts to read all the verbs in 7. send 8. receive 9.design
the box and explain some of
15m them: - Work in groups to discuss.
s + transmit ( v ) truyn
thng tin
+ process( v ): x l
thng tin
+ make use of: s
dng, tn dng - Work in group.
- Ask sts to read the new words. - One or two students talk about the
- ask sts to work in pairs uses of information technology:
- Go around to help sts. - It allows us to .......
- Ask some sts to read the - It can help us store ....
sentences aloud in front of the transmit ......
class. process .......
- Listen and give correct answers:
5. After you speak
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Aims: Sts can talk about the uses
of modern inventions
+ Task 4:
- Ask sts to work in groups to
talk about the uses of information
12ms technology using the information
above.
- Go around to help sts.
- Ask one or two sts to present in
front of the class.
3ms - Listen and give remarks .
5. Homework
Write a passage about the uses of
information technology.
VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:12/09/2012
UNIT 5: TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Period: 30 LESSON 3: LISTENING
I. Objectives:
- Sts know how difficult it is for the elderly to learn how to use a computer.
II. Language focus:
1Vocabulary:-Words to talk about modern technology.
2.Grammar: -Present perfect.
-Present perfect passive.
-Relative pronouns: who, which,that .
III. Skills:
- Listening and marking True/False
- Listening and filling in gaps
- Speaking: Discussing and retelling the story
IV. Teaching aids:
- chalk, board, textbook.
V. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1. Homework checking:
5mi - Two sts tell the whole class about
ns the roles of information technology
in our daily life.
2. Before you listen:
Aims: to focus sts on the topic and
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
10m review/ introduce the words and - Work in groups and make a list of
s phrases used in the listening text. the modern devices on a sheet of
- Ask sts to work in groups and paper
make a list of modern electronic/ Sts compare theirs notes.
digital devices that they use daily - TV - radio
and then compare their list with - camcorder - computer
other groups - camera - cell phone
.............................
- Discuss in groups
- Some sts stand up and give their
answer.
- Ask sts to discuss if it is difficult
to learn how to use these devices
- Ask some sts to give their answer. - Look at the words and read after
T /the tape.
- Asks S to look at the words in the
book and read after T / the tape. - Copy the words and phrases.
- Introduce some new words
- 'memory (n): the power to
remember things
- re'fuse (v): say 'no' when - Listen and repeat.
someone asks you to do st. - Read the words in pairs and correct
- ex'cuse (n) saying sorry for each others mistakes.
doing st wrong - Some individuals read the words
- Read the words again and ask sts aloud
to repeat.
- Ask sts to read the words in pairs.

- Ask some sts to read the words


again. - Listen to the T.
3. While you listen:
20m + Task 1
s Aims: Practise listening and
marking True/ false. - Read the statements in pairs.
- Introduce the topic: An old
company director talking about his - Listen to the tape / the teacher and
experience of learning how to use do the task
the computer.
- Ask sts to listen to the tape/ - Compare their answer.
teacher reading and decide whether - Give their answer.
the given statements are true or 1. F 2. T 3. T 4. F 5. F
false. 6. F
- Ask sts to read the statements to - Check their answer, say it aloud,
see if they understand them. and then correct their work if they
- Play the tape/ read the text twice have the wrong answer.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
and ask sts to tick to the box to
indicate T/ F statement and
underline the false information
- Ask sts to compare their answer in - Work in pairs to read the passage
pairs. and try to fill in the gaps.
- Check sts answer.
- Listen and do the task.
- Play the tape once again, stop the - Give their answer.
tape where necessary and conduct - Check their answer, say it aloud,
the correction. and then correct their work if they
have the wrong answer.
+ Task 2 1. invited 2. still 3. refused
Aims: Practice listening for specific 4. excuse 5. anything
information by filling in the gaps.
- Ask sts to have a look at the
passage and read them in pairs and
make sure they understand it. T - Work in pairs.
encourages sts guess the word to fill
in the gaps.
- Ask sts to listen to the tape/T once
or twice again fill in the gaps with - One/ two sts present.
the missing words.
- Ask sts to compare their answer in
pairs.
- Check sts answer.
- Play the tape once again, stop the
tape where necessary and conduct
the correction.
4. After you listen:
- Ask sts to work in pairs and use
8ms the suggested sentence and the
information in Task 1 and 2 to retell
the story about the old director.
- Move round to check the activities
and to make sure that sts are
working effectively.
- Ask one or two sts to retell the
story in front of the whole class.
- Check and give remarks.
IV. Homework:
2ms Write a short paragraph about how
they learnt to use the computer

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date of preparing:14/09/2012
UNIT 5: TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Period: 31 LESSON 4: WRITING
I. Objectives:
- Students can write simple instructions on how to use some household appliances.
II. Language focus:
1Vocabulary:-Words to talk about modern technology.
2.Grammar: -Present perfect.
-Present perfect passive.
-Relative pronouns: who, which,that
III. Skill : Writing
-Read the set of instructions on how to use a public telephone.
- Speaking: work in pairs and in groups to read the set of instructions and to
answer the questions.
- Writing: write a set of instructions on how to operate a TV with a remote
control.
IV. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk.
V. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Warm-up:
5ms - Aims: to introduce the topic and to
raise sts' interest in the topic.
- Ask sts to in groups to match the - Listen to the teacher.
word in A with the words in B.
A B
1. insert a. the long pips - Work in groups to match.
2. make b.a button
3. press c. a card
4. hear d. a call
- Ask a member of a group to present - A st stands up to present the
the ideas. ideas:
- Listen and check. 1 - c ; 2 - d ; 3 - b ; 4 - a.
- Introduce the topic of the lesson.
2. Before you write:
18ms - Aims:to give sts a chance read
samples of some instructions and to
help sts to prepare vocabulary and
information before they write.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Explain some new words: - Listen to the teacher.
+ lift ( v ) : raise something
+ re'ceiver ( n ) : the part of a - Copy these words into theit
telephone that receives the sound. notebooks.
+ slot ( n ): a narrow opening to put
a card or a coin in
+ 'ambulance ( n ): a special
vehicle used to for carrying sick
people to hospital.
+ remote control ( n ): ( picture )
+ cord ( n ): ( realia ) - Listen and read after the teacher.
- Ask sts to listen and repeat and then - Some sts stand up and read aloud,
some sts stand up to read again. other sts listen and give remarks.
+ Task 1:
-Ask sts to work in pairs and read
the set of instructions on how to use - Read the set of instructions in
a public telephone. pairs .
- Move round to conduct the activity
and to help sts if necessary.
- Ask some questions to make sure
that sts understand the instructions. - Answer teacher's questions:
T: What should I have to make a S1: You will need a phone card and
call? the number you are calling.
S2: There are four stages.
T: How many stages are there to
operate the telephone? S3: You should dial 114.
T: What number shoudl I dial to call
the fire service?
- Listen and check.
+ Task 2:
- Ask sts to work in pairs to read the - Work in pairs to do the task.
instructions again and find out the
connectors and the imperative form - Two sts read their answers aloud:
of the verbs. + Connectors : first, next, then,
- Move around to help sts if until.
necessary. + Verbs : lift, insert, press, wait.
- Ask sts to compare their answers - Check their answers and correct
with other pairs. them if they are wrong .
- Ask 2 sts to read their answers
aloud. - Listen to the teacher and then
- Ask other sts give remarks. work in pairs.
- Check and give the correct - Some pairs report:
answers. S1: What do you have to make sure
if you want to operate the ... ?
+ Task 3: S2: If you want to operate ..., you
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask sts to look at the TV and the have to make sure that the cord is
remote control in the picture and plugged in and the main is turned
then work in pairs to answer the on.
questions. ...............................
- Move round to conduct the activity
and to help sts if necessary.
- Ask some pairs to report and check. - Do the writing task.
- Read their writing:
3. While you write: ".......................................................
- Aims: Sts practise writing a set of ..........
instructions on how to operate a TV To turn on the TV, press the
10ms with a remote control. POWER button
- Let sts write the instructions. To turn off the TV, press the
- Move around to conduct the POWER button again.
activity. To select a programme, press the
4. After you write: PROGRAMME button.
5ms - Get feedback by asking one or two To watch VTV1, press button
sts to read their work aloud. number 1.
- Ask some other sts to give remarks. To watch VTV2, press button
- Check and give the correct answer. number 2.
1ms 5. Homework: ..................................
- Part D ( Page 33- workbook)

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:
UNIT 5: TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Period: 32 LESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS
I. Objectives:
- Students can distinguish the sound / u / from the sound /u:/ and pronounce them
correctly.
- Students revise the present perfect, the present perfect passive and the relative
clauses with " who, which" and "that."
II. Language focus:
1Vocabulary:-Words to talk about modern technology.
2.Grammar: -Present perfect.
-Present perfect passive.
-Relative pronouns: who, which,that
III. Skill : Pronunciation and grammar
+ Speaking: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises.

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
+ Reading: - Read words and sentences aloud.
- Read the sentences silently to do the exercises.
IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
V. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking:
5ms - Ask one st to tell their friends how - One st speaks aloud in front of the
to make tea in front of the whole whole class.
class. - Give remarks.
- Ask one st to give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.
- Check and give a mark.
2. Pronunciation:
10ms - Aims: to introduce two sound / u /
and /u:/ and help sts to practise
these sounds. - Write down two sounds.
a. Write two sounds on the board - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
and pronounce them clearly twice, - Look at the book , listen and repeat.
then ask sts to repeat. / u/ /u:/
- Tell sts the difference between two put food
sounds. pull school
- Ask them to look at the textbook, full tooth
listen and repeat. .................
- Read these words in pairs and check
for their partners.
- Then ask sts to work in pairs to - Look at the book and work in pairs.
read the words again so that they - Answers:
can check for each other. /u/ /u:/
- Move around to help . could Miss June
- Ask two sts to read again and give put Moon
remarks. book shoes
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in full boots
page 60 in the book. look school
- Ask them to work in pairs to read ................
the sentences and then find out the
words containing sound / u / and the
words containing sound /u:/.
- Ask them to work in 2 minutes.
- Move around to conduct the
activity.
- Ask one st to report and other sts
to give remarks.
- Check and give the correct
answers.
- Ask some sts to read these
sentences aloud.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Listen and give remarks. + Form:
3. Grammar: ( + ) S + have/ has + PII
a. Aims: to revise the present ( - ) S + have/has + not + PII
perfect tense and have sts do Ex 1. ( ? ) Have/ Has + S + PII ?
28ms - Ask sts to think about the present + Uses:
perfect and tell the teacher the form - The present perfect expresses the
and the use of this tense. idea that something happened in the
- Ask one st to present. past before now at an unspecified
time in the past.
- Ask some sts to give examples. - Do the task individually and then
- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do share their ideas with their friends.
the task. - Two sts do this task on the board.
- Ask sts to do the exercise EX 1:
individually and then compare their 2. He has turned on the TV.
answers in pairs. 3. He has tidied the house.
- Move round to conduct the 4. He has cleaned the floor.
activity. ............................
- Ask two sts to do this task on the - Listen and correct their work if
board. necessary.

- Ask one st to give remarks. + Form:


- Listen and give remarks. ( + ) S + have/ has + been + PII
( - ) S + have / has + not + been +
PII
( ? ) Have / Has + S +been + PII ?
- Do the exercise individually and
compare their answers with their
b. Aims: to review the present perfect partners.
passive and get sts to do Ex 2. - Do the exercise on the board.
- Ask sts to tell the teacher the form
of the present perfect passive.
- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually
and then share the answers with
their friends.
- Move round to help if necessary. 1. A new hospital for children has
- Ask two sts to do this exercise on been built in our city.
the book. 2. Another man-made satellite has
- Ask one st to give remarks. been sent up into space.
- Check and give remarks. 3. More and more trees have been cut
c. Aims: to revise the use of "who, down for wood by farmers.
which, that" as relative pronouns .................................
and ask sts to do exercise 3. - Listen to the teacher.
- Recall sts of the relative clauses
with " who,which, that". - Listen to the teacher.
- Ask sts to read the requirement of - Read the requirement carefully.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Ex3 and then do the task - Do Ex 3.
individually. 1. which 6. who
- Go round to conduct the activity. 2. which 7. who
3. which 8. which/ that
- Ask some sts to read sentence by 4. who 9. which
sentence. 5. who 10. who
- Listen and give remarks.
2ms 5. Homework
- Part B ( Page 30 - workbook)
VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date for preparing:


UNIT 6: AN EXCURSION
Period: 33 LESSON 1: READING
I. Objectives:
- Students know more about some famous places in Vietnam and read an informal
letter in English..
II-Language focus:
1- Grammar: - The present progressive tense ( with a future meaning).
- Be going to ( Near future)
2- Vocabulary: - Words to talk about outdoor activities or activities in an
excursion.
III- Skill: - Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups.
- Reading comprehension: to do multiple choice exercise and to answer
the questions .
IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk.
V. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm-up:
3ms Aims : Sts get used to the topic.
- Ask the sts to work in groups of - Work in groups of 3-4 students
three or four and make a list of
famous places in Vietnam. - 3 students speak aloud.
- 3 representatives are required to
speak out the lists in front of the - Listen to their friends and the teacher.
class
- Check if who has the longest list
wins the game.
2. Before you read:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Aims: to prepare information and
vocabularies for the topic and to
15ms provide students with new - Listen and then copy down
words/phrases.
a.Vocabulary:
- Provide the students with new
words/phrases.
+ Lotus (n): hoa sen
+ resort (n): ni ngh
+ picturesque site (n): ni
p nhu tranh
+ cave ( n ): hang ng
+ permission (n): s cho
php. - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
to get smbs - Read these words silently.
permission : xin php ai - Others listen.
+ persuade (v): thuyt - Self-correct.
phc
- Read each word twice and ask the
sts to repeat it.
- Leave the sts 1 minute to self-
practice.
- Ask 1-2 sts to read all the
words/phrases aloud in front of the
class
- Listen and help the students to - Work in pairs
read the words/phrases correctly. - One st report the answer:
b. Matching: 1 - d ( Thien Mu Pagoda)
- Ask sts to work in pairs to match 2 - b ( Ha Long Bay )
the photos with the information 3 - a ( One-pillar Pagoda )
given. 4 - c ( Da Lat )
- Ask one st to report the answer - Some sts stand up and speak aloud.
and ask him/her to say the names of
these places if they can.
- Ask some other sts to tell the
teacher which of places they would
like to visit and the reasons as well. - Do the task individually.
3. While you read:
17ms Aims: Sts read the letter for
information to do the tasks. - Share their answers with their
+ Task 1: Multiple choice. partners.
- Ask sts to read the letter - Report their answers:
individually and choose the best
answer( A, B, C, or D) to complete Key: 1 C 2D 3-A
each of the sentences.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Tell sts to compare their answers
with a friend.
- Call on some sts to report and
explain their answers aloud in front
of the class. - Work in pairs to ask and answer the
- Give correct answers to the sts questions.
Task 2:Answering questions. 1. They are going to have some days off
- Ask the students to work in pairs at the end of the first term .
and answer the questions. 2. Because they want to understand
- 5 pairs of students are required to more about rock formations and many
act out orally in front of the class. of them have never been inside a cave.
3. Its only over 20 kms.
4. They are going to have a two - day
trip and a night campfire.
5. Lan is anxious about her parents
permission. They may not want to let
her stay the night away from home.
- Listen and self-correct.

- Listen and check the answers in


front of the class. - Work individually.
8ms 4. After you read: - Work in pairs to compare the answers.
Aims: Give the summary of the 1. going to go on 2. some caves
topic. 3. want to see 4. have learnt
- Ask sts to work independently and 5. their trip 6. only problem
fill in each blank with a suitable 7. to persuade them 8. her classmates
group of words from the text.
- Ask them to read the summary
carefully before doing the task.
- Ask the sts to compare the
answers with a friend.
- one or two sts are required to read
the completed summary.
2ms - Check and give feedback
5. Homework: ( 1 min )
- Part A ( page 35 ).
VI-EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Date for preparing:
UNIT 6: AN EXCURSION
Period: LESSON 2: SPEAKING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know about a boat trip.
- Students can talk about the seat plan on a boat trip on Lake Michigan in
Chicago.
II. Skill: Speaking - Asking and answering about the seat plan on a boat trip.
- Talking about a boat trip abroad.
III. Teaching aids:
Textbook, chalk, board.
IV. Procedures:

Time Teachers activities Students activities


1. Homework checking
5ms - Ask one st to talk about their - One st talks about his/ her excursion.
excursion which they like best.
- Listen and give corrections.
2 Before you speak
Aims: focus sts on the topic and
introduce new words
12ms - Ask sts to look at the picture (page - Look at their books in page 67
67) and give the new words:
+ sundeck (n): platform extending
from side to side of a ship
+ get sunburnt (v): the skin hurt or - Listen and take notes.
destroyed by the sunlight
+ travel sickness (n): the state of being
sick due to traveling
+ non air- conditioned >< air -
conditioned
+ refreshment (n): room that serves
food and drinks to refresh in a boat - Listen and read the new words and
+ occupied (adj ): being kept, in use then sonme sts stand up and read
- Read these words aloud and ask sts again.
to listen and repeat.
+ Task 1:
a. Ask sts to work in groups to get the - Work in groups to read the
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
information about the people in the information .
pictures.
- Ask sts some questions: - Some sts answer the teachers
1. Where doesn't Mrs Andrews questions
like to sit? 1. She doesn't want to sit in the
2. What does she want? sundeck.
3. Where does Susan want to sit? 2. She wants to see all the students.
4. What doesn't she wantt? 3. She wants to be near Mary.
.................................. 4. She doesn't want to get sunburnt.
.......................
b. Ask sts to list all the seats for each
person - Work in groups to find the best seat
- Ask sts to work in groups. for each person.
- Move around to help sts if necessary. - Some sts report.
- Ask some sts to report. S1: Mrs Andrews seats arent in the
sundeck but can help see all the
students: seats 46, 43, 40, 45, 34.
S2: Marys seats have plenty of fresh
air : seats 31, 37, 19, 20, 26, 32.
S3: Johns seats arent air
- Check and give remarks. conditioned; suitable for taking
photographs: seats 10, 11, 12.
S4: Tim seats are in the sundeck: 1,
6.
3. While you speak S5: Sam seats can help a good view,
Aims: Sts practice asking and safe: seats 16, 29, 34
15ms answering about the seat plan on an
boat trip.
+ Task 2: Deciding the best seat for
each person. - Look at the seat plan and read the
- Ask sts to read the model in the conversation in the textbook as an
book. example - Work in groups to call all
- Ask sts to work in groups to do the the suitable seats for each person.
task. - Some sts present to give the answers.
- Give sts some useful expressions: A: Now lets begin with Mrs. Andrew.
What do you think?/ What is Which seat seems suitable for her?
your idea? B: I think she should sit in seat 12.
I think Mary should ....... From here she can see all the
Shed better ............. students.
Seat ..... would be better ........ C: But look! Its in the sundeck and
Maybe you are right but I still she doesnt like it. What about seat
think that ...... 34?
- Ask sts to make the conversation A: OK. I think she will like it, so seat
like the example in the book. 34 for Mrs. Andrew.
- Go around to help if necessary. ...............................................
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Call on some sts to conduct the
conversation in front of the class.
- Listen and check.
4. After you speak - Work in pairs to discuss the plan.
Aims: Sts practice making the - Some sts talk about their seat
10ms conversation to arrange the seats on preference in front of the class.
a boat trip for themselves.
+ Task 3: Giving reasons
- Ask sts to work in pairs and discuss:
Which seat do you think the most
suitable for you? Why? Use
information in Task 1 as suggestions
- Call on some sts to talk about their
seat preference in front of the class.
- Listen and give corrections.
5. Homework-
2ms -Asks Ss to learn by heart the new
words and prepare Listening part.

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date for preparing:


UNIT 6: AN EXCURSION

Period: LESSON 3: LISTENING


Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Sts know about a weekend picnic in the Botanical Garden.
- The past simple tense
- Vocabulary on sts' everyday life
II. Skill: Listening:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Listening and ordering pictures
- Listening and filling in gaps
- Listening and answering questions
- Discussing and making a plan for a class picnic
III. Teaching aids:
- Textbook , tapes and cassette.
IV. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1. Before you listen:
10 Aims: focus sts on the topic and
ms review/ introduce the words and
phrases used in the listening text. - Work in groups to ask and answer the
a. T asks sts to work in groups and questions
asks each other the following
questions.
- Do you often go for a picnic?
- Who do you go with?
- When is the best time for a -Some sts stand up and give their
picnic? answer.
- Why do people go for picnic?
- Ask some sts to give their answer. - Read after T .
b. T asks S read after T / the tape the - Copy the words and phrases.
words in the textbook without
looking at them.
- Introduce some new words
+destination (n): e.g.: the train to
Hanoi: Hanoi is the ~
+ glorious (adj): famous /
wonderful / beautiful. - Listen and repeat.
+ spacious (adj) adj of space - Read the words in pairs and correct
+ left-overs (n): foods left after a each others mistakes.
meal - Some individuals read the words
+ delicious (adj): good. tasty aloud.
- Read the words again and ask sts to
repeat.
- Ask sts to read the words in pairs.
- Ask some sts to read the words - Look at the pictures and listen to the
again. T.
2. While you listen:
22ms + Task 1:
Aims: Practise listening and
ordering pictures.
- Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the - Describe the other pictures in pairs.
pictures in the textbook and describe - Listen to the teacher.
each picture.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Give one example:
"In the first picture is a peaceful - Listen to the teacher and do the task.
place with green trees, a big lake - Compare their answer.
and white clouds in the sky." - Give their answer.
- Introduce the situation about a st Key: 1a 2e 3b 4c 5f 6d
talking about a picnic to the - Check their answer and then correct
Botanical garden. T asks sts to listen their work if they have the wrong
to the teacher reading and number answer.
the picture in the correct order.
- Read the text twice.
- Ask sts to compare their answer in
pairs.
- Check sts answer.

- Read the text once again, stop


where necessary and conduct the
correction. - Work in pairs to read the passage and
+ Task 2: try to fill in the gaps.
Aims: Practice listening for specific - Listen and do the task.
information by filling in the gaps.
- Ask sts to have a look at the given - Give their answer.
sentences and read them in pairs and 1. was just a few 2. to pay a
make sure they understand them. T visit
encourages sts guess the words/ 3. at the school gate 4. a short tour
phrases to fill in the gaps. 5. playing some more
- Ask sts to listen to T once or twice - Check their answer, and then correct
again fill in the gaps with the their work if they have the wrong
missing words/phrases. answer.
- Ask sts to compare their answer in
pairs.
- Check sts answer.
- Read the text once again, stop
where necessary and conduct the
correction.
+ Task 3:
Aims: Practice listening for specific
information by answering given - Work in pairs to read the questions.
questions. - Listen and do the task.
- Ask sts to read the questions in - Compare their notes.
pairs and make sure they understand - Check their answer, and then correct
the questions and know what their work if they have the wrong
information they need to answer the answer.
questions. 1. It was very nice.
- Ask sts to listen to T once/twice 2. Yes, it was.
and take short notes to answer the 3. It was beautiful.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
questions. 4. Because it was so peaceful and quiet
- Ask sts to compare their answer in in the garden.
pairs. 5. They took pictures, played games,
- Read the text once again, stop talked, sang and danced.
where necessary and conduct the
correction. - Work in groups.
3. After you listen:
- Ask sts to work in group and plan
10ms for their picnic this weekend.
- Ask sts to pay attention to the
times, means of transport, picnic
sites, food, equipment... -Two sts present.
- Move round to check the activities
and to make sure that sts are working
effectively.
- Ask two sts to report in front of the
whole class.
- Check and give remarks.
4. Homework:
3ms Write a short paragraph about how
they learnt to use the computer

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date for preparing:


UNIT 6: AN EXCURSION
Period: LESSON 4: WRITING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students can write a confirmation letter responding to a request or an
invitation.
II. Skill: Writing: write confirmation letters.
III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
IV. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking :
5ms - Ask one st to talk about his/ her plans
for the picnic if his/ her class could
have one. - Listen to their friend and give
- Ask other sts to listen to their friends remarks.
and give remarks.
- Check and give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.
2. Before you write:
- Aims:to give sts a chance read the
20ms sample letters and to help sts to
prepare vocabulary and information
before they write.
+ Task 1:
- Ask sts to look at two letters in page - Listen to the teacher carefully.
69.
- Explain the definition of " request " - Copy these words into theit
and " confirmation " notebooks.
letters :
+ Request is the letter that asks for
information or help.
+ Confirmation is the letter that
responds to the request. It confirms
whether the help is provided or the - Read the letters in pairs.
information is available or not.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to read the
two letters and to find the requests in
Nga's letter and confirmation in Hoa's. - Share their ideas with other sts.
- Ask sts to pay attention to the Requests: "Can you go shopping
structure showing requests and with me to buy the things we need
confirmation. for the trip?"
- Move round to help if necessary. Confirmation: Certainly, I will
- Ask sts to compare their ideas with help you to prepare everything you
other pairs. need for the trip.
- Ask two sts to say their answers I will be waiting for you at 2.30
aloud. p.m.

- Listen and give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.


+ Task 2: - Copy these words.
- Ask sts to read the situations in this
part.
- Explain some new words:
+ bunch ( n ): things of the same kind
grouping together. Eg: a bunch of - Read after the teacher and then
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
bananas/ keys. some sts stand up to read them
+ 'wildlife ( n ) : life of fre animals/ again.
plants in the nature. - Read the situations thoroughly.
+ a'ccept ( v ): > < refuse
- Ask sts to listen and repeat and then
some sts stand up to read again.
- Ask sts to read the situations in 2
minutes and then ask them some S1: She 's going to have birthday
questions to make sure they understand party at.....
the situations. S2: She asks me to buy her two
- Ask some sts to answer T's questions: bunches of...
T: What is Lan going to do? S3: Yes, I will.
T: What does she ask you to do? S4: he wants to borrow a book
T: Will you help her? about .....
T: What does Minh want to do? ..................................
............................... - Listen to the teacher and take
- Remind sts that these are informal notes.
letters so they can use abbreviations
and that they should mention the
information in requests again.
12ms 3. While you write:(
- Aims: Sts practise writing one of the - Do the writing task.
two confirmation letters.
- Divide the whole class into two
groups and ask sts in each group to
write one letter. - Read their writing:
- Let sts write in 8 minutes. 1. Dear Lan,
- Move around to conduct the activity. It's great to hear about your
4. After you write: birthday party.
7ms - Get feedback by asking two sts to Sure, I'll help you with the
read their work aloud. shopping this Saturday. It wouldn't
- Ask some other sts to give remarks. be a problem. And I'll bring them
- Check and give the correct answer. to your house befoer the party. I
- If there is enough time, T can have sts want to help you prepare the party,
exchange their writing among sts too.
within a group so that they can check I'll see you on Saturday then.
their friend's work and give remarks Hang.
2. Dear Minh,
Sure you can have my book. I've
just finished reading it.
But 9 a.m . this Saturday is not a
good time . I won't be home at
that time. Can you come later? Is
10 a.m. good for you?
Tell me what you think. Tung
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
1ms 5. Homework: ( 1min)
- Write the other letter.
VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date for preparing:


UNIT 6: AN EXCURSION
Period : LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS
I. Objectives:
- Students can distinguish the sound / / from the sound / :/ and pronounce them
correctly.
- Students revise the present progressive( with a future meaning) and be going to
II. Skill: - Pronunciation: / / and / :/
- The present progressive ( with a future meaning).
- " Be going to".
III. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
IV. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking:
5ms - Ask one st to read his/her - One st speaks aloud in front of the
confirmation letter aloud . whole class.
- Give remarks.
- Ask another st to give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.
- Check and give a mark.
2. Pronunciation:
10ms - Aims: to introduce two sound / /
and / :/ and help sts to practise these
sounds. - Write down two sounds.
a. Write two sounds on the board and - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
pronounce them clearly twice, then - Look at the book , listen and
ask sts to repeat. repeat.
- Tell sts the difference between two // / :/
sounds. teacher bird
- Ask them to look at the textbook, together work
listen and repeat. about church
.................
- Read these words in pairs and
check for their partners.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read


the words again so that they can check - Look at the book and work in
for each other. pairs.
- Move around to help .
- Ask two sts to read again and give - Answers:
remarks. // / :/
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page about heard
60 in the book. pagoda excursion
- Ask them to work in pairs to read the father birds
sentences and then find out the words teacher learning
containing sound / / and the words river German
containing sound / :/. ................
- Ask them to work in 2 minutes.
- Move around to conduct the activity.
- Ask one st to report and other sts to
give remarks.
- Check and give the correct answers.
- Ask some sts to read these sentences - Read the examples.
aloud.
- Listen and give remarks.
3. Grammar:
28ms Aims: to revise the present
progressive with a future meaning, "
be going to" and have sts do Ex 1,
EX 2 and EX 3. + The present progressive: a
- Give two examples: definite arrangement.
eg: Fiona is having a birthday party + "Be going to": an intention to do
next Saturday. something in the future although no
I'm feeling unwell so I'm going to definite arrangement has been
see the doctor some time this week. made.
- Ask sts to think about the use of - Listen to the T attentively and
present progressive and " be going to" take notes.
in these sentences.
- Ask one st to present.
- Remind sts that " be going to" can
also be used to predict something with
some evidence.
Eg: The ceiling looks unsafe. I think
it's going to fall.
- Notes: Avoid using the present
progressive with " be" and " go"
- Ask some sts to give examples.
+ Exercise 1:
- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
task.
- Ask sts to do the exercise
individually and then compare their - Do the task individually and then
answers in pairs. share their ideas with their friends.
- Move round to conduct the activity. EX 1:
- Check the exercise sentence by 1. are you doing 3. Are you going to
sentence. 2. is getting married. 4. am going to
- Listen and give remarks. be sick. 5. is going to
- Listen and correct their work if
necessary.
+ Exercise 2:
- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and - Do the Ex individually.
then share the answers with their EX 2:
friends. 1. is going 2. are having
- Move round to help if necessary. 3. is going to catch 4. are you
- Ask two sts to do this exercise on the putting
board. 5. isn't going to give
- Ask one st to give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.
- Check and give remarks.
+ Exercise 3: - Read the requirement carefully.
- Ask sts to read the requirement of - Do Ex 3.
Ex3 and then do the task individually. 1. Are you going to see it?/ I'm
- Go round to conduct the activity. visiting to see it.
2. we are going for a picnic.
- Ask some sts to read sentence by 3. is he going to do with it / he 's
sentence. going to buy a villa.
- Listen and give remarks. 4. It's going to rain.
5. is going to clean them.
5. Homework
2ms - Part B (Page 37 - workbook)
VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date for preparing:


Period: TEST YOURSELF B
I. Objectives:
- Sts revise what they have learned in unit 4. unit 5 and unit 6.
II. Language focus:
- General knowledge in unit 4, unit 5 and unit 6.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units.
III. Skill: listening, reading and writing.
IV. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board.
V. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
5ms 1. Homework checking: EX 3:
- Ask one st to do Ex 3 in the 1. is going to be 2. am not using
workbook on the board. 3. is going to rain 4. are having
5. is going to buy 6. are doing
7. are you leaving 8. is coming/ is
- Ask one st to give remarks. travelling/ 9. am meeting.
- Give remarks and marks. - One st gives remarks.
2. The new lesson:
- Ask sts to do part II, part III and
part IV at home in advance to save
time.
- Give sts the time duration for each
part : part II: 10 minutes, part III:
10 minutes, part IV: 15 minutes.
- Ask sts to do listening in class. - Look at the textbook and try to
10ms 2.1. Listening: understand the information in the
- Ask sts to read the table in the table.
textbook.
- Introduce new words: - Copy these words into their
+ in'habitant (n) : a person living in notebooks.
a place - Listen and read after the teacher.
+ lo'cate (v) : build in a place - Listen carefully and do the task.
location (n) - Work in pairs to discuss their
+ stroll (v) : walk slowly answers.
- Read the text twice and ask sts to 1. 50 miles to the west of London
try to complete the table in the 2. 120,000 inhabitants/ people
second time. 3. market town 4. biscuit
- Ask sts to share their ideas with factory.
their partners. 5. computer industry 6. in central
- Read the text again so that sts can England
check their task for the last time. 7. 90,000 people 8. university
- Ask 2 sts to write their answers on 9. car factory 10. Cowley
the board. Road
- Ask other sts to give remarks.
- Check and give feedback.
10ms 2.2. Reading: - work in groups to share their ideas.
- Ask sts to work in groups to - one st stands up to report.
compare their answers. 1.F 2. F 3. T 4. F 5.
- Ask one st to report his/ her T
answers aloud.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Listen and check.
2.3. Grammar: - Discuss in groups.
10ms - Ask sts to discuss their answers in - Answers:
groups. 1. by scientist 2. for other
- Ask 2 sts to write their answers on 3. there is 4. which
the board. attempts
5. all the 6. organizing
the
7. inventions a 8. developed
- Ask two other sts to give remarks. by
- Check and give the correct 9. it is 10. it be
answers. wanted?
10ms 2.4. Writing:
- Ask some sts to to read their - Read their letters aloud
letters aloud.
- Ask some sts to give ramarks. - Listen to the teacher's remarks.
- Listen and give remarks on:
+ form + grammar and
vocabulary
+ ideas + style
3. Homework:
- Part D ( Page 40 - workbook)

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Period 37+38:

Forty five minute test 2


Name....................................
Class:...
Mark Teacher's comment

I-Language focus:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
A-Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the
others.
1. A. because B. caught C. laugh D. autumn
2. A. wood B. choose C. boot D. pool
3. A. picture B. suggest C. sunburnt D. future
4. A. proper B. shop C. clock D. morning
5. A. encourage B. problem C. excellent D. kitchen

B. Find and correct the mistake in each sentence.


1. Did he used to smoke a lot when he was young?
A B C D
2. The blind is unable to see anything.
A B C D
3. Every evening since last Christmas, I take my dog out for a walk in the park.
A B C D
4. It's eleven o'clock and you don't finish breakfast yet.
A B C D
5. The fax machine broke down yesterday, but it is working again. It has repaired.
A B C D

II. Reading
Choose A,B,C or D to fill each numbered space to complete the letter.
14 Hillside Road,Dover.
December 12th, 2005
Dear sir,
I am writing to complain (1)..... the car that I (2)..... from you yesterday. It is
just a heap (3)..... scrap; when I (4)..... to start it this morning the key wouldnt turn in
the lock, the battery was flat and two of the plugs needed (5)..... . Then when I finally
got it going, the bonnet wouldnt stay closed and the drivers side door fell (6)..... .
And I tried to stop to (7)..... up the door, the brakes didnt (8)..... so I crashed into a
tree and smashed the radiator. Also, one of the wheels came off.
Do you really think this car is (9)..... $150? Well, if you do, I dont. What are you
going (10)..... about it?
Yours faithfully,
Eric Smith

1.A. about B. of C. on D. at
2.A. buy B. has bought C. had bought D. bought
3.A. for B. of C. in D. on
4.A. took B. got C. tried D. gave
5.A. changing B. changed C. change D. to change
6.A. of B. off C. away D. on
7.A. get B. give C. pick D. come
8.A. go B. come C. do D. work
9.A. valuable B. worth C. cost D. sold
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
10.A. to do B. do C. to doing D. did
III. Writing:
A. Combine the sentences to make one sentence using the relative pronouns. Make
any necessary changes.
1. The bus goes up Oxchard Avenue. It doesn't stop at the supermarket.
.....................................................................................................................................
2. I am lazy. This annoys my parents.
............................................................................................................................
3. The performance went on for three hours. It was carefully prepared.
..............................................................................................................................
4. Jill always come to class late. This makes the teacher angry.
.........................................................................................................................
5. The film is about a girl. The girl runs away from home.
......................................................................................................................

B. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one.
1. They have taught her how to sew.
She has.................................................................................
2. They have built a school near our house.
A new school .............................................................
3. He has just cleaned the windows.
The windows have ..................................................................
4. It's the first time I 've ever met such a famous person.
I have never .............................................
5. I haven't seen him since I was a student.
I last ............................................................................

Answers

I. Language focus:
A. 1.C 2.A 3.C 4.D 5.A
B. 1. A he use
2. B are unable
3. B have taken
4. C haven't finished
5. D has been repaired

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
II. Reading
1. A 2. D 3. B 4. C 5. A
6. B 7. C 8. D 9. B 10. A
III-Writing:
A. 1. The bus which goes up Oxchard Avenue doesn't stop at the supermarket.
2. I am lazy, which annoys my parents.
3. The performance which was carefully prepared went on for three hours. .
4. Jill always come to class late, which makes the teacher angry.
5. The film is about a girl who runs away from home.

B. 1. She has been taught how to sew.


2. A new school has been built near our house.
3. The windows have just been cleaned.
4. I have never met such a famous person before.
5. I last saw him when I was a student.
........................................................................................................................
..

Date: 10/11/2010 UNIT 7: THE MASS MEDIA


Period : 39 LESSON 1 : READING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students read about TV programme schedules and complete the following
tasks.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
II. Language focus:
1.Vocabulary: - Words to talk about the media: kinds of mass media,programmes of
radio and TV, advantages and dis advantages...
2.Grammar: - The present simple tense.
- Because of/ inspite of
III. Skill:- Reading comprehension: Read for general ideas and specific
information.
IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk.
V. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities

3ms 1.Warm-up:
Aims: sts get used to the topic.
+ Jumbled words. - Work in groups of 3-4 sts
- Give 5 words about the forms of mass - Sts write the words individually
media whose letters are in the wrong on the blackboard
order and ask sts to work in groups of 1. television
3-4 sts to rearrange them in good order 2. newspaper
to make the right words. 3. radio
1. enslieisov 2. rwepeapns 4. magazine
3. idora 4. agenmzia 5. video
5.evido - Listen to the teacher.
- 4 representatives are required to write
the words on the blackboard.
- Check and give remarks.

10ms 2. Before you read:


Aims: to prepare information and - Work in pairs.
vocabularies for the topic.
+ Pairwork: - Do the work orally in front of the
- Ask the sts to work in pairs to answer class.
the question given in the part and some
other questions.
- For each question, 3-4 sts are required
to answer orally in front of the class ( 1 - Listen and copy down.
st/ 1 time).
- Gather the ideas and give some
background information about TV
channels in Vitetnam.
+ VTV1: Combination of Politics,
Economics and Entertainment. - Listen and then copy down
+ VTV2: Science and Education.
+ VTV3: Sports and Entertainment.
+ VTV4: For the overseas
Vietnamese.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
+ VTV5: For the Ethnic minority
groups
+ Vocabulary:
- Provide the students with new
words/phrases
+ channel (n) : Knh
( truyn hnh)
+ Mass media (n): public
institutions that report news
and other stories .
+ Population and Development
(phr): Dn s v pht trin - Listen and repeat.
+ TV Series (n): Phim truyn - Some sts stand up and read these
hnh di tp word aloud.
+ Folk Songs (n): Dn ca nhc - Others listen.
c - Self-correct.
+ News Headlines (n): im
tin chnh
+ Weather Forecast (n): D bo
thi tit
+ Quiz Show (n): tr chi
truyn hnh
+ Portrait of Life (phr): Chn
dung cuc sng
+ Documentary (n): Phim ti
liu
+ Wildlife World (n): Th gii
thin nhin hoang d
+ Around The World (phr):
Vng quanh th gii
- Read each word/phrase twice and ask
sts to repeat it and leave sts 1 minute to
20ms self-practice.
- Ask 4-5 st to read all the word/phrases \
aloud in front of the class - Work in pairs to read the
- Listen and help sts to read the programmes and do the task.
words/phrases correctly.
- Share their answers with their
3. While you read: friends.
Aims: Read the passage for - Some sts present their answes:
information to do the tasks. 1 c; 2 a; 3 d; 4 b
+ Task 1: Matching. - Others listen.
- Ask sts to read the TV programme
schedules and do task 1: Match the
- Work individually
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
words in A which appear in the reading 1. T 2. T
passage with their definitions in B. 3. F ( The Nature of Language is
- Sts are required to compare their on VTV3.)
results with their partners. 4. T
- 4 sts are required to do the task orally 5. F (VTV1 starts at 5:35 and the
in front of the class (1 st/ 1 time). last programme starts at 23:30
- Listen and help sts to do the task - Others listen and check.
correctly.
+ Task 2: True or false: - Work in pairs.
- Sts are required to read the - Some pairs stand up and ask and
programmes carefully, individually and answer:
decide whether the statements are true 1. There are five films on.
(T) or false (F). 2. At 9:00 a.m, 12:00 at noon,
- 5 sts are required to give their 7:00p.m, 11:00p.m on VTV1 and
answers orally, individually in front of 7:00p.m on VTV3.
the class with the evidence in the 3. VTV2
reading passage. 4. The Quiz Show.
10ms - Listen and check the answers orally in 5. (You should watch) VTV1
front of the class. 6. Football
+ Task 3: Answering questions.
- Ask sts to work in pairs and answer
the questions in the book basing on the - Work in pairs.
information in the reading passage.
- 6 pairs are required to answer orally
in front of the class ( 1 pair/ 1 time). - Some sts talk in front of the whole
- Listen and help sts to answer the class.
2ms question correctly. - Others listen.
- Listen and self-correct.

4. After you read:


Aims: to give the summary of the topic.
- Sts are required to work in pairs to
tell their partners about one of the TV
programmes they like watching best
and explain why.
- 2-3 sts are required to give short talks
on the given topic.
- Get feedback and help the students to
give correct talks

5. Homework:
- Write a paragraph about a programme
you like best.

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date: 10/11/2010 UNIT 7: THE MASS MEDIA


Period : 40 LESSON 2 : SPEAKING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know about the differences and similarities of some popular types of
the mass media.
II. Skill: - Speaking about different types of the mass media.
- Discussing about the features the types of the mass media have in
common and the main features each of them has.
III. Teaching aids:
Textbook, chalk, board.
IV. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1. Homework checking
5ms - Ask one st. to talk about the TV - One student talk about the TV
programme they like watching best. programme they like best.

7ms 2. Before you speak - Write the new words and read
Aims: Sts distinguish the different them aloud.
types of the mass media from the
others.
- Introduce some new words:
+ 'orally ( adv ) : spoken by
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
mouth - Work in pairs
+ 'aurally ( adv ) : seen by eyes
+ 'visually ( adv ): heard by ears - Listen and take notes.
- Ask sts to read the new words orally.
+ Task 1: - Some sts give their answer in
- Ask sts to work in pairs and decide front of the class.
which items are types of the mass 1. Television
media. 2. Radio
- Ask sts about the definition of the 3. Newspapers
mass media: 4. The Internet
Mass media ( take a singular or
plural verb) : communication media
in general- all of the communication
media that reach a large audience,
especially television, radio and
newspapers.
- Call on some sts to explain their - Read after the teacher and ask the
answers in front of the class. meaning if they dont know.
- Give sts correct answers.
3. While you speak
Aims: Sts compare the features of the
18ms types of the mass media.
+ Task 2: Work out what features the
types of the mass media have in
common and what main features each - Work in pairs to discuss some
of them has. Ask sts to use the cues popular types of the mass media.
below. - Some sts give the answers in
- Ask sts to read some phrases: front of the class.
present + The mass media:
receive - Provide information and
provide information and entertainment
entertainment + The radio:
get - Present information and
deliver entertainment orally (through
- Give sts the meaning of those words mouth)
if they dont know. - Receive information
- Ask sts to work in pairs and carry aurally(through ears)
out the activity using the cues in the .................................
book.
- Go around the class and help sts if
necessary.
- Call on some pairs to explain their
answer in front of the class.

- Ask sts to look at the information - Work in groups to answer the


above and talk about the different questions in the book.
types of mass media. S1: Television, radio, newspapers,
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
eg. The common feature of the mass the Internet.
media is that they all provide S2: Provide/ deliver information
information and entertainment. and entertainment.
Television provides information S3: TV presents information and
and entertainment orally and visually, entertainment orally and visually
and we receive them through our eyes while radio provides ...........
and ears. - Some sts answer:
......................................... I like TV most because I can
4. After you speak watch films and performance on it/
12m Aims: Talking about the different I prefer newspapers because I can
s types of the mass media. choose to read them whenever I
+ Task 3: have free time, and I can also
- Ask sts to work in groups and choose to read only what Im
answer the following questions: interested in.
+What are the different types of the ...............................................
mass media? ...
+ What features do they have in
common?
+ What are their distinctive( own)
features?

- Ask sts some more questions :


Which types of the mass media do
you usually get information from?
Which one do you like most? Why?
- Go around to help sts if necessary.
- Ask some sts to answer and give
correct answers.

5. Homework:
- Write a paragraph ( about 50 words)
about the features of the types of
mass media.

3ms

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date: 11/11/2010 UNIT 7: THE MASS MEDIA


Period : 41 LESSON 3 : LISTENING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Sts understand 2 news stories on the radio and di the exercises.

II. Skill: - Listening: tick on the word they heard, fill in the gaps, answer the
questions
- Speaking: Retell the stories

III. Teaching aids:


- Textbook , tape
IV. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1. Before you listen:
10m Aims: focus sts on the topic and
s review/ introduce the words and
phrases used in the listening text.
+ Pairwork: - Work in pairs to ask and answer
- Ask sts to work in pairss and asks the questions
each other the following questions.
- How often do you listen to the
radio?
- Which program do you like - Some sts stand up and give their
listening to? answer.
- Do you like listening to strange
stories? - Copy the words and phrases.
- Ask some sts to give their answer.
+ New words
+ Mount (n): e.g.: Mount Everest - Listen and repeat.
+ in spite of + N (phr): = despite + N - Read the words in pairs and
= Although + Clause correct each others mistakes.
- Give some examples - Some individuals read the words
- Read the words asks sts to repeat. aloud.
- Ask sts to read the words in pairs.
- Ask some sts to read the words
again.

2. While you listen: - Listen to the teacher.


+ Task 1: (7 mins)
Aims: Practise listening and tick the
word they hear. - Listen to the tape and do the task
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
23ms - Tell sts that they are going to listen
to two news stories and the words will
appear in the stories - Compare their answer.
- Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the - Give their answer.
words given and guess what the news News story 1: strong, cloudy.
stories about. News story 2: healthy, young,
- Ask sts to listen to the news and tick highest, wonderful
the right column to indicate which - Check their answer, say it aloud,
words appear in which stories and then correct their work if they
- Play the tape twice and ask sts to have the wrong answer.
compare their answer in pairs.
- Check sts answer.

- Play the tape once again, stop the - Work in pairs to read the passages
tape where necessary and conduct the and try to fill in the gaps.
correction.
- Listen and do the task.
- Give their answer.
+ Task 2: (8 mins) News story 1
Aims: Practise listening for specific 1. has caused floods
information by filling in the gaps. 2. has left their homes
- Ask sts to have a look at the stories 3. have risen
in the textbook and read them in pairs 4. two metres
and make sure they understand them. 5. has stopped
T encourages sts to guess the words/ 6. cloudy
phrases to fill in the gaps. 7. strong wind
- Ask sts to listen to the tape once or News story 2
twice again to fill in the gaps with the 1. twenty third 2. 4,418
missing words/phrases. 3. California 4. wonderful
- Ask sts to compare their answer in 5. young and healthy
pairs. - Check their answer, say it aloud,
- Check sts answer. and then correct their work if they
have the wrong answer.

- Play the tape once again, stop the


tape where necessary and conduct the - Work in pairs to read the
correction. questions.

- Listen and do the task.


- Compare their notes.
- Some sts answer the questions:
1. Heavy rain has caused floods all
+ Task 3 (7 mins) over the country.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Aims: Practice listening for specific 2. Because the rivers have risen.
information by answering given 3. (The old lady has climbed Mount
questions. Whitney) 23 times.
- Ask sts to read the questions in pairs 4. Because it has kept her young
and make sure they understand the and healthy.
questions and know what information - Check their answer, and then
they need to answer the questions. correct their work if they have the
- Ask sts to listen to the tape wrong answer.
once/twice and take short notes to
answer the questions.
- Ask sts to compare their answer in
pairs. Two sts present.
- Play the tape once again, stop the
tape where necessary and conduct the
correction.

10ms - Listen and check.

3. After you listen:


- Ask sts to work in pairs and each
retell one news story.
- Move round to check the activities
and to make sure that sts are working
effectively.
- Ask two sts to present in front of the
whole class.
- Check and give remarks.
4. Homework:
2ms Write a short paragraph about a news
story they have just heard on the radio
or TV

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date: 12/11/2010 UNIT 7: THE MASS MEDIA


Period : 42 LESSON 4 : WRITING
Date of Students absence Notes
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students can write a paragraph about advantages and disadvantages of television
and other types of mass media.
II. Skills:
- Writing: write a paragraph about the advantages and disadvantages of the mass
media.
III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk.
IV. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking :
5ms - Ask one st to talk about one of the
news stories that he/she is interested
in. - Listen to their friend and give
- Ask other sts to listen to their friend remarks.
and give remarks.
- Check and give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.
2. Before you write:
- Aims:to get sts to read about the
advantages and disadvantages of
15ms television and to help sts to prepare
vocabulary and information before
they write.
+ Task 1:
- Ask sts to read the advantages and - Listen to the teacher carefully.
disadvantages of television.
- Explain some new words:
+ 'memorable (adj) : easy to
remember
+ en'joyable (adj) : pleasant - Copy these words into theit
+ popu'larity (n) : the noun of " notebooks.
popular"
+ be a'ware of (v) : realize
+ brain (n) : part of the body inside
the head
+ 'violent (adj) : fighting, killing, etc. - Listen to the teacher and then read
+ inter'fere with (v) : get in the way these words in chorus and
of something individually.
- Ask sts listen to the teacher and - Read the table in pairs.
repeat , then write these words into
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
their notebooks.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to read - Structures:
about the advantages and + help/encourage someone to do
disadvantages of television. something: help us to learn,
- Make sure that sts know what " encourage us to buy...
advantage" and "disadvantage" are. + make someone/ something +
- Ask sts to pay attention to the basic adjective: make things memorable,
structures used in the table. make us aware of, make us passive,
- Move round to help if necessary. make people violent...
- Ask sts some questions to make S: Television helps us to learn
sure that they understand all the more .............
advantages and disadvantages of
television.
What are the (dis)advantages of - Work in pairs to discuss.
television? - Some sts stand up to give their
- Listen and give remarks. ideas.
+ Task 2: * Radio:
- Divide the whole class into three + Advantages:
groups and ask each pair in group 1 - It helps us to get updated news and
to discuss the advantages and infofmation.
disadvantages of radio, each pair in - It helps us to listen to music,
group 2 discuss those of newspapers, dramas, etc.
and each pair in group 3 discuss - It is not harmful to people's eyes.
those of the internet. + Disadvantages:
- Ask sts to work in 7 minutes. - It is rather boring because we can't
- Move round to help if necessary see anything.
and then ask them to share their - The programmes are not very vivid,
ideas with other pairs. there are no games and films, etc.
- Ask three three sts to present their - Listen to the teacher and take notes.
ideas.
- Ask other sts to give remarks.

- Do the writing task.


15ms - Listen and give remarks.
3. While you write:
- Aims: Sts practise writing a
paragraph about the advantages and - Read their writing: ( a sample
disadvantages of one of the mass paragraph)
media. "The Internet is now the largest
- Ask sts to write a paragraph about source of information and
the advantages and disadvantages of entertainment for people. Firstly, you
one of the mass media they have can get a lot of information about any
discussed in task 2. places in the world. The Internet
- Let sts write in 8 minutes. provides you with the latest changes
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Move around to conduct the in the markets such as the increase or
activity. decrease in the price of gold or oil.
9ms 4. After you write: You can relax by watching films or
- Get feedback by asking three sts to football matches, listening to music
read their work aloud. on-line or chatting to friends or
- Ask some other sts to give remarks. relatives living thousands kilometres
- Check and give the correct answer. away. However, the Internet can be
dangerous because you can be
exposed to harmful websites, for
example, the websites containing
violent scenes. Moreover, chatting or
playing games online can take you a
lot of time. In short, the Internet can
be good or bad so you should know
- If there is enough time, T can have how to use it properly."
sts exchange their writing among sts
within a group so that they can check
their friend's work and give remarks

1m 5. Homework:
- Write a paragraph about another
types of mass media.

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date: 13/11/2010 UNIT 7: THE MASS MEDIA


Period : 43 LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know how to pronounce the sound / ei/, /ai/ and /oi/ correctly.
- Students revise the present perfect and because of and in spite of.
II.Languge focus:
- The present perfect tense.
- Because of and in spite of.
III. Skill: : Pronunciation and grammar:
- Work in pairs to discuss the exercises.
- Read words and sentences aloud.
- Read the sentences silently to do the exercises.
IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
V. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking:
5ms - Ask one st to tell the whole class the - One st speaks aloud in front of the
advantages and disadvantages of one whole class.
of the mass media. - Give remarks.
- Ask another st to give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.
- Check and give a mark.
2. Pronunciation
- Aims: to introduce three sounds - Write down three sounds.
/ei/,/ai/ and /oi/ and help sts to - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
10ms practise these sounds. - Look at the book , listen and
a. Write three sounds on the board and repeat.
pronounce them clearly twice, then /ei/ /ai/ /oi/
ask sts to repeat. play time voice
- Tell sts how to pronounce these today wildlife noise
sounds accurately. radio height toy
- Ask them to look at the textbook, ...........................
listen and repeat. - Read these words in pairs and
check for their partners.
- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read
the words again so that they can check - Look at the book and work in
for each other. pairs.
- Move around to help . - Answers:
- Ask two sts to read again and give /ei/ /ai/ /oi/
remarks. afraid ninety-nine
noisiest
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page made type Royce
79 in the book. mistake Friday oil
- Ask them to work in pairs to read the changed like boy
sentences and then find out the words ...............................
containing sound /ei/, /ai/ and /oi/ . - Read the examples.
- Ask them to work in 2 minutes.
- Move around to conduct the activity.
- Ask one st to report and other sts to
give remarks.
- Check and give the correct answers.
- Ask some sts to read these sentences
aloud.
- Listen and give remarks.
3. Grammar:
Aims: to revise the present perfect
and "because of" and "in spite of"
28ms and have sts do Ex1, EX 2 and EX3.
a. The present perfect tense: + The present perfect:
- Give two examples: "How long an action has lasted up
eg: I've known her for five years. to the present."
We have been here since 7.00 a.m. - Listen to the T attentively and
- Ask sts to think about the use of the take notes.
present perfect in these sentences.
- Ask one st to report and recall the
use of since and for.
b. Present the use of because of and
in spite of through some examples.
Eg1: Because of being ill Mary didn't + because of + N/NP, V-ing
go to school. in spite of
In spite of being ill Tom went to + Because of is used as a
school. preposition to express the reason.
Eg2: Because of the rain we stopped + In spite of is used as a preposition
playing football. to express a concession.
In spite of the rain they - Listen to the teacher attentively
continued playing football. and take notes if necessary.
- Ask sts to think about the use of
because of and in spite of in these
sentences.
- Ask some sts to report.
- Distinguish because of from because
and in spite of from although.
- Ask some sts to give examples.
+ Exercise 1:
- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the - Do the task individually and then
task. share their ideas with their friends.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask sts to do the exercise EX 1:
individually and then compare their 1. have been 2. has lived 3.
answers in pairs. have met 4. have done 5. have
- Move round to conduct the activity. had 6. have taken 7. have
- Check the exercise sentence by watched.
sentence. - Listen and correct their work if
- Listen and give remarks. necessary.

+ Exercise 2: - Do the Ex individually.


- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and EX 2:
then share the answers with their 1. since 2. ago 3. for 4. for
friends. 5. since 6. for 7. ago 8. ago
- Move round to help if necessary. 9. since 10. since
- Ask two sts to do this exercise on the - Listen to the teacher.
board.
- Ask one st to give remarks.
- Check and give remarks.
+ Exercise 3:
- Ask sts to read the requirement of - Read the requirement carefully.
Ex3 and then do the task in pairs. - Do Ex 3.
- Go round to conduct the activity. 1. c, f 2. b. d 3. a , e
- Ask some pairs to read sentence by 4. h .j 5. i, g.
sentence.
- Listen and give remarks.
5. Homework
- Part B ( Page 42 - Workbook)
2ms

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date: 27/11/2010 UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE


Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Period : 44 LESSON 1 : READING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students can:


- Read and understand more about the changes in the country life.
II. Language focus:
1.Grammar: - Conditional type 1.
- Verb tenses and reported speech.
2.Vocabulary:
- Vocabulary about country life such as bumper crops, cash crops,
brick houses, straw, mud.....
III. Skill: - Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups.
- Reading comprehension: vocabulary matching and table completion
exercises.
IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk.
V. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities

4ms 1 .Warm-up:
- Aims : - Get used to the topic.
- Sts are required to work in groups of - Work in groups of 3-4 students
3 or 4 to make a list of words related
to the country in written form. - Give the lists to the teacher
- The group with the longest list will
be the winner. - Work in pairs.
2. Before you read:
- Aims: - Prepare information and - Do the work orally in front of the
vocabularies for the topic. class.
10ms - Introduce the topic of the reading
Suggested answers:
passage. 1. The farmers are harvesting the
a. Pair work: crop
- Ask sts to work in pairs to answer 2. They are working very hard.
the questions given in the part. 3. Its a good/ bumper crop.
- For each question, 3-4 sts are 4. Good farming methods, good
required to answer orally in front of varieties, modern technology used,
the class ( 1 st/ 1 time). people work hard.....
- Gather the ideas and help the sts to - Listen and then copy down
give correct answers. - Repeat.

- Read silently.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Others listen.
b.Vocabulary: - Self-correct.
- Provide the sts with new - Read the passage and then do the
words/phrases. task.
+ Straw(n): dry cut stalks of
various cereals( rm).
+ Mud(n) : wet, soft soil (bn). - Share their answers with their
+ Technical high school (n): partners.
trng trung hc k thut dy - Report their work .
nh +1b
+ Farming method(n): phng + 2 d
php canh tc. +3a
+ Brick house (n): houses +4e
made of bricks( nh xy +5c
bng gch).
+ Thank to(prep): = owing to - Work individually
= because of (nh c) - Study the table.
- Read each word/phrase 3 times and - Discuss the answers with a friend.
ask sts to repeat it. - Report their answers.
- Leave the sts 1 minute to self-
practice reading the words, then ask a.o.c
4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases before Now
aloud in front of the class
- Listen and check.
houses
20ms 3. While you read:
- Aims: Read the passage for Made of straw and mud
information to do the tasks. Made of bricks
+ Task 1:Vocabulary Matching.
- Ask sts to read the passage and do
R. and TV
task 1: Match the words in A which
appear in the reading passage with Few families had a radio or a TV set
their definitions in B. Many families have a radio or a TV
- Sts are required to compare their set
results with their partners.
- 4 sts are required to do the task
F.M
orally in front of the class (1 st/ 1
time). old
- Listen and help the sts to do the New
task correctly.
- Explain the meaning of these words crops
and phrases if necessary. poor
+ Task 2:Table Completion. Good/ bumper
- Ask sts to scan the passage to get
specific information to complete the travel

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
table. By motorbike
- Let sts to study the table carefully
before doing the task. - Work in pairs to ask and answer
- Go round the class and provide the questions.
help when necessary. - Ask sts to report their work in
- Tell sts to discuss the answers with pairs.
a friend. 1. It was poor and simple.
- Check the answers in front of the 2. Because they hope that with an
class as a whole. education of science and
- Give correct answers. technology their children could find
a way of bettering their lives.
3. They introduced new farming
methods which resulted in bumper
crops. They also helped grow crash
crops for export.
4. He said their lives had changed a
lot thanks to the knowledge their
children had brought home.
+ Task 3: Answering Questions: 5. He told his grandchildren:
- Ask sts to work in pairs to read the Study harder so that you can do
passage again and answer the more for the village than your
questions in task 3. parents did.
- Sts are required to underline the
information that supports the - Listen to the teacher.
answers. - Discuss in groups.
- Sts are required to compare their - Some representatives are required
answers with another pair. to report.
- Ask 5-6 sts to read their answers - Give suggested answers:
10ms aloud in front of the class. + Introduce new farming methods.
- Give feedback and correct answers. + Grow crash crops for export.
+ Help local people apply modern
technology in farming.
4. After you read: + Help community especially young
- Aims: Give the summary of the people access to ways of
topic. entertainment.
+ Discussion: + Raise peoples awareness about
- Sts are required to work in groups food safety and environmental
and discuss the question: How can hygiene.
people with an education help make
the life of their community better?
- Clarify some terms if needed:
+ People with an education: people
with a university study.
- Sts are required to look back to the
1ms passage to get the ideas for the
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
questions.
- Go to groups and provide help when
necessary.
- Ask some representatives to report
the groups' ideas.
5. Homework:
- Ask sts to write a paragraph about
the topic they discussed in After you
read.

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date:271/11/2010 UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY


VILLAGE
Period : 45 LESSON 2 : SPEAKING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know about plan to improve life of a village and their possible results.

II. Skill: - Speaking about plan and results.


- Discussing plans to improve life in the village.
III. Teaching aids:
Textbook, chalk, board.
IV. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1. Homework checking
5ms - Ask one st. to tell about the life of - One st. tell about the village.
the village in the text.
- Listen and give remarks and - Listen to the teacher.
marks.
2. Warm-up - Work in groups
5ms - Ask sts to work in groups and
make a list of the ideas that carried
out to improve the village life. Sts
may share ideas in Vietnamese and - Listen to the teacher.
ask T for English equivalences.
- Check ideas and lead in the new
lesson.
3. Before you speak:
10m Aims: Sts can match each of the
s plan to improve life in the village
with its possible result. - Listen and take notes.
+ Task 1: The village of Ha Xuyen
are discussing plans to improve life
in the village. Match the plans with
possible results.( 10 minutes)
- Explain some new words: - Work in pairs.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
resurface (v ):put new surface
on, renew - Read the answers aloud in front of the
widen (v ) class.
canal (n): man-made waterway 1. b 2. g 3. d
for irrigation 4. e 5. f 6. c
muddy(a ): full of mud
- Ask sts to do the task in pairs and
give explanation for their answers
- Ask some sts to read the answers
in front of the class.
- Give the correct answers.
10ms 4. While you speak: - Listen to the T
Aims: Sts practice discussing the
plans to improve the life in the
village and the possible results. - Listen and take notes.
+ Task 2: The villagers are
discussing their plans. Read and
practice the conversation in groups
of three.
- Read the conversation in the
textbook.
- Ask sts to work in groups using
conditional type 1 and "should".
- Briefly explain Conditional - Work in groups of three.
sentence type 1 and should:
If + S + V(present tense), S +
will/can/may + V
( to talk about something that will - Some groups practice the conversation
or is likely to happen in the future) in front of the class.
E. g.: If the roads are widened,
cars and lorries can get to our
village.
Should or shouldnt: to give
opinions about what is the best - Work in groups and add some their
thing to do. own ideas.
- Ask sts to practise the - Some groups present in front of the
conversation in the textbook. class.
- Ask some groups to practice the A: I think we should build a football
conversation in front of the class. ground, too.
5. After you speak: B: I agree with you. If a football
12ms Task 3: Continue the conversation, ground is built, young people can play
using the ideas in table in Task 1. sports in the free time.
Add some more possible if you like C: A football ground is also a place
- Ask sts to work in groups and where people can meet and exchange
continue the conversation. ideas.
- Write the main phrases on board A: What about a medical centre? I
and ask sts to look at these phrases think its necessary to build a medical
to practice their conversation. centre.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- medical center health B: Yes. If a medical center is built,
- cash crops export, Peoples health will be looked after
money better.
- bridge shorter C: Yes. And if we get sick. we wont
way to town have to go to the provincial hospital for
- football ground play treatment.
sports, exchange ideas.
- Go around to help sts if necessary.
Sts may add their own ideas in the
conversation.
- Comment and give necessary
corrections.

6. Homework:
3ms Write a passage about plans to
improve the life in the area where
you live.

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 28/011/2010 UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY


VILLAGE
Period : 46 LESSON 3 : LISTENING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Sts know the changes in a small town on the South coast of England.

II. Skill: - Listening: choose True/ False statements, fill in the gaps with one
suitable word, answer the questions
- Speaking: Discuss the changes in sts' hometown/ home village
III. Teaching aids:
- Textbook , tape
IV. Procedures:
Time Teachers activities Students activities
1. Home work checking:)
7ms - One st talks about what people should- One st presents.
do to - Others listen and give remarks.
improve life in their village/ town.
2. Before you listen:
10ms Aims:to focus sts on the topic and
review/ introduce the words and
phrases used in the listening text. - Work in groups to ask and
a. Focus sts on the two pictures in the compare the two pictures.
textbook and asks sts to work in
groups to compare them to see the
changes of the town following the
model in the book.
E.g.: - There didn't use to be any
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
hotel in the town - Some sts stand up and give their
- There used to be small houses answer.
- Cows used to graze in the field Sts copy the words and phrases.
........................................
- Ask some sts to give their answer.
b. Introduces some new words
- atmosphere (n): khng kh - Listen and repeat.
- resurface(v): tri li ( mt - Read the words in pairs and
ng) correct each others mistakes.
- turn into (v): tr thnh - Some individuals read the words
- Read the words and ask sts to repeat. aloud.
- Ask sts to read the words in pairs.
- Ask some sts to read the words
again.
3. While you listen:
18ms + Task 1: - Listen to the T.
Aims:Sts practise listening and
marking True/ False statements. - Work in pairs to guess if the
- Tell sts that they are going to listen statements are true or false.
to a talk about the changes in a small - Listen to the tape and do the task
town in England. - Compare their answer.
- Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the - Give their answer.
statements given and guess if they are 1. F It's on the south coast of
true or false. England.
- Ask sts to listen to the talk and tick 2. F It's used to be a small quiet
the right column to indicate their town.
answer and underline the false 3. T
information. T plays the tape twice. 4. F The big trees have been cut
- Ask sts to compare their answer in down.
pairs. 5. F Some people don't like the
- Check sts answer. changes
- Check their answer and then
correct their work if they have the
wrong answer.
- Play the tape once again, stop the
tape where necessary and conduct the
correction.
+ Task 2: - Work in pairs to read the
Aims:Sts practise listening for passages and try to fill in the gaps.
specific information by filling in the - Listen and do the task.
gaps with ONE word. - Give their answer.
- Ask sts to have a look at the 1. houses 2. hotel
paragraph in the textbook and to read 3. widened 4. cut
them in pairs and make sure they 5. car 6. shop
understand them. T encourages sts 7. department 8. expensive
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
guess the words to fill in the gaps. - Check their answer and then
- Ask sts to listen to the tape once or correct their work if they have the
twice again to fill in the gaps with the wrong answer.
missing words.
- Ask sts to compare their answer in
pairs.
- Check sts answer. - Work in pairs.

- Play the tape once again, stop the


tape where necessary and conduct the -Two sts present.
correction.
4. After you listen:
10ms - Ask sts to work in pairs and tell each
other about the changes in their
village/ town.
- Move round to check the activities
and to make sure that sts are working
effectively.
- Ask two sts to present in front of the
whole class.
- Check and gives remarks.
1ms 5. Homework:
Write a short paragraph about the
changes in their village/town

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 28/11/2010 UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY


VILLAGE
Period : 47 LESSON 4 : WRITING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students can write a letter giving directions to a certain place.
II. Skill: Writing
- Reading: read the sample letter.
- Speaking: work in pairs to find Ann's house on the map as well as the
words and phrases used to give directions .
- Writing: write a letter to tell Jim the way to house A on the map.
III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk.
IV. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking :
5ms - Ask one st to talk about the changes
in our hometown or his/her home
village. - Listen to their friend and give
- Ask other sts to listen to their friend remarks.
and give remarks.
- Check and give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.
2. Before you write:
- Aims:to get sts to read the sample
20ms letter and to help them to prepare
vocabulary and information before
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
they write.
+ Task 1: - Listen to the teacher carefully.
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain some new words:
+ direction (n) : the way that a person
or thing moves along - Copy these words into theit
+ enclose (v): put something in a notebooks.
letter or a parcel - Listen to the teacher and then read
- Ask sts to listen to the teacher and these words in chorus and
repeat , then write these words into individually.
their notebooks.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to read about - Read the letter in pairs.
the letter and to look at the map to
find Ann's house. - Share their answer with their
- Move round to help if necessary. friends.
- Ask sts to compare their ideas with - Present their ideas.
other pairs. Answer: H
- Ask some sts to tell the whole class
where Ann's house is. T may ask them - Listen to the teacher.
to explain more about their answer.
- Listen and give remarks.
+ Task 2: - Work in pairs to read the letter and
- Ask sts to work in pairs to read the undreline the words/phrases.
letter again and underline the words
and phrases used to give directions. - Two sts write the words and
- Move round to help if necessary. phrases on the board
- Ask 2 sts to write these words/ get out of go over ( a bridge)
phrases on the board. turn right/left walk past ( a
- Check and give remarks. medical centre)
- Ask sts to make some examples with keep walking take the
these words. first/second.....
3. While you write
- Aims: Sts practise writing a letter to
12ms Jim, telling him the way to house A
from Roston Railway Station.
- Ask sts to write a letter to Jim, - Do the writing task.
telling him the way to house A from
Roston Railway Station.
- Let sts write in 8 minutes.
- Move around to conduct the activity.
4. After you write: - Read their writing: ( a sample
Aims: to get feedback and check sts' paragraph)
7ms work. "Dear Jim,
- Get feedback by asking some sts to I'm very glad that you will come
read their work aloud. here for the summer
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask some other sts to give remarks. holiday ............. from Roston
- Check and give the correct answer. Raiway Station.
- If there is enough time, T can have Now when you come out of the
sts exchange their writing among sts station, turn right. Keep walking for
within a group so that they can check about 5 minutes, you will see a
their friend's work and give remarks small bridge ahead. Go over the
bridge, go along the street, walk
past a medical centre and the car
park then take the second turning
on the left. Walk past the Souvenir
shop and you will see my house. It's
on the right, next to the
shop.............. "

1ms 5. Homework:
- Write a letter to tell their friends the
way to their house from Hai Duong
Railway Station.

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 28/11/2010 UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY


VILLAGE
Period : 48 LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS

Date of Students absence Notes


Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
1. Education Aims:- Students know how to pronounce the sound /au/ and /u/
correctly.
- Students revise reported speech and conditional sentence type 1.
II. Language focus:
1.Grammar: - Conditional type 1.
- Verb tenses and reported speech.
2.Vocabulary:
- Vocabulary about country life such as bumper crops, cash crops,
brick houses, straw, mud.....
III. Skill: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises.
- Read words and sentences aloud.
- Read the sentences silently to do the exercises.
IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
V. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking
5ms - Ask one st to tell the whole class the - One st speaks aloud in front of
way to their house from Hai Duong the whole class.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Raiway Station. - Give remarks.
- Ask another st to give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.
- Check and give a mark. - Write down two sounds.
2. Pronunciation: - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
- Aims: to introduce three sounds /au/ - Look at the book , listen and
10ms and /u/ and help sts to practise these repeat.
sounds. /au/ /u/
a. Write two sounds on the board and cow coat
pronounce them clearly twice, then ask town phone
sts to repeat. how bone
- Tell sts how to pronounce these ...........................
sounds accurately. - Read these words in pairs and
- Ask them to look at the textbook, check for their partners.
listen and repeat.
- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read - Look at the book and work in
the words again so that they can check pairs.
for each other. - Answers:
- Move around to help . /au/ /u/
- Ask two sts to read again and give shout rose
remarks. loudly snow
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page ours over
89 in the book. ...............................
- Ask them to work in pairs to read the - Read the examples.
sentences and then find out the words
containing sound /au/ and sound /u/ . - Listen to the teacher.
- Ask them to work in 2 minutes.
- Move around to conduct the activity. - Copy down the example.
- Ask one st to report and other sts to
give remarks.
- Check and give the correct answers. - Read the example and think
- Ask some sts to read these sentences about the changes.
aloud.
- Listen and give remarks.
3. Grammar: - Work in pairs to complete the
Aims: to revise the reported speech table.
27ms and conditional sentence type 1 and
have sts do Ex1, EX 2, EX3and EX4.
a. Reported speech: Statements
- Recall the use of reported speech: to
report what someone has said. No - Some sts report.
quotation marks are used and some 1. did 4. him/her
parts of speech have to be changed. 2. would do 5. the night
- Give an example: before
eg: "I worked late yesterday," said 3. may/ might 6. here
Susan. - Listen to their friends and their
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Susan said she had worked late the teacher.
previous day. - Listen and copy down.
- Ask sts to read the example and think
about the changes when we turn a
sentence into reported speech. - Read the examples and point out
- Ask sts to complete the table below: the form and the use of conditional
Direct speech sentence type 1:
Reported speech + Form:
(1) do If- clause , main
(2) will do clause
(3) might S + V( P.S) , S + V( S.F)
(4) me/you + Use: something that may happen
(5) last night at present or in the future.
(6) there
- When-clause:
- Ask sts to work in pairs and complete something that will certainly
the table and then ask some sts to happen in the future.
report and give remarks.
- Make clear the difference between
say, tell and talk: - Do the task individually and then
Say + clause share their ideas with their friends.
Tell + O + clause EX 1:
Talk (to sb) about sth 1. An old farmer said their lives
b. Conditional sentence type 1: had changed a lot..... children had
- Review the form and the use of brought home
conditional sentence type 1 by giving 2. She said she was going to Ho
some examples: Chi Minh City soon.
eg: If I have enough money, I will go to 3. I thought the film would be
Hue for holiday. interesting.
If it rains. I won't go there. ...............................
- Ask sts to read the examples and - Listen and correct their work if
point out the form as well as the use of necessary.
conditional sentence type 1.
- Distinguish when-clause and if- - Do the Ex individually.
clause: EX 2:
eg; When summer comes, he will go to 1.told 2. said 3. said 4. told
Hue for holiday. 5. talked
- Ask sts to compare this example with
the first example. - Listen to the teacher.
- Ask some sts to give examples.
+ Exercise 1: - Read the requirement carefully.
- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the - Do Ex 3.
task. ....... If I do more homework, I will
- Ask sts to do the exercise individually pass my exam. If I pass my exam.
and then compare their answers in I'll go to medical college. If I go to
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
pairs. medical colege, I'll study
- Move round to conduct the activity. medicine..............
- Check the exercise sentence by
sentence.
- Listen and give remarks.
+ Exercise 2:
- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and
then share the answers with their
friends.
- Move round to help if necessary.
- Ask two sts to do this exercise on the
board.
- Ask one st to give remarks.
- Check and give remarks.
+ Exercise 3:
- Ask sts to read the requirement of Ex3
and then do the task in pairs.
- Go round to conduct the activity.
- Ask some pairs to read sentence by
sentence.
- Listen and give remarks.
5. Homework
3ms - Ex 4 ( page 90- sts' book)

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 30/11/2010 TEST YOURSELF C


Period: 49
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
1. Aims: - Sts revise what they have learned in unit 7.and unit 8.
2. Knowledge: - General knowledge in unit 7 and unit 8.
- Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units.
3. Skills: listening, speaking and writing.
II. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board.
III. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
5ms 1. Homework checking:
- Ask one st to do Ex 4 in the EX 4:
workbook on the board. 1. If 2. When 3. if 4. If
- Ask one st to give remarks. 5. when
- Give remarks and marks. - One st gives remarks.
2. The new lesson:
- Ask sts to do part II, part III and
part IV at home in advance to save
time. - Look at the textbook and read the
- Give sts the time duration for each statements.
part : part II: 10 minutes, part III: 10 - Try to focus on the important
minutes, part IV: 15 minutes. words.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask sts to do listening in class. - Copy down these words into their
2.1. Listening: notebooks.
10ms - Ask sts to read the requirement of - Listen and read after the teacher.
the task.
- Introduce new words: - Listen carefully and do the task.
+ queue (v) : xp hng - Work in pairs to discuss their
+ traffic (n) : cars, answers.
motorbikes, traffic lights,.... 1. F 2.F 3. T 4.F 5. T
heavy traffic
- Play the tape twice and ask sts to - Read the paragraph.
do the task. - Listen carefully and complete the
- Ask sts to share their ideas with paragraph.
their partners. 1. aren't 2. evening 3.
- Get feedback and play the tape cinemas
again so that sts can check their 4. theatres 5. knows
answers. - work in groups to share their ideas.
- Ask sts to read the paragraph in part - Some sts stand up to report.
B and try to guess what will be filled 1. because people can sit
in each blank. comfortable at home, they don't have
- Play the tape again . to pay for expensive seats at the
- Ask 2 sts to write their answers on theatres or in the cinemas.
the board. 2. People can see films, plays of
- Ask other sts to give remarks. every kind, political discussions and
- Check and give feedback. the latest exciting football matches.
2.2. Reading: ........................
10ms - Ask sts to work in groups to - Discuss in groups.
compare their answers. - Answers:
- Ask some sts to report his/ her 1. have been........... haven't had
answers aloud. 2. haven't given .............. have paid
- Listen and check. 3. said 4. had taken
5. thought ............ would come
2.3. Grammar: 6. told............... have got
- Ask sts to discuss their answers in - Read their writing aloud
groups. " When you come out of the bus
10ms - Ask 2 sts to write their answers on station, turn right. Go straight ahead
the board. until you see the traffic lights. Turn
- Ask two other sts to give remarks. left to Redham Road, walk along this
- Check and give the correct street in about 10 minutes. The
answers. Indian Restaurant is the pink
2.4. Writing: building on the left after the Beach
10ms - Ask some sts to read their writing Parade. It is very easy to find."
aloud. - Listen to the teacher's remarks.

- Ask some sts to give remarks.


3. Homework: )
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Part D ( Page 52 - workbook)

VI-EXPERIENCES:

Period:50

REVIEW
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I.Objectives:
Helping Ss revise the grammatical points from U1 to U8.
II-Skill : Four skills
III- Teaching aids: text book, copies, handouts
IV- procedure:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar
3- New lesson: REVIEW: TENSES & PASSIVE VOICE
T Teachers activities Students activities
Warmer: BINGO - Listen to T and write them ,
-T asks Ss to work in group of eight then give the past and PP form
-Ss listen to write on a small paper of them
and give the Past and Past participle
form of thses verbs
Make finish
go Leave
run See
Play
learn
PRESENTATION
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
-T asks Ss to give the form of tenses that -Work individually
students have learnt. - Listen to Ts instruction and
-Complete in the table complete the table the form of
Tenses Active Passive active and passive verbs
Simple present S+V(e,es) S+is/am/are+Vpp -Give the other wexamles to
Present S+is /am/are+ S+is/am/are+bein illutrate
continuous V-ing g+Vpp
Some Ss read their answers to
Past Simple S+Ved/V2 S+was/were+Vp
p the class and give their
Example: explanation
1.They have provided the victims with food
and clothing
-> The victims have been provided with food
and clothing
2.People speak English in almost everycorner
of the world.
->English are spoken in almost everycorner
of the world.
PRACTICE:
I .VERB FORM
1.We ( finish) our dinner half an hour ago. -Ss work individually
2.How many times you (see)him since he went -Give the correct form of
to Edinburgh. tenses of verbs in parentheses
3.The farmers (work) in the field now.
4.Rivers usually (flow) to the sea. Expected answer:
5.Mrs Green always (go) to work by bus. 1.finished 2.have you
6.She (sit) under a tress when it began to rain. seen
7.She said she (forget) something at home 3.are working 4.flow
yesterday. 5.goes 6.was
8.When we (see) Mr Taylor tomorrow, I sitting
(remind) him of that. 7.had forgot 8.see/
II-MULTIPLE CHOICE willremind
1.Jack ..............me that he was enjoying his
new class.
a. told b.said c.talked Expected answer:
d.asked 1.told
2.We..............friends since we........ at college 2.have been were
together. 3.help
a.have been-were b.were- have been 4.havemany
c.were-were d.had- been 5.works
3.If you..............me with this exercise ,I will do
the same for you one day.
a.helped b.would help c.help
d.will help
4.The English ..............good traditions

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
a.have much b.have many c.has much d.has
many
5.If he .............., the results will be better
a. worked b.works c.has worked
d.will work Expected answer:
III-MISTAKE CORRECTION 1.has been
1.Mary is living in LonDon. She have been 2.would not
there for 12 years. 3.since
2.If Sarah knew you were here, she willnot go 4.have seen
out
3.I have lived in a small house near the coast
for 1990.
4.I see this film three times up to now

IV-Consolidation:- Retell all grammatical


points from U7 to U8.

V-Homework - Do all exercises again and


do more in workbook
- Prepare REVIEW: STRUCTURES.

EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Period:51

REVIEW
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I.Objectives:
Helping Ss revise the grammatical points from U1 to U8.
II-Skill : Four skills
III- Teaching aids: text book, copies, handouts
IV- procedure:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar
3- New lesson: REVIEW: STRUCTURES
T Teachers activities Students activities
WARMER:Find someone who...... -The whole class make
Did you use to........? Name questions for friends fine
have a favourite toy when you someone who used to..
were a child? If the answer isyes , you
have a nickname? write his/her name in the
cry at night when you were a column
child?
hate school?
play hide andseek?
have a pet?
PRESENTATION
I SENTENCE TRANSFORMATION
-T asks Ss to rewrite each sentence, beginning as
shown , so that the mening stays the same. -Work individually
-Expected answer:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
1.She began to play the piano 3 years ago. 1.She has been playing the
- piano 3 years ago
>She ..................................................................... 2.He no longer plays
. tennis
2.He doesnt play tennis any longer He used to play tennis
->He used............................................................. 3.We have been invited to
3.John has invited us to his party tonight. John party tonight
->We............................................................. 4.Sharah got lost which
4.Sharah got lost and this made her parents very made her parents very
worried. worried.
->Sharah got lost .............................................. 5.In spite of being poor,
5.Although the children was poor, they were the children was poor.
happy. 6.Look at these clouds!
->In spite Its going to rain on the
of............................................................. way.
6.Look at these louds !There s no rains on the 7.Because of working
way. harder, he will pass the
-> Look at these clouds! exam
Its ................................... -Ss give their comment s
7.Because he works harder, he will pass the about the structures of
exam. sentences
-> Because -Ss speak loudly and
of.......................................................... explanation
II-FORM :
1.S+ began /started + V-ing /to-inf................ago
->S+has/have/+(been)+
Ving/Ved..............since/for
2.Not.....any more/any longer
-> No longer/ used to + V-inf
3.Relative pronoun: replace the clause preceding
4.Although In spite of
Though +S+V-> Despite +
N/Ving
Even though
5.Because + S+V -> because of + N/Ving -Ss work individually and
6.Used to + bare inf compare their answer with
Be used to + Ving a friend
Be used to + Infinitive -Ss give the correct
Be used for + V-ing answers
III-MISTAKE CORRECTION -Expected answer:
1.Im tired because Im not used to stay up late 1.to staying
2.Even though the extremely bad weather in the 2.In spite of
mountains, my friend decided not to cancel their 3.which
trip across the mountain pass. 4.was replaced
3.My car, that I have owned for five years , is a 5.If
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Ford. 6.whom
4.If a drop of oil is placed in a glass of water, it 7.because
would float to the top. 8.In spite of
5.Unless we work harder, we will finish on time
6.Is this the person whose you asked me
about?
7.Lan was absent from class yesterday because
of she was ill.
8.Although his illness , he managed to come to
school

IV-Consolidation:- Retell all grammatical points from U7 to U8.


V-Homework - Do all exercises again and do more in workbook
- Prepare REVIEW: REPORTED SPEECH
EXPERIENCES:

Period:53

REVIEW
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I.Objectives:
Helping Ss revise the grammatical points from U1 to U8.
II-Skill : Four skills
III- Teaching aids: text book, copies, handouts
IV- procedure:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar
3- New lesson: REVIEW: REPORTED SPEECH
T Teachers activities Students activities

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
PRESENTATION
1.Examples:
a.I saw her on my wayto school -Ss retalk the ways to change
yesterday he says to me directed speech into indirected
->He says to me he saw her on his speech
way to school yesterday. -Distinguish two sentences
b.I saw her on my wayto school
yesterday he said
-> He said he had seen her on
herway to school the day before
2.Eliciting:
*When verb: say tell in the present ,
present perfect or simple future, no -Listen to Ts eliciting
change tense of verb in the reported
clause
* When verb : say , tell in the past ,
we change the tense of verb in the
reported clause( to move one tense
back)
- change adv of time
- change pronouns , adj possessive Ss work individually and then
for suitably compare their answer with a friends
PRACTICE : -Ss go to the board and write down
I.Change these following sentences -The others check and correct
into reported Speech mistakes
1. Ill see you tomorrow Note: * Change adv of time , place
-> She said.................................
2. I met her about three months Directed speech indirected
ago speech
-> He told me................................. Here There
3. I must go out to post Before Ago/earlier
thisbetternow, Mum, he said Last week The week
-> He said ................................. Next week before
4. If you want to lose weight , you Now The next week
should eat less meat This Then
-> The doctor advised These That
her................................. Today Those
5. We cannot finish th etest in forty Tomorrow That day
five minutes yesterday The next day
->They said................................. The day before
6.My husband has gone on The previous
business day
-> Mary said ................................. I He/she
7. I am doing a business couse You Me
now We They
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
-> She told me................................. My His/her
8.Mary said I canot go to the movie Yours truly, our My
with you , John me Their
-> Mary said................................. Him/her
II.Mistake correction
1.At the interview, they asked me
when can you start work.
2.She wanted to know whether I
have seen Paul recently
3.I asked Sean how to pronounce
his name?
4.The teacher said to her students
how many people there were in
their class.
5.He asked me how long had I been
waiting for him

IV-Consolidation:- Retell all grammatical points from U7 to U8.


V-Homework - Do all exercises again and do more in workbook
- Prepare REVIEW: CONDITIONAL SENTENCES

EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Period:54

REVIEW
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I.Objectives:
Helping Ss revise the grammatical points from U1 to U8.
II-Skill : Four skills
III- Teaching aids: text book, copies, handouts
IV- procedure:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar
3- New lesson: REVIEW: CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
T Teachers activities Students activities
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
1.Real conditional sentences -Ss listen and give out
a.Future possible examples
If + S+V(simple present), S+ will +V-bare inf
Ex: If I have money, I will
b.habitual buy new car.
If + S+V(simple present), S+ V(simple Ex: Ann usually walks to
present) school if she has enough time
Ex: If you went to the post
2.Present unreal conditional sentences office, I would meet you
If + S+V(simple past), S+ would/could+V-
bare inf Ex: If we hadnt attended the
Be-> were course , we would have failed
3.Past unreal conditional sentences the exam
If + S+V(past perfect), S+ would/could+have
+Vpp
-Ss pay attention to structures
4.If clause -> unless -Give more examples
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
* negative -> affirmative(main clause doesnt
change)
Ex: If you dont study hard, youll fail in the
exam
-> Unless you study hard, youll fail in the
exam
*Affirmative -> Affirmative ( Main clause ->
reverse)
Ex: If I have time . Ill help you
-> Unless I have time , I wont help you
5.As if and as though
* Real in present
S+V(present) + as if /as though
+S+V( present)
* Unreal in present
S+V(past) + as if /as though +S+V( past)
* Unreal in the past
S+V(past) + as if /as though +S+V( past
perfect)
PRACTICE
WORD FORM
1.If I (know )........his telephone number . Id
give it to you
2.Hecould get a job easily if he (have ) ........ a
degree.
3.Henry talks to hisdog as if it
(understand ) ........ him
4.If she (not hurry) ........, she may be late
5.Water ( not run ) ........down hill if there Ss work individually and then
were not gravity compare their answer with a
6.He looked tired as if he ( work ) ........very friends
hard -Ss go to the board and write
7.If you ( turn ) ........out the light , we shall be down
in the dark. -The others check and correct
8.He might get fat if he (stop) ........smoking mistaks
9.I ( accept) ........ if they invite me to the party
REWRITING SENTENCES:
1.Alan always ate breakfast , he wouldnot
overeat at lunch
->
If........................................................................
.....
2.The wind is blowing hard , so I wont take
the boat out for a ride.
->
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
If........................................................................
.....
3.We dont visit our parents very often
because they live so far away
->
If........................................................................
.....
4.I cant look the word up because I havenot
got a dictionary.
->
If........................................................................
.....
5.Nick cant find the way because he hasnot
got a map
->
If........................................................................
.....

IV-Consolidation: Ask Ss to retalk the grammatical points in this


lesson
V-Homework -Do more exercises in work book
- Prepare REVIEW 5
EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Period:55
REVIEW
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10
I.Objectives:
Helping Ss revise the grammatical points from U1 to U8.
II-Skill : Four skills
III- Teaching aids: text book, copies, handouts
IV- procedure:
1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students attendance.
2-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar
3- New lesson: REVIEW: EXERCISES
T Teachers activities Students activities
PRONUNCIATION
I -Choose the word whose underlined
part is pronounced differently from that Ss work individually and then
of the others compare their answer with a
1.a.around b.mouse friends
c.count d.country -Ss go to the board and write
2.a.mechanic b.achievement down
c.chemistry d.school -The others check and correct
3.a.cut b.fun mistaks
c.pull d.button
4.a.camera b.famous
c.glad d.family * Expected answer
5.a.seat b.leave pronunciation
c.increase d.ready 1.d 2.b 3.c
II-Stress: 4.b 5d
6.a.computer b.important 6.c 7.b 8.d
c.village d.condition
7.a.television b.community
c.atmosphere d.damage
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
8.a.persuade b.relax
c.research d.export
MULTIPLE CHOICE
1.Yesterday , when I ........at the station ,
the train........for 15 minutes
a. arrived/ had left b.arrived /left
c.had arrived /left d.arrived/ has
left
2.Would you mind........me hand with these
bags?
a. give b.to give
c .giving d.to giving multiple choice
3.When I was a child I........fishing with 1.a 2.c
my father on Sunday morning. 3.c 4.b
a. went b.had gone 5.b 6.b
c.used to go d. was used to going 7.c
4.Marie Curie harboured the dream of
a ........career which was impossible for a
woman at that time.
a. scientist b. scientific
c. science d. scientifically
5.This computer isnot capable
........running this software.
a.on b.of c.in d.for
6.Students for ........English is a secon
language should consider taking the
course.
a. who b. whom c.that d.whose
7.If I ........John tonight , I ........him my
plans
a.saw/told b.will see/will tell
c.see/will tell d.will see/tell
MISTAKE CORRECTION
1.Even though the extremely bad weather
in the mountains , my friends decided not
to cancel their trip across the mountain
pass
2.Have the play already started when
you got to the theater? mistake correction
3.My car, that I have owned for five 1.Even though-> Despite, In
years, is a Ford. spite of
4.The installation of the new computer 2.Have -> Had
systerm will completed by next month 3.that-> which
5.She wanted to know if I saw Paul 4.will completed->will complete
resently 5.saw-> had seen
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

EXPERIENCES:

practice
PRONUNCIATION
I -Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of
the others
1.a.around b.mouse c.count d.country
2.a.mechanic b.achievement c.chemistry d.school
3.a.cut b.fun c.pull d.button
4.a.camera b.famous c.glad d.family
5.a.seat b.leave c.increase d.ready
II-Stress:
6.a.computer b.important c.village d.condition
7.a.television b.community c.atmosphere d.damage
8.a.persuade b.relax c.research d.export
MULTIPLE CHOICE
1.Yesterday , when I ........at the station , the train........for 15 minutes
a. arrived/ had left b.arrived /left
c.had arrived /left d.arrived/ has left
2.Would you mind........me hand with these bags?
a. give b.to give
c .giving d.to giving
3.When I was a child I........fishing with my father on Sunday morning.
a. went b.had gone
c.used to go d. was used to going
4.Marie Curie harboured the dream of a ........career which was impossible for a
woman at that time.
a. scientist b. scientific
c. science d. scientifically
5.This computer isnot capable ........running this software.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
a.on b.of c.in d.for
6.Students for ........English is a secon language should consider taking the course.
a. who b. whom c.that d.whose
7.If I ........John tonight , I ........him my plans
a.saw/told b.will see/will tell
c.see/will tell d.will see/tell
MISTAKE CORRECTION
1.Even though the extremely bad weather in the mountains , my friends decided not
to cancel their trip across the mountain pass
2.Have the play already started when you got to the theater?
3.My car, that I have owned for five years, is a Ford.
4.The installation of the new computer systerm will completed by next month
5.She wanted to know if I saw Paul resently

Final first term test 1

Name:................................. Subject: English

Class:10...

Mark Teacher's comments

I.Pronunciation :

1. a. read b. teach c. dead d. sleep

2. a. picture b. sunburnt c. excursion d. nurse

3. a. pity b. children c. finger d. blind

4. a. shoot b. book c. food d. smooth

5. a. spend b. paid c. men d. can


Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
II.Vocabulary and structure : Choose the best answer:

6.My parents ..tomorrow to stay with me for a few days.


a. are coming b. come c. will have come d. is coming
7. Hue is famous for its __________________spots.
a. beautiful b. beautify c. beautifully d. beauty
8.Marie,.. I met at the party, caked me last night.
a. that b. whose c. which d. who
9. He got bad marks _____________________his laziness.
a. because b. in spite of c. although d. because of
11.The street is very noisy, makes sleeping difficult.
a. it b. what c. that d. which
12.Fax machine send or receive letter quickly.
a.is used for b. used to c. is used to d. used for
13.When I arrived the theatre, the play .. I missed the first part.
a. had started b. started c. was starting d. has started
14. A(n) ______________ person can't hear any kind of sound.
a. unemployed b. blind c. injured d. deaf
15.What programme is ____________ VTV3 _____________7:00?
a. at / in b. on / at c. on / on d. in / in
16. Now we don't go to school on foot as we ________________.
a. used to b. did c. had been d. was
17. Some of the more time - consuming jobs can now be done by machines.
a. odd b. taking little time c. taking much time d. not affected by time
18. What ________________when you met her yesterday?
a. did she do b. she did c. has she done d. was she doing
19. My aunt has talent in _______________ and she has won many prizes.
a. photograph b. photography c. photogenic d.photographic
20. The little girl is helping ____________cross the street.
a. the rich b. the young c. the poor d. the blind
III-Reading:
Read the text and answer the questions below:
Almost a hundred thousand people were killed and half a million homes destroyed as
a result of an earthquake in Tokyo in 1923. The earthquake began a minute before
noon when the people of Tokyo were cooking their midday meals. Thousands of
stoves were overturned as soon as the earth began to shake. As a result, small fires
broke out everywhere and quickly spread. It was impossible to use fire fighting
equipment because most of the water pipes had burst. Consequently, over ninety per
cent of the damage was caused by fire rather than by the collapse of buildings. If the
earthquake had occurred at night while people were sleeping, fewer people would
have died.

1. Where and when did the earthquake happen?

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
...
2. How many people were killed?

...
3. What were people doing when the earthquake happened?

...
4. Why was it impossible to use fire fighting equipment?

.
5. What caused most of the damage, the fire or the collapse of buildings?

IV-Writing:
A. Put the verbs in bracket into the correct form.
1) I (take).......................... a walk if the weather were nice.
2) We would buy a house if we (have).................... enough money.
3) If I (be)...................... you, I (tell) Brian the truth.
4) If I (be not) .................. tired, I would go to the movie with you.
5) If I (not have) ....................... class today, I would go shopping.
6) I dont understand that sentence. If I (understand)
that sentence, I (explain) . it to you.
B.Write the sentences using the words given :
1. Marie Curie / born / November 7th,1867 / Warsaw
->..
2. She/want / become / sciencetist.
->..
3. Elvis Presley/ be / famous singer / America / 20th century.
->..

Final first term test 2

Name:.................................. Subject: English

Class:10...

Mark Teacher's comments

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

I-Pronunciation:
1. a. sure b. picture c mature. d. adventure
2. a. ruby b. unlucky c. punish d. sunburnt
3. a. dine b. line c. combine d. routine
4. a. reading b. death c. scream d. cleaning
5. a.chatting b.chemistry c. change d.children
II-Vocabulary and Grammar:
1. What is your surname ?
a. first name b. second name c. nickname d. family name
2. Ann is interested in .young children.
a. teaching b. teaches c. to teach d. teach
3. Peter is learning English at the moment. He often . English 3 periods every
week.
a. is learning b. has learned c learns. d. will learn
4. .. Peter leave for London ? -Two weeks ago.
a. Why has b. Where did c. When did d. What did
5. Marie Curie extremely hard when she was a student.
a. worked b. works c. was working d. had been worked
6. We .. in this town for a long time. We here sixteen years ago.
a. had been/ come b. have been / came c. were / came d. are / came
7. He twenty chichkens last week, now he .. them up to sell.
a. had bought/ fed b. buys / feeds c. bought / is feeding d. was buying / fed
8. Before the plane takes off, the passengers to fasten their seat belt.
a. are told b. are telling c .told d. tell
9. Can you show me ________________machine?
a. how using b. how to use c. how use d. how you used
10. Now we don't go to school on foot as we ________________.
a. used to b. did c. had been d. was
11. Some of the more time - consuming jobs can now be done by machines.
a. odd b. taking little time c. taking much time d. not affected by
time
12. What ________________when you met her yesterday?
a. did she do b. she did c. has she done d. was she doing
13. It was hot all the time, ________________was a great pity.
a. which b. what c. that d. who
14. They ______________friends since they ____________________at high school.
a. were/ have been b. have been/ were c. had been/ have been d.were/ were
15. The little girl is helping ____________cross the street.
a. the rich b. the young c. the poor d. the blind
III-Reading:
Read the passage and answer the questions:
Disneyland celebrated its 50th birthday on Sunday. Thousands of fans and
celebrities gathered at what Disney calls the happiest place on Earth for a giant
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
party. Walt Disney opened the worlds first large-scale theme park on July 17, 1955.
It started a whole new world of fantasy and family fun. An amazing 515 million fun
seekers have since visited Disneyland. Walt Disneys idea has been copied around the
world by thousands of others, all wanting to make money from the riches in this
money-spinning industry.
From its small beginnings, Disney has mushroomed into a global entertainment
empire. It has become one of the most famous and well known bands in history. It has
created everything from blockbuster movies to childrens stationery. Theme parks
have spread across the world in Paris, Japan and very soon Hong Kong. It is almost
impossible to walk around any city and not see Mickey Mouse in some shape or
form. However, while the idea of providing pleasure has not changed, park admission
prices have: the one-dollar ticket in 1955 is now $56.

1. When did Walt Disney open the worlds first large- scale theme park?

2. How many fun seekers have visited Disneyland?

3.What has it created?

4. What was name of a famous mouse in Disneys films?

5. What is the price of admission ticket now?

IV-Writing:
A.Put the verbs in parentheses into the correct active or passive voice
1. Last night my favorite program________________ (interrupt) by a special news
bulletin.
2. When I______________ (arrive) at the airport yesterday, I______________ (meet)
by my cousin and a couple of friends.
3. Kim______________ (write) this composition last week. That one _____________
(write) by Phi.
4. I dont have my bicycle today. Its with the repairman. It______________ (repair)
right now.
5. Someone has bought the small lot behind my house and a new
house_______________ (build) on it next year.
B.Write the sentences using the words given :
1.Marie Curie / born / November 7th,1867 / Warsaw
->..
2 .She/want / become / sciencetist.
->..
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
.Elvis Presley/ be / famous singer / America / 20th century.
->..

Date: 20/12/2010 UNIT 9: UNDERSEA WORLD


Period : 55 LESSON 1 : READING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will bw able toL


- Have information about the undersea world.
- Knowledge about the oceans and the undersea world.
II. Language focus:
1. Grammar: - Should.
- Conditional type 2
2. Vocabulary: - Vocabulary concerning undersea world like: whale, jellyfish,
shark,life span,
- Words and phrases about protecting environment.
III. Skill:
- Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through vocabulary Matching
and Table completion exercises.
IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk.
V. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm-up:
3 - Aim: Sts get used to the topic.
+ Networks:
- Sts are required to work in groups of 3 or - Work in groups of 3-4 students
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
4 to make a list of words related to the
names of the animals in the sea in written - Give the lists to the teacher
form.
- The group with the longest list will be the
winner.
2. Before you read - Work in pairs and do the work
- Aim: -Prepare information and orally.
12 vocabularies for the topic. - Some sts report.
+ Work with a partner 1: + Pa'cific ocean: Thi bnh
- Ask sts to look at the map and give dng
Vietnamese names for the oceans on the + At'lantic ocean: i ty
map. dng
- Allow sts to discuss in pairs in 2 minutes.+ 'Indian ocean: n d-
ng
+ 'Arctic ocean: Bc bng
- Get feedback and give remarks. dng
+ An'tarctic ocean
+ Work with a partner 2: ( southern ocean): Bin
- Sts are required to do in the same way as nam cc.
in work with a partner 1 to name the sea - Listen and copy down.
animal in each picture.
- Ask some sts to report. - Do as they have done in the
- Listen and give remarks. previous part
+ Vocabulary: - Some sts report.
- Provide the sts with new words/phrases: + Picture1: Seal
+ Gulf(n): Vnh + Picture2: Jellyfish
+ challenge(v): thchthc + Picture3: Turtle
+ Subma'rine(n): Tu ngm + Picture4: Shark
+ 'organism(n): c th - Self- correct
+ Biodi'versity(n): s a dng
sinh hc
+ at stake(phr) : C nguy c
tuyt chng = in danger
- Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask
the sts to repeat it. - Listen and then copy down
- Leave the sts 1 minute to self-practise
reading the words.
- Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases - Listen and repeat.
aloud in front of the class
- Listen and help the sts to read the - Read these words silently.
words/phrases correctly.
3. While you read: - Soms sts read these words aloud
20 - Aims: Read the passage for information and others listen.
to do the tasks. - Self-correct.
+ Set the scene:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- You are going to read a passage about
undersea world. Read it and then do the
tasks that follow.
+ Task 1:Fill in each space with a suitable
from the box.
- Ask sts to read the passage and do task 1. - Listen to the teacher.
- Sts are required to compare their results
with their partners.
- 5 sts are required to do the task orally in - Read the passage and then do
front of the class (1 st/ 1 time). the task.
- Listen and help sts to do the task - Share their answer with their
correctly. partners.
+ Task 2: Answering Questions: - Some sts report.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to read the 1. tiny 2. investigate
passage again and answer the questions in 3. gulf 4. biodiversity
task 2. 5. samples
- Require sts to underline the information
that supports the answers.
- Sts are required to compare their answers - Work in pairs to ask and answer.
with another pair.
- Ask 5-6 sts to read their answers aloud in - Compare their answer with
front of the class (1 st / 1 time). other pairs.
- Some pairs report.
1. 75%
2. They do that by using modern
devices
- Give correct answers. 3. They bring samples to the
scientists to study
4. We can learn about the
temperature, depth, and the
marine population
5. They are : + the bottom
depending
+ current
independing
+ tiny organism
4. After you read:
- Aims: Give the summary of the passage. - Work in pairs to do the task.
8 - Sts are required to work in pairs to fill in - 8 sts report.
each numbered space with a word/phrase 1. three-quarters 2.
in the box. mysterious 3.
- 8 sts represent by reading aloud the modern 4. discovery
answers. 5. plants and animals 6. huge
- Listen and help sts to do their task well. 7. biodiversit
8. closely connected
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
2 . Homework: - Others listen
- Learn the summary of the reading
passage.

EXPERIENCES:

Date: 20/12/2010 UNIT 9: UNDERSEA WORLD


Period : 56 LESSON 2 : SPEAKING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know about some actions to protect the oceans.
- Students can talk about the protection of the oceans.
II. Skill: - Speaking about undersea world.
- Reading and ordering the importance to protect the oceans.
III. Teaching aids:
Textbook, chalk, board.
IV. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities
1. Homework - checking:
7 - Ask sts to write the new words on the - One student write the new words
board. on board.
- Ask others to answer the questions of - Others answer the questions.
the reading passage.
2. Before you speak:
13 Aims:to focus sts on the topic and
introduce the new words and phrases

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
used to talk about the protection of the
oceans. - Listen to the T.
+ Task 1: There are some actions that
should be taken to protect our oceans.
Put the actions in order of importance
and say what we should or shouldnt do. - Write down the new words and
- Ask sts to look at the task and give sts practise reading them.
some new words:
- rubbish (n): rc ri
- pollute (v): gy nhim
- dispose (v) of sth: vt b
- 'herbicides (n): thuc dit c - Work in pairs to do the task.
- 'pesticide (n): thuc tr su
- Ask sts to read the new words aloud.
- Ast sts to work in pairs, using should
or shouldnt to put the actions in order
of importance and talk about these
actions.
- Go around to help sts if necessary.
- T. may give sts some suggested
phrases: - Sts may answer: I think that
What do you think of action( f ) is the most important
How do you feel about + V- ing because if we learn all we can know
Whats your opinion of about the oceans we will
Well, I think... understand their values and try to
In my opinion we should..... protect them.
- Ask some sts to give their opinions.
3. While you speak
15 Aims: Sts practise discussing the
consequences of the threats to the - read the sentences and find the
oceans and some solutions. new words.
- Ask sts to skim the sentences in Task 2
and find the new words.
- Explain some new words: - Listen and take notes.
hunt (v )
explosive ( n)
spill ( v )
tanker ( n ) - Work in group of three or four.
-- Ask sts to work in groups of three or
four to discuss the consequences of the
threat to our oceans listed in Task 2 and
offer some solutions.
- Give sts some suggestions:
Threats
Consequences
Solutions

1. Beaches are filled with plastic bags.


Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- polluted water
- place plastic bags in proper dustbins

2.Whales are hunted for food.


- extinct/ disappear
- not hunt or sell whale products

3.Explosives are used to catch fish.


- a lot of fish died
- be banned.

4. Oil is filled from tanks


- polluted water
-clean the sea water/punish captain.

- Go around to help sts if necessary. - Some sts report their opinions in


4.After you speak: front of the class.
8 Aims: Sts report what they have
discussed.
Task 3: Report to the class what your
group has discussed.
- Ask some representatives to report
their groups opinions in front of the - Others listen and give remarks.
class.
- Listen and ask others to listen to give
their opinions.
2 5. Homework:
- Write a passage about the threats to our
oceans and the solutions.

EXPERIENCES:

Date: 20/12/2010 UNIT 9: UNDERSEA WORLD


Period : 57 LESSON 3 : LISTENING

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Sts know about the whales: how large they are, what they eat, where they
live, and if they are in danger.
- Parts of the world
- Vocabulary on sea animals.
II. Skill: - Listening: choose True/ False statements, answer the questions
- Speaking: - Talk about whales
III. Teaching aids:
- Textbook , tape, pictures of whales and other sea animals.
IV. Procedures:

T Teachers activities Students activities


1. Homework checking:
7 One st presents. Others listen and
One sts talks about what people should give remarks.
do to protect the oceans.
2. Before you listen:
10 Aims: to focus sts on the topic and
review/ introduce the words and phrases
used in the listening text.
a. Focus sts on the picture of a whale - Discuss in groups.
and ask sts to answer the following
questions:
- What animal is the largest in the
world?
- What do you know about whales? Some sts stand up and give their
- Why do people think whales are not answer.
fish?
- Why do people keep hunting Sts copy the words and phrases.
whales?
- Ask some sts to give their answer.
b. Introduces some new words
- 'mammal (n): the animal that raise
the young on milk
- whaling (n): hunting whales
- krill(n): tiny shellfish found in the
seas (whales feed on krill)
- mig'rate(v): to move from one place
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
to another according to season
- conser'vation (n): taking care of st,
the prevention of loss, damage.....
- feeding / bearing ground (n): the
place where a species of animal find
food/ give birth.
- an/a/the increase/ decrease in
st(phr): - Listen and repeat.
- International whaling Commission: - Read the words in pairs and
an organization responsible for the correct each others mistakes.
number of whales hunted. - Some individuals read the words
- measure(n): an action taken to aloud.
achieve a purpose - Look at the map, recall parts of
- Read the words and ask sts to repeat. the world, the oceans and discuss
- Ask sts to read the words in pairs. where there are cold waters.
- Ask some sts to read the words again.
- Ask sts to refer to the map of the world
in the textbook (p. 94) and revise parts
of the world, the oceans and discuss
where there are cold waters. - Listen to the T.
3. While you listen:
18 + Task 1: - Work in pairs to guess if the
Aims: Sts practise listening and marking statements are true or false.
True/ False statements. - Listen to the tape and do the task
- Tell sts that they are going to listen to a
talk about whales. - Compare their answer.
- Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the - Give their answer.
statements given and guess if they are 1. F. It's the largest animal on
true or false. earth.
- Ask sts to listen to the talk and tick the 2. T 3. T
right column to indicate their answer 4. F. They are in danger because
and underline the false information. T some people are still killing them
plays the tape twice. for food
- Ask sts to compare their answer in 5. T
pairs. - Check their answer and then
- Check sts answer. correct their work if they have the
wrong answer.

- Play the tape once again, stop the tape - Work in pairs to read the
where necessary and conduct the questions and try to answer them.
correction.
+ Task 2: - Listen and do the task.
Aims:Sts practise listening for specific
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
information by answering given - Gives their answer.
questions. 1. It is about 30 metres in length
- Ask sts to have a look at the questions and over 200 tons in weight.
in the textbook and read them in pairs 2. It is because there is a lot of
and make sure they understand them. T krill - their favourite food
encourages sts guess the answer to the 3. They are the cold waters in the
questions. North and the South of the Pacific
- Ask sts to listen to the tape once or Ocean and the Atlantic Ocean.
twice again to answer the questions. Sts 4. Heavy hunting.
can note down important information 5. They have asked the
- Ask sts to compare their answer in International Waling Commission
pairs. to stop most whaling. 6. If we
- Check sts answer. didn't take any measures to protect
whales, this kind of animal would
disappear forever
- Check their answer, and then
correct their work if they have the
wrong answer.

- Work in pairs to talk about


whales.

- Play the tape once again, stop the tape


where necessary and conduct the
correction.
4. After you listen:
10 - Ask sts to work in pairs and tell each
other about the whales using the - Two sts present.
following information:
largest- 30 -200 -most intelligent - cold
water - North - South- Pacific - Atlantic
- krill - in danger - hunting - The
Eskimo - not protect - disappear.
- Move round to check the activities and
to make sure that sts are working
effectively.
- Ask two sts to present in front of the
whole class.
1 - Check and give remarks.
5. Homework:
Write a short paragraph about the whale
EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 23/12/2010 UNIT 9: UNDERSEA WORLD


Period : 58 LESSON 4 : WRITING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students can write a paragraph to describe information from a table.
- Information about the sperm whale and the dolphin.
II. Skill: Speaking: - read the sample paragraph.
- work in pairs to find information to complete the table .
- write a paragraph to describe the facts and figures provided in
the table.
III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk.
IV. Procedures:
T Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking :
5 - Ask one st to talk about whales.
- Ask other sts to listen to their friend
and give remarks. - Listen to their friend and give
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Check and give remarks. remarks.
2. Before you write: - Listen to the teacher.
- Aims:to get sts to read the sample
17 paragraph and to help them to
prepare vocabulary and information
before they write.
+ Task 1:
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain some new words: - Listen to the teacher carefully.
+ sperm whale (n): a kind of whale that
is hunted for an oily substance in its - Copy these words into theit
head. notebooks.
+ 'carnivore (n): an animal that eats
meat
+ squid (n): mc ng
+ ges'tation period (n): the process of
carrying the young baby inside the
mother's body.
+ life span (n): the period from birth to
death - Listen to the teacher and then
+ en'trapment (n): s mc by read these words in chorus and
+ 'offspring (n): con ci individually.
- Ask sts to listen to the teacher and - Read the paragraph in pairs and
repeat , then write these words into their do the task.
notebooks.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to read the - Share their answer with their
paragraph and then complete the table friends.
that follows. - Present their ideas.
- Move round to help if necessary. + Range and habitat: all oceans.
- Ask sts to compare their ideas with Prefer the waters with high squid
other pairs. populations.
- Draw a table on the board and ask + Size:
some sts to go to the board and complete Male: 18 m in length, 54,000 kg in
the table. weight
Female: 12 m in length, 17,000 kg
in weight.
..................................
- Listen to the teacher.
- Look at the board and give remarks.
+ Task 2: - Work in pairs to read the table
- Ask sts to work in pairs in 3 minutes to and try to understand the
read the second table with some information.
information about the dolphin.
- Move round to help if necessary.
3. While you write:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Aims: Sts practise writing a paragraph
15 that describes the facts and figures
about the dolphin..
- Ask sts to use the information in the - Do the writing task.
table and write a paragraph about the
dolphin basing on the information in the
table.
- Let sts write in 10 minutes.
- Move around to conduct the activity. - Read their writing: ( a sample
4. After you write: paragraph)
7 Aims: to get feedback and check sts' Dolphins are not fish. They are
work. mamals that live in the water.
- Get feedback by asking some sts to Dolphins among the most
read their work aloud. intelligent on Earth. Although they
- Ask some other sts to give remarks. can be found in all oceans in the
- Check and give the correct answer. world, dolphins prefer coastal
- If there is enough time, T can have sts waters and bays. The size of
exchange their writing among sts within dolphins varies greatly. The
a group so that they can check their smallest dolphin is just about 50kg
friend's work and give remarks. in weight and 1.2 metres in length
while the largest o9ne can weigh
up to 8,200 kg and is 10 metres
long. Dolphins are carnivores and
they eat mostly fish. A female
dolphin gives birth to one calf
every two years after a gestation
period of eleven to twelve
months...........

1 5. Homework:
- Part D ( page 67- workbook)

EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 23/12/2010 UNIT 9: UNDERSEA WORLD


Period : 59 LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know how to pronounce the sound /i/, /e/ and /u/ correctly.
- Students revise the use of "should" and conditional sentence type 2.
II. Language focus:
1. Grammar: - Should.
- Conditional type 2
2. Vocabulary: - Vocabulary concerning undersea world like: whale, jellyfish,
shark,life span,
- Words and phrases about protecting environment.
III. Skills: - Pronunciation: /i/, /e/ and /u/ .
- Should.
- Conditional sentence type 2.
IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
V. Procedures:
T Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking:
5 - Ask one st to read the text about the - One st read the text aloud in front
blue whale. of the whole class.
- Ask another st to give remarks. - Give remarks.
- Check and give a mark. - Listen to the teacher.
2. Pronunciation:
- Aims: to introduce three sounds
10 /i/,/e/ and /u/ and help sts to practise
these sounds.
a. Write three sounds on the board and - Write down three sounds.
pronounce them clearly twice, then ask - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
sts to repeat. - Look at the book , listen and
- Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds repeat.
accurately. /i/ /e/ /u/
- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen here pair poor
and repeat. dear chair sure
clear square tour
- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read ...........................
the words again so that they can check - Read these words in pairs and
for each other. check for their partners.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Move around to help .
- Ask two sts to read again and give - Look at the book and work in
remarks. pairs.
- Answers:
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page /i/ /e/ /u/
101 in the book. beer where sure
- Ask them to work in pairs to read the dear wear poor
sentences and then find out the words ...............................
containing sound /i/, sound /e/ and - Read the sentences.
sound /u/ .
- Ask them to work in 2 minutes.
- Move around to conduct the activity.
- Ask one st to report and other sts to
give remarks.
- Check and give the correct answers.
- Ask some sts to read these sentences
aloud. - " Should " is a modal verb that is
- Listen and give remarks. used to give advice.
3. Grammar: - Some sts give examples:
28 Aims: to revise the use of " should" and eg: You should get up early in the
conditional sentence type 2 and have morning.
sts do Ex1, EX 2 and EX3. People shouldn't hunt whales.
a. Should:
- Ask sts to tell the T the use of
"should"

- Ask sts to give examples with "should"


and "shouldn't". - Do Ex 1.
- Some sts sts report their work
- Ask sts to do EX1. sentence by sentence.
+ Exercise 1: 2. You should look for another job.
- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the 3. He shouldn't go to bed so late.
task. 4. You should take a photograph.
- Ask sts to do the exercise individually 5. She shouldn't use her car so
and then compare their answers in pairs. much.
- Move round to conduct the activity. 6. He should put some pictures on
- Check the exercise sentence by the wall.
sentence.
- Listen and give remarks. - Look at the examples and listen to
the teacher.

- Introduce the use of " I think/ I don't


think ...... should ..."by using some
examples: - Listen to the teacher.
eg: Joana and Andrew are planning to
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
go skiing this weekend. You think it's a
bad idea.
You; I think you should stay at home. - Do this EX individually.
I don't think you should go skiing - Some sts report.
thid weekend. 2. I think smoking should be
- Explain why " I don't think ....... banned, especially in restaurants.
should...." is preferred to " I think ....... 3. I don't think you should go out
shouldn't.........". this evening.
- Ask sts to do EX2. 4. I think he should resign.
+ Exercise 2: - Listen to their friends and their
- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and teacher.
then share the answers with their
friends.
- Move round to help if necessary.
- Ask two sts to do this exercise on the
board.
- Ask one st to give remarks.
- Check and give remarks.

b. Conditional sentence type 2: - Read the examples and point out


- Review the form and the use of the form and the use of conditional
conditional sentence type 2 by giving sentence type 2:
some examples: + Form:
eg: If my grandfather were still alive, he If- clause , main clause
would be 100 today. S + V( P.S) , S + would + V
If I had a lot of money, I would lend + Use: an unreal situation at
you some. present or in the future.
- Ask sts to read the examples and point
out the form as well as the use of
conditional sentence type 2.
+ Note: " were" is used with all persons.
- Ask some sts to give examples.
- Ask sts to do EX3. - Do Ex 3 in pairs.
+ Exercise 3: - Some sts report.
- Ask sts to do the task in pairs. 3. would take 7. pressed
- Go round to conduct the activity. 4. refused 8. wouldn't be
- Ask some pairs to read sentence by 5. wouldn't get 9. didn't
sentence. come
- Listen and give remarks. 6. closed down 10. borrowed
............................

2 5. Homework
- Part B ( page 54 - workbook)
EXPERIENCES:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 25/12/2010 UNIT 10: CONSERVATION


Period : 60 LESSON 1 : READING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students improve their knowledge about conservation.
II.Language focus:
1.Grammar: -Passive voices
2. Vocabulary: - Vocabulary concerning conservation.
III. Skill:
- Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through Matching and
True or False, identifying the main idea exercise.
IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk.
V. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm-up:
3 + Network..
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask sts to work in groups of 3 or 4. - Work in groups to discuss.
- Ask sts to give a list of the animals
which are in danger of extinction. - Some sts report the list in front of
- After 3 minutes, the group which has the class.
the longest list will be the winner.
2. Before you read:
- Sts are required to answer the - Think of the answers.
10 questions given in the part:
1. Have you ever visited a zoo or a - Students give answers orally.
forest? - others listen
2. What animals are you interested
in? Why?
3. Do we need to protect animals
and forests?
+ For each question, 2-3 sts are required
to answer orally.
+ Vocabulary: - Copy down these words into their
- Provide the students with some new notebooks.
words/phrases
+Variety(n): a large number of different
kinds.
+ Species(n): = kind, type. - Listen and repeat
+ Eliminate(v): = disappear, - Practise reading these words by
remove themselves.
+ Destruction(n) destroy(v) - Some sts read these words again
destructive(Adj): s ph hu. aloud (1 student/ 1 time)
+ Hydroelectric dam(n): p
thu in.
+ Circulation(n): S chuyn
ng. circulate(v)
+ Overnight(Adv): in a very short period - Work individually.
of time
- Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask
sts to repeat it.
- Leave sts 1 minute to self-practise.
- Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases
aloud in front of the class
- Listen and help sts to read the
words/phrases correctly. - Try their best to do the task.
20 3. While you read: - Ask some sts to report.
+ Task 1: Matching. 1.c 2.a 3.d 4.b
- Ask sts to read the passage
independently and match the words or -Listen and self-correct the exercise.
phrases in A with their meaning in B.
- Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help - Sts do the work individually
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
and encourage them try to guess the
meanings of the words in the context of
the reading.
- Call on some sts to read and explain
their answers aloud in front of the class. - Highlight or underline the
- Get feedback and give correct answers. important information.
+ Task 2: True or False. - 6-7 students do orally while others
- Ask sts to read the passage more watch
carefully and decide whether the 1. T 2. T
statements are true(T) or false(F). 3. T 4. T
Correct the false information. 5. F( two last sentences of
- Ask sts to highlight or underline the paragraph B)
information in the passage that help sts 6. F(last sentence of paragraph C)
to find the correct answers. - Self-correct the work
- 6 - 7 sts are required to give answers in
front of the class(1 st/ 1answer).

- Work in groups of 3-4 students


- Listen and help sts to do the exercise orally
correctly - Some sts report.
+ Task 3: Main ideas. A.3 B. 4 C. 2
- Ask sts to work in groups of 3-4 to
choose the most suitable idea for each - Self-correct
paragraph.
- Call on some representatives to read
their choice for each paragraph in front
of the class.
8 - Get feedback and give correct answers.
4. After you read: - Work in pairs orally.
Questions - Answers 1. We wouldn't be able to use many
- Ask sts to work in pairs to give plants to treat various dangerous
answers to the questions. diseases. Animals wouldn't have a
- Go round to help the students with place to live in...
their work. 2. Mankind and most plants and
- 3-4 sts are required to give answers to animals can't survive without
one question orally in front of the water...
class( 1 st/1 time). 3. We should stop polluting the
environment and destroying plants
and animals ......
- Listen and help sts to give correct
answers.
2
5. Homework:
- Ask sts to write a paragraph of about
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
60 words on the sequence of losing
forest, how important water is, and what
we should do for the future of our
planet.

EXPERIENCES:

Date: 02/01/2011 UNIT 10: CONSERVATION


Period : 61 LESSON 2 : SPEAKING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know about the new kind of zoo.
- Students can talk about the advantages and disadvantages of the new kind of zoo.
II. Skill: Speaking
- Asking and answering about the new kind of zoo.
- Showing agreement or disagreement about the new kind of zoo.
- Reporting on discussion results.
III. Teaching aids:
Textbook, chalk, board.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
IV. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm-up
5 - Ask sts some questions: -Sts answer:
Have you ever visited the zoo? Yes, I have/ No, never
What did you see there? I saw many animals there
Where are all the animals in the zoo? They are in the cages.
- Introduce the new lesson: We are going to
discuss the new kind of zoo where wild animals
can live in their natural habitat.
2.Before you speak:
10 Aims: Sts can discuss the questions about the
features of the new kind of zoo.
+ Task 1: Read the paragraph and answer the
questions - Read two paragraphs silently.
- Ask sts to read through the two paragraphs.
- Give sts some new words: - Listen and take notes.
+ sensitive (adj): be affected by slight
changes, influences: nhy cm
+ imprison (v): put or keep in prison:
b t
+ reconstruct (v): build again
+ breed (v) : gy ging , nhn - Practise reading the new words .
ging.
+ reintroduce (v): put a species of - Work in pairs.
animal or plant back into a former - Some sts present in front of the
habitat: a tr v mi trng sng t class.
nhin 1. They are opened to help
- Ask sts to read the new words orally endangered species develop.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to discuss the 2. The animals are not kept in
questions in two paragraphs. cages. They can live in their
- Go around to help sts . natural environment.
- Ask some sts to present their answers.
20 - Get feedback and give remarks.
3. While you speak:
Aims: Sts can show their agreement or
disagreement about the new kind of zoo and
discuss the advantages and disadvantages of
the new kind of zoo. - Listen to the T.
+ Task 2: Put a tick in the right box and share
your ideas with a partner.
- Before sts do the task T elicits some structures
for asking opinions and giving the opinions ...
Asking for opinions

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Giving opinions

What do you think of ...?


Do you think......? - Work individually.
Do you agree with ....? - Work in pairs to share the ideas .
I think ... - Say their opinions aloud.
I dont think ... I think it would be better for
In my opinion .. animals if they live in the zoo of
new kind because they may have
Showing agreement better food.
Showing disagreement ................................................
- Listen to the teacher.
I agree with ....
Yes , I think you are right.
Exactly. - Work in groups of three of four
I dont really think so. to discuss the advantages and
Yes, ..but... disadvantages of the new kind of
I would doubt that .. zoo.

- Ask sts to work individually to do the task


- Ask sts to work in pairs to share their ideas.
- Go around to observe and help sts
- Ask some sts to talk about their ideas.
10 - Listen and give feedback.

4. After you speak:

+ Task 3:Discuss the advantages and


disadvantages of the new kind of zoo using the
cues below.
- Ask sts to work in group to discuss the - Some sts present in front of the
advantages and disadvantages of the new kind class:
of zoo. "There are some advantages of the
Advantages new kind of zoo. Firstly, the
Disadvantages animals can live in a better
environment and are safer than
- the conditions the animals are in when they are in nature......"
- Listen to their friends as well as
- the animals that people can visit to the teacher.
- the money spent on rescontructions of the
animals natural environment
- the dangers that keepers may have

- Go around to help sts if necessary.


3 - Take notes of Ss mistakes for later correction.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Aims: Sts can report on their discussion results
5. Homework ( 2 minutes )
Write a paragraph of the report that they have
discussed in the class.
EXPERIENCES:

Date: 02/01/2011 UNIT 10: CONSERVATION


Period : 62 LESSON 3 : LISTENING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Sts know how a forest fire starts and what campers have to remember to do to
protect the forests.
* Language: - Some set expressions
- Vocabulary on forest
II. Skill: - Listening: order events ,mark True/False, detect sentences.
- Speaking: - Discuss how a forest fire may start and what every camper
ought to remember.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
III. Teaching aids:
- Textbook , tape, pictures of whales and other sea animals.
IV. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities
1. Homework checking:
5 - One st tell the whole class about the Other sts listen to their friend and
advantages and disadvantages of a zoo give remarks
of the new kind.
- Listen and give remarks.
2. Before you listen:
10 Aims: to focus sts on the topic and
review/ introduce the words and
phrases used in the listening text.
a. Divide sts into 3 groups and ask each
to discuss one of the following - Work in groups and discuss the
questions: questions.
a. How destructive can a forest
fire be?
b. What can cause a forest fire? - One st from each group stands up
c. Do you know any famous forest and gives their answer.
fire? Are there any forest fires in
Vietnam? Which countries have many
forest fires every year?
- Ask some sts to give their answer.
b. Introduce the topic of the listening - Copy down the words and phrases
text into their notebooks.
- Introduce some new words/
expressions
- campfire (n): the fire made on at
camping trip. - Listen and repeat.
- forester (n): the person whose job - Read the words in pairs and
is to take cares of the forest. correct each others mistakes.
- a heap of (n): a lot of thing on top - Some individuals read the words
of one another. aloud.
- spread (v): to move to other places - Listen to the T.
very quickly]
- leave sb/ st doing: leave sb/st when
it/he is Ving
- Read the words again and ask sts to
repeat.
- Ask sts to read the words in pairs.
- Ask some sts to read the words again
and give remarks
3. While you listen:
25 + Task 1: - Read the statements in pairs and
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Aims: Sts practise listening and try to guess the order of the events.
numbering the event in the correct - Listen to the tape / the teacher and
order. do the task
- Introduce sts that they are going to - Compare their answer.
listen to the tape about forest fires and - Give their answer.
they have to number the given Key: 3 - 2 - 5 - 1 - 4
statements in the order they hear. - Check their answer, and then
- Ask sts to read the statements in pairs correct their work if they have the
and make sure that they understand wrong answer.
them.
- Play the tape twice and ask sts to put
the number in the right box to indicate
the order of the events
- Ask sts to compare their answer in
pairs.
- Check sts answer.
- Play the tape once again, stop the tape
where necessary and conduct the
correction.
+ Task 2:
Aims: Sts practise listening and - Listen to the T.
marking True/ false. - Read the statements in pairs and
- Ask sts to listen to the tape again and try to do the task.
decide whether the given statements - Listen to the tape / the teacher and
are true or false. do the task
- Ask sts to read the statements to see if - Compare their answer.
they understand them. - Give their answer.
- Play the tape once and ask sts to tick 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F
to the box to indicate T/ F statement - Check their answer say it aloud,
and underline the false information and then correct their work if they
- Ask sts to compare their answer in have the wrong answer.
pairs.
- Check sts answer.
- Play the tape once again, stop the tape
where necessary and conduct the
correction.
+ Task 3:
Aims: Sts practise listening and ticking - Read the sentences and find out
the sentences they hear. the difference between sentences in
- Ask sts to have a look at the sentences each pair.
given to see if they understand them
and compare the sentences in each pair - Listen to the tape and do the task.
to see the difference between them.
- Ask sts lo listen to the tape again and - Give their answer.
tick in the box to indicate the sentences Key: 1. B 2. A 3. A
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
they hear. - Check their answer and then
- Play the tape once. correct their work if they have the
- Check sts answer. wrong answer.
- Play the tape once again, stop the tape
where necessary and conduct the - Work in groups to discuss.
correction.
4. After you listen:
8 - Ask sts to work in groups and use the
information in Task 1 and 2 to discuss
the following questions:
- How can a forest fire start?
- What does every camper have to - One/ two sts present.
remember not to cause a forest fire?
- Move round to check the activities
and to make sure that sts are working
effectively.
- Ask one or two sts to retell the story
in front of the whole class.
- Check and give remarks.
5. Homework:
2 Write a short paragraph about what
people can do to protect forest from
fires.
EXPERIENCES:

Date: 09/01/2010 UNIT 10: CONSERVATION


Period : 63 LESSON 4 : WRITING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students can write a letter of invitation.
* Language: - Language used to write an informal letter.
- Structures: "Let's ...... "," Shall we.....?", etc .
II. Skill: Writing: - read the sentences in task 1 and the incomplete letters in task 2.
- work in pairs to match the halves of the sentences in task 1 and to fill
each blank in these invitation letters.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- write an invitation letter basing on the cues.
III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk.
IV. Procedures:
T Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking :( 5 mins)
5 - Ask one st to talk about how a forest fire
may start and what every camper ought to
remember. - Listen to their friend and give
- Ask other sts to listen to their friend and remarks.
give remarks.
- Check and give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.
2. Before you write:( 20 mins)
- Aims:to get sts to write out the
20 sentences by matching the first half in A
with the most suitable half in B and then
to use these sentences to fill the blanks in
the invitation letters.
+ Task 1:
- Ask sts to read the requirement of task - Listen to the teacher carefully.
1 carefully and then work in pairs to do
the task.
- Ask sts to pay attention to the meaning
as well as the structure of the two halves. - Copy the structures into theit
- Recall some structures so that sts can do notebooks.
the task more easily.
Shall we/ Can you/ Why don't you + V-
inf...? - Do the task in pairs.
Let's + V-inf. - Share their answer with their
Would you like/ Are you free + to-V.......? friends.
Do you feel like/ How about + V- - Present their ideas.
ing.......? 1.c 2. f/h 3. a 4. g/d
- Ask sts to do in 4 minutes and move 5. h/f 6. d/g 7. e 8.b
around to help if necessary. - Listen to the teacher.

- Get feedback and give remarks.


+ Task 2: - Work in pairs to read the letters
- Ask sts to work in pairs to read the and try to understand the content of
letters in pairs and to use the above the letters.
expression to fill each blank.
- Introduce some new words/phrases:
+ for a while: for a period of time
+ 'disco (n): a club or party where people
dance with pop music - Listen and repeat.
+ 'afterwards (adv): at a later time - Copy the words/ phrases
- Ask sts to listen to the teacher and - Report their answer:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
repeat , then write these words into their 1.3/8 2.3/8 - 4/6 3. 2/5- 7
notebooks. - Listen to the teacher.
- Get sts to do the task in 5 minutes and
then get feedback letter by letter.
- Listen and give remarks
3. While you write:( 10 mins)
- Aims: Sts practise writing an invitation
letter. - Do the writing task.
10 - Ask sts to play the role of Nam's and to
write a letter to Lam, inviting him to
spend a weekend with him.
- Let sts write in 8 minutes.
- Move around to conduct the activity.
4. After you write:( 9 mins) - Read their writing: ( a sample
Aims: to get feedback and check sts' paragraph)
8 work. "Dear Lam,
- Get feedback by asking some sts to read We haven't met since oyu moved.
their work aloud. And I miss you a lot.
- Ask some other sts to give remarks. We are both having some days- off
- Check and give the correct answer. between the two terms soon. So if
- If there is enough time, T can have sts you haven't made any other plans
exchange their writing among sts within a why don't we spend a weekend
group so that they can check their friend's together?
work and give remarks Do you feel like visiting the forest
near my grandparents' home
again?It looks quite different now
because very many young trees
have been planted at the Trees
Planting Festivals.
Do come if you find it possible and
I'll make all the preparations then.
Please give my love to your parents.
Your friend,
2 5. Homework: ( 1min)
- Part D (page 63- workbook).
EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 09/01/2010 UNIT 10: CONSERVATION


Period : 64 LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know how to pronounce the sound /b/ and /p/ correctly.
- Students revise the passive voice.

II.Language focus:
1.Grammar: -Passive voices
2. Vocabulary: - Vocabulary concerning conservation.

III. Skill: - Pronunciation: /b/ and/p/ .


- The passive voice.
IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.

V. Procedures:

T Teacher's activities Students' activities


1. Homework checking:
5 - Ask one st to read the letter they - One st reads his/her letter aloud
wrote at home aloud. aloud in front of the whole class.
- Ask another st to give remarks. - Give remarks.
- Check and give a mark. - Listen to the teacher.
2. Pronunciation:
- Aims: to introduce two sounds / b /
10 and / p / and help sts to practise these
sounds.
a. Write two sounds on the board and - Write down two sounds.
pronounce them clearly twice, then ask - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
sts to repeat. - Look at the book , listen and
- Tell sts how to pronounce these repeat.
sounds accurately. /b/ /p/
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
/ b / : a voiced sound bee pea
/ p / : a voiceless sound ban pan
- Ask them to look at the textbook, bad Paul
listen and repeat. ...........................
- Read these words in pairs and
- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read check for their partners.
the words again so that they can check
for each other.
- Move around to help .
- Ask two sts to read again and give - Look at the book and work in
remarks. pairs.
- Answers:
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page /b/ /p/
110 in the book. Bill Pat
- Ask them to work in pairs to read the big pan
sentences and then find out the words black paper
containing sound / b / and sound / p / . ...............................
- Ask them to work in 2 minutes. - Read the sentences.
- Move around to conduct the activity.
- Ask one st to report and other sts to
give remarks.
- Check and give the correct answers.
- Ask some sts to read these sentences
aloud.
- Listen and give remarks.
3. Grammar:
Aims: to revise the passive voice and - Listen to the teacher , read the
29 have sts do Ex1, EX 2 and EX3. example and tell the whole class
+ The passive voice: their ideas.
- Recall the form of the passive by + In the passive, the object of an
giving an example: active verb becomes the subject of
eg: Active: We clean this window the passive verb.
every day.
Passive: This window is cleaned + Form:
every day. S + V ( be + p.p )
- Ask sts to pay attention to the
sentence elements and to tell the T the - Listen to the teacher and take note.
difference between the active sentence
and the passive sentence. - Give examples.
- Ask sts to tell the T the form of the
passive.
+ Note: Only transitive verbs are used
in the passive. It is impossible to use
verbs such as happen, sleep, stand
( intransitive verbs) or seem, feel
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
( intensive verbs) in the passive.
- Ask sts to give some examples.
+ Exercise 1:
- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the
task. - Some sts report.
- Ask sts to do the exercise individually 1. were reported 2. are grown
and then compare their answers in 3. be spoken 4. am not invited
pairs. 5. are being built
- Move round to conduct the activity. - Listen and correct their work if
- Check the exercise sentence by necessary.
sentence.
- Listen and give remarks. - Do the Ex individually.
+ Exercise 2: EX 2:
- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and 1. came.... had ( been)
then share the answers with their started .......... were
friends. 2. is standing........ is being
- Move round to help if necessary. photographed
- Ask two sts to do this exercise on the 3. Have the students been told
board. 4. was being laid ...... decided
5. will ................ be planted
- Listen to the teacher.
- Ask one st to give remarks.
- Check and give remarks. - Read the requirement carefully.
- Do Ex 3.
+ Exercise 3: EX3:
- Ask sts to read the requirement of Ex3 1. was organized 2. arrived
and then do the task in pairs. 3. were met 4. taken
- Go round to conduct the activity. 5. had been cleaned 6. had been
- Ask some pairs to read the dialouge. put
- Listen and give remarks. 7. was excellent 8. prepared
9. made 10. were
1 served
5. Homework - Part B ( page 60-
workbook)

EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 11/012011 UNIT 11: NATIONAL PARKS


Period : 65 LESSON 1 : READING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students improve their knowledge about national parks .

II. language focus:


1 . Grammar: -Conditional sentence: type .
2. Vocabulary:- Vocabulary concerning natural environment and conservation.
III. Skill:
- Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through finding the word in the
passage that best suits each of the definitions and answering questions.
IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk.
V. Procedures:

T Teachers activities Students activities


1. Before you read:
Aims: to repare information and
12 vocabularies for the topic.
- Ask sts to answer the question:
Can you name some national - Listen and think of the question.
parks in Vietnam and in the world? - Some sts answer:
- Ask some sts to answer the question. Cuc Phuong National Park
Bach Ma national Park.
Nairobi National Park.
- Listen and give remarks. Alaska National Park.
- Introduce the reading text and
provide sts with new words/phrases.
+ lo'cate(v): = to place (c v
tr)
+ 'butterfly(n): an insect with
very big wings that can fly(con
bm) - Listen and then copy down
+ e'stablish(v): = to make/
build( thit lp)
+ hike(v): to walk for health
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
+sur'vive(v): to be alive after
accident( sng st ).....
survival(n)
+ 'orphan(v): to be made
parentless(m ci)
orphanage(n)
+ Sub-tropical(Adj): cn nhit - Listen and repeat.
i - Read silently to self-practise.
+ 'wilderness(n): = wild place( - Some sts read these words aloud
ni/ s hoang d) and others listen.
+ contami'nation(n) - Self-correct.
contaminate(v): to make something
dirty/ polluted.
- Read each word/phrase 3 times and
ask sts to repeat it.
- Leave sts 1 minute to self-practise
reading the words.
- Ask 4-5 sts to read all the
word/phrases aloud in front of the
class
20 - Listen and help sts to read the
words/phrases correctly. - Read the passages and do the task.
2. While you read: - Compare their results with their
Aims: Read the passage for parners.
information to do the tasks. - Present their answer:
+ Set the scene: 2. contain
- You are going to read the passages 3. species
about The National Parks. Read them 4. survival
and then do the tasks that follow. 5. sub-tropical
+ Task 1:Fill in each space with a 6. contamination
suitable from the passages. - Listen to the T and correct if
- Ask sts to read the passages and do necessary.
task 1.
- Explain more about the definitions if - Work in pairs to read the passages
necessary. again and to ask and answer.
- Sts are required to compare their - Underline the information from
results with their partners. the passages.
- 5sts are required to do the task orally - Share their answer with other sts.
in front of the class (1 st/ 1 time). - Some pairs report:
- Listen and help sts to do the task 1.200 square km:
correctly. 2. Because the rainy season is over.
3. They can learn about the habits
+ Task 2: Answering Questions: of animals and how one species is
- Ask sts to work in pairs to read the dependent upon another for
passages again and answer the survival.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
questions in task 2. 4. In the orphanage, orphaned and/
- Require sts to underline the or abandoned animals are taken
information from the passages that care of.
supports the answers. Everglades National Park is
- Required sts to compare their endangered because of the toxic
answers with another pair. levels of chemicals in the water
- Ask 6 - 7 sts to read their answers 5. If more chemicals are released
aloud in front of the class (1 st/1 into the water, plans and animals
time). will die/ be killed/ destroyed.

- Work in groups to talk about their


choice.

- Present his/her ideas.

- Others listen

10
- Listen and give remarks.

3. After you read:

Aims: to give the summary of the


passage.
- Sts are required to work in groups to
give reasons for their choice from one
of the three national parks in the
reading passages.
- One representative is required to
give their talk orally in front of the
class
3 - Listen and help the students to do
their task well.

4. Homework:
- Complete the talk in written form.
EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

..

Date: 12/01/2011 UNIT 11: NATIONAL PARKS


Period : 66 LESSON 2 : SPEAKING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know about an excursion to Huong Pagoda.
- Students can talk about an excursion and express their regrets.

. Skills: - Matching sentences in column A with the coresponding consequences


in column B.
- Talking about an excursion.
- Expressing the regrets.

III. Teaching aids:


Textbook, chalk, board.
IV. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm-up:
3 - Ask sts the questions: - Some sts answer:
- Have you have ever had a camping Yes, ew have.
trip? We prepared food, drinks, tents,
- Tell me what you prepared for that cameras ..
trip?
- Ask one or two sts. to answer.
2. Before you speak:
12 Aims:tofocus sts. on the topic and
introduce the words and phrases used in
the task.
+ Task 1: Matching
Last week Ngas class went on an
excursion to Huong Pagoda. - Listen to the T.
Unfortunately, the excursion turned out
to be a disaster. Most of the things they
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
did went wrong. You are required to
match the thing in column A with the - Read the sentences and find some
coresponding consequences in column B new words.
.
- Ask sts to read through the sentences in
the two columns. - Listen and copy down these
- Give sts some new words or
words into their notebooks.
expressions:
+ food poisoning: ng c
thc n
+ fine (n ): cash paid as - Read the new words.
punishment ( tin pht) - Work in pairs.
+ get lost: unable to find
way( lc ng )
+ carsick( adj ): feeling sick - Read the answers aloud.
because of a cars movement 1- f 2- e 3- h 4- g
( say t ) 5- b 6- c 7- a 8- d
- Ask sts to read the new words orally
and individualy.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to do the task.
- Go around to observe sts working.
- Check sts s answers by calling on
some sts to read out things in A and
some others to read out the
corresponding consequences in B.
14 - Listen and give remarks. - Listen to the T.
3. While you speak:
Aims: Sts can talk about their excursion
to Huong Pagoda and express their
regrets. - Read the examples and listen to
+ Task 2: the T.
Imagine that you are Ngas classmates
and you are not happy with the - Look at the example and tell the
excursion to Huong Pagoda. Now you whole class the form and the use:
are talking with some friends about +Form:
what you wish you had or hadnt done. If + S + past perfect, S + would/
- Before sts do the task, T asks sts to could +have + P II.
read the examples in the textbook and +Use: The third conditional is used
recall what grammatical structure is to talk unreal situations in the past.
used in the example.
- Work in groups.
- Revise the conditional sentence type 3
by giving an example: - Compare the answers with others.
+ Eg: If I had had money, I would have 2. If we had brought enough food
bought this car. ( But I didnt have and drinks we wouldnt have spent
money and so I didnt buy it.) a lot of money eating in expensive
- Ask sts to look at the example and tell restaurants.
the T the form as well as the form of the 3. If some of us hadnt had food
conditional sentence type 3. poisoning we could have enjoyed

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
our visit.
- Ask sts to work in groups. 4. If we had had rain coats, we
- Go around to help sts. wouldnt have got wet and have got
- Ask sts to compare their answers with a cold.
another group. 5. If some of us hadnt left our
- Call on some sts to speak out their luggage on the coach when we
answers in front of the class. arrived, we could have had clothes
and money with us.
6. If we had been careful when
walking in Huong Pagoda, we
wouldnt have got lost.
7. If we hadnt thrown wast in the
forest, we wouldnt have got a fine.
- Listen to sts and give remarks. 8. If we had stayed there more than
one day, we could have visited all
4. After you speak: the pagodas.
Aims: Sts practise telling about an
excursion to Huong Pagoda and - Listen to the T.
expressing the regrets.
+ Task 3:
15 You are Nga. You are going to work in
pairs. Tell your partner about your - Work in pairs.
classs excursion to Huong Pagoda and
express your regrets about what you did
or didnt do during the excursion.
- Ask sts to work in pairs using the third - Some sts tell about their
conditional to do the task. excursion in front of the class.
- Go around to observe, offering help
and collecting mistakes.
- Ask one or more sts to tell about their
excursion in front of the class and give
remarks.
5. Homework:( 1 min)
2 - Write down what they have discussed
in task 3.
EXPERIENCES:

Date: 13/01/2011 UNIT 11: NATIONAL PARKS


Period : 67 LESSON 3 : LISTENING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
10
10
10

I. Objectives: - Sts get:


- more information about Cuc Phuong National Park.
- Some set expressions
- Vocabulary on nature
II. Skill: - Listening: fill in the gaps, answer questions
- Speaking: - Discuss the special features of Cuc Phuong National Park.
III. Teaching aids:
- Tape, cassette, textbook, chalk, board.
IV. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities
1. Homework checking:
- Ask one st to tell the whole class
5 about his/her class excursion to - Listen to their friend and give
Huong Pagoda and express his/her remarks
regrets about what he/she did or did
not do during the excursion.
- Listen and give remarks

2. Before you listen:


Aims:to focus sts on the topic and
review/ introduce the words and
10 phrases used in the listening text. - Work in groups and discuss the
a. Divide sts into small groups and questions.
ask them to discuss the following
questions:
a. Where is Cuc Phuong
National Park?
b. What is the area of the
rainforest in Cuc Phuong National
Park? One st from each group stands up
c. When is the best time to visit and gives their answer..
Cuc Phuong National Park?
d. What can be seen in Cuc - Copy down the words and phrases
Phuong National Park? into their notebooks.
- Ask some sts to give their answer.
b. Introduce the topic of the listening
text.
- Introduce some new words/
expressions
- o'fficially (adv): formally
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- span (v): connect.
- 'fauna (n): all the animals of an
area.
- f'lora (v): all the plants of a - Listen and repeat.
particular area - Read the words in pairs and
- a'ttack(n): a violent attempt to correct each others mistakes.
hurt sb - Some individuals read the words
- de'feat(v): win sb aloud.
- in'vader: (n) The French and
Americans were invaders.
- 'ethnic mi'nority (n): The Tay,
Nung, Dao ..... - Listen to the T.
- Read the words again and asks sts to
repeat.
- Ask sts to read the words in pairs. - Read the statements in pairs and
try to guess the missing information.
- Ask some sts to read the words
again. - Listen to the tape and do the task
3. While you listen: - Compare their answer.
20 + Task 1: - Give their answer.
Aims: Practise listening and filling in 1. 1960
the gaps. 2. 160 km south west of
- Introduce sts that they are going to 3. 100,000 visitors
listen to the tape about Cuc Phuong 4. 2,000; 450
National Park and they have to fill in 5. Quen Voi
the gaps in each sentence given - Check their answer say it aloud,
- Ask sts to read the sentences in pairs and then correct their work if they
and make sure that they understand have the wrong answer.
them. Sts try to guess the missing
information.
- Play the tape twice and ask sts to fill
in the gaps.
- Ask sts to compare their answer in
pairs.

- Checks sts answer.

- Play the tape once again, stop the


tape where necessary and conduct the - Listen to the T.
correction.
- Read the questions in pairs and try
+ Task 2 to do the task.
Aims: Practise listening and - Listen to the tape and do the task.
Answering questions. - Compare their answer.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask sts to listen to the tape again and - Give their answer.
answer the given questions. 1. It covers 3 provinces: Ninh Binh,
- Ask sts to read the questions to see if Hoa Binh, and Thanh Hoa.
they understand them. 2. It is about 160 km.
- Play the tape once and ask sts note 3. They come to see the work being
down the neccessary information. done to protect endanger species.
- Ask sts to compare their answer in 4. Nguyen Hue defeated the Qing
pairs. invaders in the spring of 1789
- Check sts answer. 5. They live mainly on bee keeping
- Play the tape once again, stop the and farming.
tape where necessary and conduct the - Check their answer say it aloud,
correction. and then correct their work if they
4. After you listen: have the wrong answer.
8 - Ask sts to work in groups and use
the information in Task 1 and 2 and -Work in groups to discuss.
the reading text to disscus the
following problems:
- Time founded
- Area, location
- Numbers of visitors
- Historical event
- Local people.
-Move round to check the activities
and to make sure that sts are working
effectively. - One/ two sts present.
- Ask one or two sts to present in front
of the whole class.
- Check and give remarks.
5. Homework:
1 Write a short paragraph about Cuc
Phuong National Park

EXPERIENCES:

Date: 14/01/2011 UNIT 11: NATIONAL PARKS


Period : 68 LESSON 4 : WRITING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students can write a letter of acceptance or refusal.
II. Skill:
- Writing: write a letter of acceptance or refusal.
III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk.
IV. Procedures:
T Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking :
5 - Ask one st to talk about the special
features of Cuc Phuong National
Park. - Listen to their friend and give remarks.
- Ask other sts to listen to their friend
and give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.
- Check and give remarks.
2. Before you write:
- Aims: to get sts to read the
15 expressions in the table and to do - Listen to the teacher carefully.
task 1 and task 2.
+ Task 1:
- Introduce the topic of the lesson: - Copy down the words into theit
Write a letter of acceptance or notebooks.
refusal.
- Introduce some new words:
+ a'cceptance (n): the noun of
"accept" - Do the task in pairs.
+re'fusal (n) : the noun of " refuse" - Share their answer with their friends.
+ dec'line (v) : refuse sth offered - Present their ideas.
( politely) 1. Accepting: Yes, I'd like/love to.
- Ask sts to listen and repeat and then 2. Refusing: I'm afraid I can't come
copy down these words into their because
notebooks. 3. Accepting: I'd be delighted to.
- Ask sts to read the expressions in - Listen to the teacher.
the table in 2 minutes .
- Remind sts of three invitation
letters that they have already read in
Unit 10 and ask them to work in
pairs to complete three reply letters
by using the expressions in the table.
- Ask sts to do in 3 minutes and
move around to help if necessary.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Get feedback and give remarks.
+ Task 2: - Listen to the teacher.
- Remind sts of the letter Nam wrote
to Lam to invite Lam to spend a - Work in pairs to rearrange the sentences
weekend with him. And now Lam into a letter.
write a letter accepting Nam's - Present their ideas:
invitation. 1.d 2. e 3. c
- Ask sts to work in pairs to 4. a 5. f 6. b
rearrange the sentences into a letter. - Listen to the teacher.
- Move round to help if necessary.
- Get feedback and give remarks. - Read the requirement.
3. While you write:
- Aims: Sts practise writing a letter
of acceptance or refusal. - Listen to the teacher.
- Ask sts to read the requirement of
15 task 3. - Do the writing task.
- Ask them to write a letter accepting
or declining his/her friend's
invitation.
- Ask them to pay attention to the
structure of a letter: greeting,
organisation ( introduction, body...)
- Suggest that they use letters in task
1 and task 2 as sample letters.
- Let sts write in 13 minutes.
- Move around to conduct the
activity. - Read their writing: ( a sample
4. After you write: paragraph)
Aims: to get feedback and check sts' "Dear Binh,
8 work. It's lovely to hear that you are going for
- Get feedback by asking some sts to a picnic to Cuc Phuong National Park
read their work aloud. next weekend. Thank you for inviting me
- Ask some other sts to give remarks. to join you but I'm afraid I can't come.
- Check and give the correct answer. My English friend, Maria, is coming to
- If there is enough time, T can have Vietnam next weekend and I have
sts exchange their writing among sts promised to cook her some of our
within a group so that they can check traditional dishes on Saturday morning.
their friend's work and give remarks After that, I'm going to take her to some
famous places in Hai Duong.
I hope that you will have a wonderful
day in Cuc Phuong. Remember to show
me the photos you take in Cuc Phuong
whem you get home.
5. Homework: Your friend,
- Part D (page 68- workbook).
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

EXPERIENCES:

Date: 15/01/2011 UNIT 11: NATIONAL PARKS


Period : 69 LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know how to pronounce the sound /t/ and /d/ correctly.
- Students revise conditional sentence type 3.
II. language focus:
1 . Grammar: -Conditional sentence: type .
2. Vocabulary:- Vocabulary concerning natural environment and conservation.

III. Skill: - Pronunciation: /t/ and/d/ .


- Conditional sentence type 3.
IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
V. Procedures:
T Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking:
5 - Ask one st to read the letter they - One st reads his/her letter aloud
wrote at home aloud. aloud in front of the whole class.
- Ask another st to give remarks. - Give remarks.
- Check and give a mark. - Listen to the teacher.
2. Pronunciation:( 10 mins)
- Aims: to introduce two sounds /t/ and
/d / and help sts to practise these
sounds.
10 a. Write two sounds on the board and - Write down two sounds.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
pronounce them clearly twice, then ask - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
sts to repeat. - Look at the book , listen and repeat.
- Tell sts how to pronounce these /t/ /d/
sounds accurately. topic difficulty
/ d / : a voiced sound contain invader
/ t / : a voiceless sound plant spend
- Ask them to look at the textbook, ...........................
listen and repeat. - Read these words in pairs and check
for their partners.
- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read
the words again so that they can check
for each other. - Look at the book and work in pairs.
- Move around to help . - Answers:
- Ask two sts to read again and give /t/ /d/
remarks. next to third
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page restaurant dear
119 in the book. counter stayed
- Ask them to work in pairs to read the ...............................
sentences and then find out the words - Read the sentences.
containing sound / t / and sound / d / .
- Ask them to work in 2 minutes.
- Move around to conduct the activity.
- Ask one st to report and other sts to
give remarks.
- Check and give the correct answers. - Listen to the teacher
- Ask some sts to read these sentences - Read the example and tell the whole
aloud. class their ideas.
- Listen and give remarks. + Form:
3. Grammar: If - clause , main
Aims: to revise conditional sentence clause
29 type 3 and have sts do Ex1 and EX2. If + S + V( past perfect), S + would
+ Conditional sentence type 3: +have
- Recall conditional sentence type 1 + V(
and type 2. PII)
- Revise conditional sentence type 3 by + Use:
giving an example. - to talk about something that might
eg: Tom didn't study hard so he fail the have happened in the past but didn't.
exam. - Listen to the teacher and take note.
=> I can say: " If Tom had studied
hard, he would have passed the exam."
- Ask sts to tell the T the form and the - Give examples.
use of conditional sentence type 3.
Note:
- We can use could/might/should - Some sts report.
instead of would in main clause. 1. had known 2. had had
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- We can also use the past perfect 3. would have gone 4. would have
continuous in If - clause. passed
- Ask sts to give some examples. 5. could have enjoyed 6. had known
+ Exercise 1: 7. had stopped 8. had called
- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the - Listen and correct their work if
task. necessary.
- Ask sts to do the exercise individually
and then compare their answers in - Do the Ex individually.
pairs. EX 2: Each st writes three sentences
- Move round to conduct the activity. 1. .... hadn't stopped so suddenly, the
- Check the exercise sentence by accidents wouldn't have happened.
sentence. 2. .... that Lam had to get up early, I
- Listen and give remarks. would have woken him up.
3. ... lent me the money, I would have
+ Exercise 2: been able to buy the car.
- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and 4. ... been wearing a seat belt, she
then share the answers with their would have been injured.
friends. 5. ..... had braekfast, you wouldn't
- Move round to help if necessary. behungry now.
- Ask two sts to write the sentences on 6. ... had some money on me, I would
the board. have got a taxi.
- Listen to the teacher.

- Ask two sts to give remarks.


- Check and give remarks.

5. Homework
1 - EX 3 ( page 120 - st's book)

EXPERIENCES:

Date: 16/01/2011 TEST YOURSELF D


Period: 70

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Sts revise what they have learned in unit 9, unit 10 and unit 11.
* Knowledge: - General knowledge in unit 9, unit 10 and unit 11.
- Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units.
II. Skills: listening, speaking and writing.
III. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board.
IV. Procedures:
Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking:
- Ask one st to do Ex 3 in the EX 3:
workbook on the board. 1. If I had been working at the restaurant last
- Ask one st to give remarks. night, I would have waited on your table.
- Give remarks and marks. 2. If they had been paying attention, they would
have seen the sign markin. .
3. If Carol hadn't been studying, she would have
answered the phone.
4. If the sun hadn't been shining, we wouldn't
have gone to the beach yesterday.
5. If the music hadn't been playing loudly at the
restaurant, I would have heard ...
2. The new lesson: - One st gives remarks.
- Ask sts to do part II, part III and
part IV at home in advance to - Look at the textbook and read the statements.
save time. - Try to focus on the important words.
- Give sts the time duration for - Copy down these words into their notebooks.
each part : part II: 10 minutes, part - Listen and read after the teacher.
III: 10 minutes, part IV: 15
minutes.
- Ask sts to do listening in class.
2.1. Listening:
- Ask sts to read the requirement of - Listen carefully and do the task.
the task. - Work in pairs to discuss their answers.
- Introduce new words: 1. they go to a national park to enjoy the nature.
+ campground (n) : a place for 2. It became a national park in 1872.
camping 3. No, it isn't. It's the world's largest park.
+ trail (n) : a path 4. It has about 70 geysers.
+ geyser (n): mch nc 5. They mustn't pick the flowers, feed or hunt the
phun animals.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Play the tape twice and ask sts to
do the task.
- Ask sts to share their ideas with
their partners.
- Get feedback and play the tape - work in groups to share their ideas.
again so that sts can check their - Some sts stand up to report.
answers. 1. a. junk and litter c. highway
- Ask other sts to give remarks. b. landscape d. healthy.
2. a. T b. T c. F
- Check and give feedback. d. F e. T f. T .
2.2. Reading:
- Ask sts to work in groups to - Discuss in groups.
compare their answers. - Answers:
- Ask some sts to report his/ her a. 1. has been cleaned......2. have been turned
answers aloud. on..........3. are waiting
- Listen and check. b. 1. knew ......2. would help.....3. knows
2.3. Grammar: c. 1. decided ....2. to stay......3. would have gone
- Ask sts to discuss their answers out ......4. hadn't been
in groups.
- Ask 2 sts to write their answers - Read their writing aloud
on the board. " Dear Alex,
You will be delighted to know Father is giving a
- Ask two other sts to give party to celebrate the New Year. He has invited
remarks. some of our relatives and his friends to make the
- Check and give the correct party a success.
answers. I too have invited a number of my friends in the
2.4. Writing: neighbourhood. Mother has asked me to tell you
- Ask some sts to read their to come home for the New Year celebration.
writing aloud. I'm sure you will be here in time to share the fun
with us on that day.
-Ask some sts to give remarks. Your sister,
Helen
- Listen to the teacher's remarks.
3. Homework:
- Part B ( Page 65 - workbook)

EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Forty five minute test 3
Name:..
Class: 10
Mark Teachers comments

I. Pronounciation: Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced


different others:
1. a. hair b. fail c. chair d. air-conditioner
2. a. change b. chemistry c. children d. choose
3. a. feature b. take c. content d. tableland
4. a. here b. atmosphere c. bear d. clear
5. a. mouse b. close c.show d.know

II. Vocabulary and Grammar:


A. Choose the correct answer to complete sentences by circling A,B,C or D.
1.Whales and dolphin areThey eat meat and fishes.
A. carnivores B. krills C.mammals D.animals
2.We should find out the way to save the..species from hunting pressure.
A. danger B. endangered C.dangerous D.endanger
3.Plants and forests help .water and prevent flood or erosion.
A.run-off B.flow off C.conserve D. pollute
4.The goverments should.some laws to protect oceans.
A.giving B.to give C.given D.give
5.The robbers.two days after they had robbed the bank.
A.arrested B. were arrested C. are arrested D.were being arrested
6.If we continue destroying the animals natural.many spiecies will be
disappeared forever.
A.habitat B. habit C.habitual D.habition
7.Vietnam is a..country which has a various flora and fauna.
A.tropical B.temperate sub-tropical D.hot and dry
8.Many trees.since Tree Planting Festival.
A. have been grown C. has been grown
B.are grown D. will be grown
9.I am sure that the letter..tomorrow.
A. will send B. is being sent C. will be sent D.was sent
10. there are many trees can be used as medicine to save people in..in Cuc
Phuong National Park.
A. fauna B. animals C.flora water
B. Complete the following sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets.
1. If she (come) ..................... late again, she will lose her job.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
2. If we had enough money, we (go) .......................... to the concert.
3. Michael will phone you if he (have)........................ time.
4. If we lived in a town, life (be) ..................... easier.
5. I know I would have felt better if I (stop)......................... smoking.

III. Reading: Read the passage and decide whether statements are True or False:

What is a rain forest?


A rain forest is a place where there is lots of rain. One kind of rain forest is called
a temperate rain forest. You can find temperate rain forests where the weather is cool
and mild, and very wet. There is a temperate rain forest growing near the Northwest
coast of the United States. Just few kinds of evergreen trees grow there.
Most of the world's rain forests are tropical rain forests with many kinds of trees.
Tropical rain forests grow in warm places near Earth's equator. The equator is an
imaginary line that goes around the middle of the planet. There are tropical rain
forests in Central and South America, Africa, and Asia. The world's largest rain forest
is the Amazon rain forest in South America. It's always hot and wet in a tropical rain
forest.
T F
1. A rain forest is a place where it rains a lot.
2. A temperate rain forest is a place where it is cool and dry
3. Most of the world's rain forest are temperate rain forests.
4. Tropical rain forests are located in Central and South America,
Africa, and Asia.
5. No tropical rain forests in the world are larger than the Amazon rain
forest in South America.
IV. Writing:
A friend invited you to go for a picnic to Hi Lim in Bc Ninh next weekend
because he/she know you like listening Quan h songs very much.Write a letter for
accepting/refusing him/her.
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

ANSWERS
I-Pronunciation:
1.B 2.B 3.A 4.C 5.A

II.Language Focus:
A.
1.A 2.B 3.C 4.D 5.B
6.A 7.C 8.A 9. C 10.C
B. 1.comes 2. would go 3. has
4. would be
5.had stopped

III-Reading:
1.T
2.F
3.F
4.T
5.T

IV-Writing:
..................................................................................................

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 18/01/11 UNIT 12: MUSIC


Period : 73 LESSON 1 : READING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives: By the end of the leson:


- Students know more about the role of music in our life.
II. Language focus:
1. Grammar: - To-infinitive
- Wh-questions
2. Vocabulary: - Vocabulary concerning musicand theatre,films and
cinema:compose, rock 'n 'roll, mournful, solemn......
III. Skill: - Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through sentence
completing and answering questions.
IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk, tape.
V. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm-up
5 - Play the tape with 5 pieces of music and
ask sts to guess what types of music they - Listen to the tape and guess.
are. - Stand up and say aloud the names
- Get feedback and check. of the types of music.
.........
2. Before you read:
Aims: To provide sts with words/phrases
about music.
12 a. Matching: - Work in pairs to match.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to match the
descriptions to the types of music given - Give answers orally.
in the part: 1- b 2- e 3- d 4- a 5-
- For each type of music, 2 sts from 2 c
pairs are required to give their match - Others listen
orally.
- Listen and help sts to give correct - Listen and read after the T.
match. b.Vocabulary.
- Provide sts with the new words/phrases:
+ Emotion(n): a strong feeling e.g.: hate, - Write down these words into their
love....... notebooks.
+ Convey(v):= Show, express
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
+ Integral part(n): = necessary part
+ Lull sb (v): >< wake somebody up.
+ Delight(v): To make somebody happy.
+ Funeral(n): a funaral is celebrated
when someone dies. - Listen and repeat.
+ Solemn(adj): serious, not happy
+ Mournful(adj): sad - Read these words and check for
- Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask their partner.
sts to repeat it. - Read the words aloud.
- Leave sts 1 minute to self-practice. - Listen to the T.
- Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases
aloud in front of the class( 1 st/ 1 time)
- Listen and help sts to read the
words/phrases correctly.
3. While you read:
Aims: Read for information to do the
sentence completing, and answering - Work individually.
20 excercises - Report their answers sentence by
+ Task 1: Sentence completing. sentence.
- Ask sts to read the passage indepently 1. Communicate 2. Lull
then use the words/ phrases in the box to 3. delights 4. integral part
complete the sentences. 5. solemn 6. emotion
- Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help 7. mournful
and encourage them try to guess the - Listen to the T
meanings of the words in the context of
the reading.
- Call on 7-8 sts to read and explain their - Students do the work in pairs
answers aloud in front of the class(1 st/ 1 - Some pairs report their answers
time/ 1 sentence). while others watch.
- Feedback and give remarks. 1. Language and music.
2. It can express ideas, thoughts and
+ Task 2: Questions answering. feelings.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to read the 3. It adds joyfulness to the
passage more carefully and find the atmosphere of a festival and make a
answers to the questions given. funeral more solemn and mournful.
- Ask sts to highlight or underline the 4. It makes people happy and
information in the passage that helps excited. It delights the senses.
them to find the correct answers. 5. It is a billion-dollar industry.
- 5-6 sts from 5-6 groups are required to - Self-correct the work
give answers in front of the class(1 st/ 1
time/ 1answer).
- Listen and help the students to give
correct answers.
4. After you read:
8 + Questions Answers - Work in pairs orally.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Aims: Students' summary about the roles - Some pairs report while others
of music. listen.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to give answers 1. Students tell 5 roles.
to the questions given in the part. 2. Students give their own ideas.
- Go round to help sts with their work.
- 2-3 pairs are required to give answers to
one question orally in front of the class.
- Listen and help sts to give correct
answers.
5. Homework:
1 - Write about the roles of music and - Listen to the T.
which role is the most important.

EXPERIENCES:

Date: 19/01/11 UNIT 12: MUSIC


Period : 74 LESSON 2 : SPEAKING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson, students know about some favourite kind of music.

II. Skill: Speaking:


- Asking and answering questions about music.
- Talking about favourite kinds of music
III. Teaching aids:
Textbook, chalk, board, pictures.
IV. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

1. Warm- up:
5 Aims : get used to the topic. - Look at the pitures and give the
- Give sts some pictures of singers and ask names of some foreign singers.
sts about their names. - Talk about these singers.
- Ask sts what they know about these
singers and name some of their songs.
2. Before you speak:
10 Aims: : focus sts on the topic and
introduce the words and phrases used in the
task.
+ Task 1: Answering questions based on the - Listen to the T.
reading text.
- Introduce the situation: You are going to - Take notes
read what Ha Anh says about music.
- Give sts some new words: - Listen and read the text .
+ keep sb happy: make sb happy - Work in pairs to ask and answer
+ cheer sb up: make sb happier/more the questions.
cheerful - Some sts present.
- Ask one st to read the passage aloud. 1. She likes pop music.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and answer 2. Because it keeps her happy.
the questions. 3. The Backstreet Boys.
- Go around to observe sts working. 4. She listens to music all the
- Ask some sts to present their answers in time
front of the class.
- Get feedback and give correct answers:
3.While you speak:
13 Aims: Sts can talk about their favourite - Listen to the T.
kind of music.
+ Task 2: Asking and answering about - Listen to the T and read the
music taste. information in the table.
- Tell sts that they are going to ask your - Think of the questions and say
partners questions to get information to aloud:
complete the table below. + What kind of music do you like?
- Ask sts to look at the first column of the + Why do you like it?
table which includes 5 items they should + Who is your favourite singer/
ask their friend about. musician?
- Ask sts what questions they can ask if they + What is your favourite
want to know about their friends favourite song/piece of music?
kind of music , reasons for listening to + When do you listen to music?
music, favourite band.
- Listen and take notes.

- T. may introduce some adj. and - Work in groups of 3: one will be


expressions to talk about music: a journalist and others will be
+ make sb excited/relaxed. students in the class.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
+ help sb forget troubles and worries
+ relaxing/ peaceful......
- Ask sts to form groups of 3. One of them
will be a journalist who will interview their
friends about their music taste. The
journalist has to ask two sts some questions - Listen to the T.
and complete the table. Sts can change their
roles if time permits. - Listen to the T and take notes if
- Go around to help sts and collect the necessary.
mistakes.
15 4. After you speak: (15 mins)
Aims: Sts make group report.
+ Task 3: Reporting on the information
- Ask sts to report what they have got from - Some sts report in front of the
their friends to the whole class. class.
- Before sts report T asks sts to look at the E.g: " Both Hoa and Binh like pop
example and elicits some structures they music. Hoa likes it because it
can use: makes her relaxed while Binh likes
+ Both A and B like .. it because it is easy to listen to.
+ A likes, and so does B. Hoa's favourite band is Westlife
+ A likes and B does , too. but Binh like Lam Truong very
+ A likes, but B prefers.. much. ............"
- Ask sts to prepare in one minute.
- Ask some sts to report what they have
found out about their patners in front of the
class.
- Correct the Ss mistakes.

2 5. Homework:
- Write a short paragraph about their
friends' music taste.

EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 20/01/11 UNIT 12: MUSIC


Period : 75 LESSON 3 : LISTENING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson:


- Sts know more about Van Cao and his music.
II. Skills: - Listening: choose True/ False statements and answer questions.
- Speaking: discuss the one's ideas about Van Cao's music.
III. Teaching aids:
- Tape, cassette player, textbook, chalk, board.
IV. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities
1. Home work checking:
7 - Ask one st to talk about what kind of One st presents. Others listen and
music he likes best. give remarks.
2. Before you listen:(12 mins)
12 Aims: focus sts on the topic and review/
introduce the words and phrases used in
the listening text. - Work in groups to say about the
a. - Focus sts on the picture in the person in the picture.
textbook and ask sts if they know the - Listen to the teacher and then
person in it. work in groups to discuss Van Cao's
- Introduce Van Cao, the most famous life and career.
musician in the history of Vietnamese
music then ask sts to work in groups and - Ask some pairs to ask and
ask about Van Cao's life and works. answer.
- Possible questions:
- Where and when was he born?
- Was he born in a rich or poor
family?
- When did he start writing songs? Some sts stand up and give their
- Can you name some of his famous answer.
songs? What is his most famous one? - Sui m - Tin
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask sts to give their answer to the qun ca
question in p. 128. - Lng ti - Trng ca
Sng L
b. Introduce some new words
- rousing (adj): ho hng si - Copy down the words and
ni phrases into their notebooks.
- lyrical(adj): tr tnh
- solemn(adj): trang nghim - Listen and repeat.
- national anthem(n): E.g.: - Read the words in pairs and
Tin Qun Ca correct each others mistakes.
- Read the words and ask sts to repeat. - Some individuals read the words
- Ask sts to read the words in pairs. aloud
- Ask some sts to read the words again.
17 3. While you listen:
+ Task 1:
Aims: Practise listening and marking
True/ False statements.
- Tell sts that they are going to listen to a - Listen to the T.
conversation between Lan Huong and - Work in pairs to guess if the
Quang Hung about Quang Hung's statements are true or false.
opinion towards Van Cao's music. - Listen to the tape and do the task
- Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the - Compare their answer.
statements given and guess if they are - Give their answer.
true or false. 1. F The guess is Quang Hung.
- Ask sts to listen to the talk and tick the 2.F He likes some Vietnamese
right column to indicate their answer musicians
and underline the false information. T 3. T
plays the tape twice. 4. F It was written in 1944.
- Ask sts to compare their answer in 5. F ( He always ..... )
pairs. - Check their answer, and then
correct their work if they have the
wrong answer.
- Check sts answer.
- Play the tape once again, stop the tape
where necessary and conduct the
correction.

+ Task 2:
Aims: Practise listening for specific - Work in pairs to read the
information by answering given questions.
questions. - Listen and do the task.
- Ask sts to read the questions in pairs - Compare their notes.
and make sure they understand the 1. It is 'My favourite Musician'.
questions and know what information 2. He likes the song 'Tien Quan
they need to answer the questions. Ca' most.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask sts to listen to the tape once/twice 3. Because it is hard and solemn,
and take short notes to answer the it makes him feel great and proud
questions. of his country.
- Ask sts to compare their answer in - Check their answer, and then
pairs. correct their work if they have the
- Play the tape once again, stop the tape wrong answer.
where necessary and conduct the
correction.

8 4. After you listen:


- Ask sts to work in pairs and discuss
Quang Hung's ideas about Van Cao's
music.
T may introduce some sentences to
show one's opinion:
+ Agreeing: - Work in pairs revising Quang
- I (strongly) agree with him. Hung's ideas about Van Cao's
- I share his opinion. music.
- I share the same point of view with
him.
- I think his opinion is similar to
mine.
+ Disagreeing:
- I'm sorry but I don't think so.
- I don't agree with him.
- I don't share his point of view. Two sts present.
- Move round to check the activities and
to make sure that sts are working
effectively.
- Ask some pairs to present in front of
the whole class.
- Check and give remarks.
1 5. Homework:
Write a short paragraph about your
opinion about Van Cao's Music

EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 21/01/10 UNIT 12: MUSIC


Period : 76 LESSON 4 : WRITING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students can write a profile.
II. Skills: - Reading: read the information about Van Cao.
- Writing: make up complete sentences about Scott Joplin, using the
prompts and write about the life story of Van Cao.
III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk.
IV. Procedures:
T Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking :
5 - Ask one st to talk about his/her opinion - Listen to their friend and give
about Quang Hung's ideas about Van remarks.
Cao's music.
- Ask other sts to listen to their friend - Listen to the teacher.
and give remarks.
- Check and give remarks.
2. Before you write:
- Aims: to get sts to recognise what a
profile is like and to read the
20 information about Van Cao.
+ Task 1: - Listen to the teacher carefully.
- Introduce the topic of the lesson:
Writing a profile.
- Introduce some new words:
+ 'profile (n): a report of a
person ( usu. in a newspaper
article) - Copy down the words into theit
+'mixture (n) : s ho quyn notebooks.
+tune (n): giai iu
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
+ Ragtime (v) : a kind of music which is
a mixture of classical European and
African beats. - Listen and repeat.
+ rag (n): a Ragtime song - Some sts stand up and read again.
+ beat (n): nhp
+ 'talent (n): a natural skill/ ability.
+ 'talented (a): having talent - Read the prompts and do the task
+ app'reciate (v): recognise sb's good in pairs.
qualities. - Write down the sentences into
- Ask sts to listen and repeat and then their notebooks.
copy down these words into their - Share their answer with their
notebooks. friends.
- Ask some sts to read these words - Present their ideas.
again. 1. He learned to play music when
- Ask sts to read the prompts in task 1 he was very young.
and to make up complete sentences 2. Scott learned to play the works
about Scott Joplin by adding suitable of composers like Bach, Beethoven,
auxiliaries, articles or prepositions and and Mozart as well as to compose
appropriate verb tenses. music.
- Allow sts to work in pairs first to make 3. He quickly became famous.
up sentences orally and the write them 4. His tune were wonderful mixture
down into their notebooks. of classical European and African
- Move around to help if necessary. beats which were known as
- Ask sts to compare their answer with Ragtime.
other sts. 5. All in all, he wrote 50 piano rags,
and was called the King of Ragtime.
6. Scott Joplin died in 1917.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Answer T's questions:
1. We use the past simple.
2. the date of birth/death, the place
- Get feedback and give remarks. of birth, family, career, personal
life.
- Focus sts on some points about writing
a profile by asking some questions: - Listen to the teacher.
1. Which tense do you use?
2. What kind of information is included - Work in pairs to discuss.
in a profile?

+ Task 2:
- Ask sts to read the information about
Van Cao and to work in pairs to discuss
how to write a profile about him. - Do the writing task.
- Ask them to refer to their writing in
task 1 as a sample.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
3. While you write:
- Aims: Sts practise writing about a life
12 story of Van Cao.
- Ask sts to write down what they have
discussed into their notebooks. - Read their writing: ( a sample
- Let sts write in 10 minutes. paragraph)
- Move around to conduct the activity. " Van Cao was born on the fifteenth
7 4. After you write: of November, 1923 in Nam Dinh.
Aims: to get feedback and check sts' His parents were poor workers.
work. However, he started composing
- Get feedback by asking some sts to music when he was very young. His
read their work aloud. first song was written in 1939 and it
- Ask some other sts to give remarks. quickly became famous. The song "
- Check and give the correct answer. Tien Quan Ca", which is the
- If there is enough time, T can have sts national anthem of Vietnam, was
exchange their writing among sts within written in 1944. Van Cao was also
a group so that they can check their very good at other artistic works
friend's work and give remarks. like song writing, poem writing and
paintings. He died on the tenth of
July,1995. He was known as a very
talented musician and highly
appreciated by the Vietnamese
people.
1
5. Homework:
- Part D (page 73 - workbook).

EXPERIENCES:

Date: 22/01/11 UNIT 12: MUSIC


Period : 77 LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
I. Objectives:
- Students know how to pronounce the sound /s/ and /z/ correctly.
- Students revise to-infinitive and Wh-questions.
II. Language focus:
+ Language: - Pronunciation: /s/ and/z/ .
- To-infinitive and Wh-questions.
III. Skills: + Speaking: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises.
+ Reading: - Read words and sentences aloud.
- Read the sentences silently to do the exercises.
IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
V. Procedures:
T Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking:
5 - Ask one st to read the passage they - One st reads his/her writing aloud in
wrote about Eric Clapton's life aloud. front of the whole class.
- Ask another st to give remarks. - Give remarks.
- Check and give a mark. - Listen to the teacher.
2. Pronunciation:
- Aims: to introduce two sounds /s/ and
10 /z / and help sts to practise these
sounds.
a. Write two sounds on the board and - Write down two sounds.
pronounce them clearly twice, then ask - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
sts to repeat. - Look at the book , listen and repeat.
- Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds /s/ /z/
accurately. Sue zoo
/ z / : a voiced sound sip zip
/ s / : a voiceless sound piece peas
- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen ...........................
and repeat. - Read these words in pairs and check
for their partners.
- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read
the words again so that they can check
for each other.
- Move around to help . - Look at the book and work in pairs.
- Ask two sts to read again and give - Answers:
remarks. /s/ /z/
Susan music
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page classical jazz
130 in the book. sound records
- Ask them to work in pairs to read the ...............................
sentences and then find out the words - Read the sentences.
containing sound /s / and sound /z / .
- Ask them to work in 2 minutes.
- Move around to conduct the activity.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask one st to report and other sts to
give remarks.
- Check and give the correct answers. - Listen to the teacher
- Ask some sts to read these sentences
aloud. - Read the example and tell the whole
- Listen and give remarks. class their ideas.
28 3. Grammar: + Use:
Aims: to revise to-infinitive and Wh- - to show purpose.
questions and have sts do Ex1,EX2 and
EX3. - Listen to the teacher and take note.
a. to-infinitive:
- Recall the use of to-infinitive by giving
an example:
e.g.: A: What did you buy this cassette - Give examples.
player for?
B: I bought this cassette player to
study English. - Some pairs report.
e.g.: To keep fit, you have to do morning 1. I phoned her to tell her good news.
exercises every day. 2. I'm saving money to buy a cassette
- Ask sts to tell the T the use of to- player
infinitive in these sentences. 3. She practise singing all day to win
Note: the singing contest.
- We can put to-infinitive at the ...................................
beginning or at the end of the sentence. - Listen and correct their work if
- We can also use in order to or so as to necessary.
to show purpose.
- Ask sts to give some examples. - Do the Ex individually.
+ Exercise 1: EX 2: Each st writes three sentences
- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the 1. to read 2. to buy
task. 3. to send 4. to invite
- Ask sts to do the exercise in pairs and 5. to learn
then compare their answers with other - Listen to the teacher.
pairs.
- Move round to conduct the activity. - One st answers:
- Ask some pairs to report. Who, where, when, what, which .....

- Listen and give remarks. - Listen to the T and take note.


+ Exercise 2:
- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and
then share the answers with their
friends.
- Move round to help if necessary. - Two sts write their answers on the
- Ask some sts to report. board:
- Check and give remarks. 1. What will you do if it rains?
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
2. What sort of music does your
b. Wh-questions: father enjoy listening to?
- Ask one st to name some question 3. When did he leave for Ho Chi
words they have already known. Minh City?
+ Note: 4. Who wants to talk to you?
- The question element generally comes ............................
first in the sentence.
- There is no S - operator inversion in
the Wh - question asking about the S.
e.g.: Who gave you that present?
+ Exercise 3:
- Ask sts to do Ex 3 individually and
then share the answers with their
friends.
- Move round to help if necessary.
- Ask two sts to write their answers on
the board.

1 - Check and give remarks.


5. Homework
- Part B( page 71 - workbook)

EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 23/01/11 UNIT 13: FILMS AND CINEMA


Period : 78 LESSON 1 : READING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know more about the history of films.
II. Language focus:
a. General knowledge: - Knowledge about films and cinema.
b. Language: - The past simple tense.
- Vocabulary concerning music: scene, camera, character......
III. Skills: - Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups.
- Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through finding the
word meanings in contexts, answering questions and identifying the main idea.
IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk, some pictures.
V. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm-up:
5 - Show sts some pictures of famous
film stars or scenes in famous films in - Look at the T's pictures .
Vietnam amd in the world. - Stand up and say aloud the names of
- Ask sts to say the names of these the films and film stars.
films and film stars. .........
- Get feedback and check.
2. Before you read:
Aims: To introduce the topic and - Work in pairs to ask and answer.
provide sts with words/phrases about - Give answers orally.
12 films and cinema. 1. I want to see a film on T.V because it
a. Answering questions: is cheap and I may feel more
- Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and comfortable.
answer the questions in Before you - I want to see a film at the cinema
read. because I can see the latest film there.
- Go round to help if necessary. ...................................
- Ask some sts to give answers. - Others listen

- Listen and read after the T.


Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

- Listen and check. Sts may give


different answers. b.Vocabulary. - Write down these words into their
- Provide sts with the new notebooks.
words/phrases:
+ 'sequence (n):chui
+ motion (n): s vn ng
+ movement (n):s chuyn - Listen and repeat.
ng
+ 'decade (n): 10 years - Read these words and check for their
+ au'dience (n):khn gi partner.
+ spread (v): lan rng - Read the words aloud.
- Read each word/phrase 3 times and - Listen to the T.
ask sts to repeat it.
- Leave sts 1 minute to self-practice.
- Ask 4-5 sts to read all the
word/phrases aloud in front of the
class( 1 st/ 1 time)
- Listen and help sts to read the
words/phrases correctly. - Work individually.
3. While you read:
Aims: Read for information to find the
18 word meaning in contexts, to answer - Report their answers one by one.
the questions and to find the best title 1. cinema 2. sequence
for the passage. 3. a decade 4. rapidly
+ Task 1: Finding the words in the 5. scene 6. character
passage - Listen to the T
- Ask sts to read the passage indepently
then read the definition given in task 1 - Students do the work in pairs
and scan the passage to find the - Some pairs report their answers while
suitable words. others watch.
- Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help 1. It began in the early 19th century.
and encourage them try to guess the 2. They dicovered that when a
meanings of the words in contexts of sequence of still pictures were set in
the reading. motion ..............
- Ask sts to share their answers with 3. No, they didn't.
their partners. 4. Audiences were able to see long
- Call on 6 sts to read their answers films in the early 1910s.
aloud in front of the class. .................................
- Get feedback and give remarks. - Self-correct the work
+ Task 2: Answering questions.
- Ask sts to work in pairs to read the - Read the passage again and choose
passage more carefully and find the the best title.
answers to the questions given. Answer: B ( A brief history only)
- Ask sts to highlight or underline the - Listen to their friends and the T.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
information in the passage that helps
them to find the correct answers.
- Move round to help is necessary.
- 6 pairs are required to give answers in
front of the class.
- Listen and help the students to give
correct answers. - Work in groups orally.
+ Task 3:
- Ask sts to read the passage again
individually and choose the best title - Some sts report.
for the passage.
- Ask one or two sts to give answer and
to explain why they choose A, B or C.
- Listen and check.
9 4. After you read:( 9 mins)
Aims: Students' summary about the - Listen to the T.
history of cinema.
- Ask sts to look at the cues given and
work in groups to talk about the history
of cinema basing on the cues.
- Go round to help sts with their work.
- Some presentatives of the groups are
required to report in front of the class.
- Listen and help sts to give correct
1 answers.
5. Homework:
- Write a summary of the reading text
basing on what they have discussed in
After read.

EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 24/02/11 UNIT 13: FILMS AND CINEMA


Period : 79 LESSON 2 : SPEAKING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know about some kinds of film.
II. Knowledge:
a. General knowledge: - Students can talk about some favourite kinds of
music.
b. Language: - The simple present tense.
- Vocabulary to describe films.
III. Skills: - Asking and answering questions about film.
- Talking about favourite kinds of music.
- Expressing attitudes, preferences
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook, chalk, board, pictures.
V. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm- up:
5 Aims : to get used to the topic.
- Give sts some film posters on the - Look at the posters and match the
board: film with the correct types.
+ Names of the films:
Shrek (1)
The adventures of Sherlock Holmes.
(2) - Some sts give the answers.
The Lord of the Rings (3) + Key:
Pearl Habour ( 4) 1- cartoon 2- detective film
- Ask sts to match the films with the 3- action film 4- war film
correct types of films .
- Listen and check.
2. Before you speak:
8 Aims: :to focus sts on the topic and to
introduce the words and phrases used in - Look at the table and tick .
the task. - Compare with their partners.
+ Task 1: - Some sts report:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask sts to study the table on p. 134 and S1: I like science fiction films very
tick the boxes that suit their preferences much.
for a particular type of films. S2: I don't like cartoons very much.
- Ask sts to compare their answers with S3: I don't like horror films at all.
a partner. ......................
- Call on some sts to report their likes
and dislikes.
- Listen and give remarks.
3.While you speak: - Listen and take notes
Aims: Sts can talk about their favourite
20 type of films..
+ Task 2: Find out what your friends
feel about each kind of films.
- Give sts some new words: - Read the new words orally and
+ violent (adj): bo lc individually.
+ horrifying (adj) lm khip s
+ moving (adj): cm ng
+ find + O + Adj - Listen to the T.
- Ask sts to read the new words orally
and individually
- Introduce sts some expressions of
agreement and disagreement. - Read the model aloud.
+ Agreement: +
Disagreement: - Work in groups and ask some sts
I agree I don't think so. to present.
Yes, exactly Yes, but ........... A: What do yoy think of detective
Right / Sure ! I don't quite films?
agree with you. B: Oh, I find them exciting.
- Ask some sts to read the model C: I think so. I think they are good
conversation in the textbook. fun.
- Divide the class into small groups of 3 ........................
and ask sts to find out what the others of
their group feel about the given types of
films. - Listen to the T
- Go around to help sts if necessary .
- Call on some groups to practise the - Make sentences with the structure.
dialogues. - Two sts read the model
- Listen and give remarks. conversation.
+ Task 3: Find out the preferences of
your friend for films. - Work in pairs to ask and answer
- Introduce the structure prefer st to the similar questions.
st , which can be used to talk about S1: Which do you prefer, thrillers or
ones preferences. science fiction films?
- Ask sts to make sentences with the S2: Well, I suppose I prefer science
structure. fiction films to thrillers.
- Call on two sts to read the model - Listen to the T.
conversation in the textbook.
- Ask sts to work in pairs and find out
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
about their partners preference for a
particular type of films, basing on the - Work in groups.
model conversation. - Some sts report in front of the
- Go around to offer help. class.
- Ask some pairs to practise the E.g: I saw " Sand life" at the
dialogues. cinema. It is a love story film. It is
- Listen and correct their mistakes. about the life of a soldier after the
4. After you speak: war. He has already been married
10 Aims: Sts can talk about the film they but after the war he returns with
have seen.
another woman. Life with two wives
+ Task 4: Talk about a film you have
seen. is definitely not easy. I feel sorry for
- Ask sts to work in groups to ask and the soldiers' life after the war. I like
answer about a film they have seen the film because of its value.
using the suggestions given in the
textbook.
- Ask sts to take turns to talk about the
films they have seen.
- Go around to help sts.
- Ask some sts present in front of the
class if the permits
2 5. Homework: ( 2 min )
- Write a short paragraph about a film
they have already said about.

EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 25/02/11 UNIT 13: FILMS AND CINEMA


Period : 80 LESSON 3 : LISTENING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Sts know how some people can arrange to do st.
II. Language: - Vocabulary on days of the week .
III. Skills: - Listening: Listen for the main idea and fill in the chart .
- Speaking: Talk about sb's plans.
IV. Teaching aids:
- Tape, cassette player, textbook, chalk, board.
V. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities
1. Homework checking:
5 -Ask one sts to talk about a film he - One st presents.
likes best. - Others listen and give remarks.
- Listen to the T.
- Listen and give remarks.
2. Before you listen:
Aims:to focus sts on the topic and to
12 review/ introduce the words and - Work in groups to list the
phrases used in the listening text. entertainments
a. Ask sts to work in groups and list
the types of entertainments.
- Note down the list on board: - Stand up and give their answers.
go to the cinema/ watch TV S1: I never go to the cinema.
listen to music/ ............. S2: I often watch T.V.
- Ask sts to read the table in the book S3: I sometimes listen to the radio.
and put a tick on the right column. - Listen to their friends.
- Compare their answers with a
partner. - Copy the words and phrases.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask some sts to speak aloud.
b. Introduce some new words
- ti'tanic (adj): great, huge (The
name of a film) - Listen and repeat.
- su'ppose(v): think that st is true - Read the words in pairs and correct
but not be sure each others mistakes.
- guess(v): predict, give an - Some sts read the words aloud.
answer but do not know if it is right
- instead (adv): in the place of st/
sb
- Read the words asks sts to repeat.
- Ask sts to read the words in pairs. - Listen to the T.
- Ask some sts to read the words
again -Work in pairs to guess what the
3. While you listen: conversation is about.
+ Task 1: -Listen to the tape and do the task
Aims: Sts practise listening and - Exchange their answer.
17 marking True/ False statements. - Gives their answer.
- Tell sts that they are going to listen They are planning to go to the
to a conversation between two cinema together to see Titanic
friends, Lan and Huong. - Check their answer and then correct
- Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the their work if necessary.
picture and guess what the
conversation is about.
- Ask sts to listen to the talk and
answer the question: "What are they - Work in pairs to have a look at the
planning to do?". T plays the tape chart.
once. - Listen and do the task.
- Ask sts to exchange their answer in - Compare their notes.
pairs.
- Check sts answer. Lan Huong
- Play the tape once again and
conduct the correction. Mon
see a play
+ Task 2:
Aims: to practise listening for Tue
specific information by fillingin a
chart. Wed
-Ask sts to have a look at the chart in work and go
pairs and make sure they know what to singing club
information they need to fill in the Thu
blanks. visit grandparents
- Ask sts to listen to the tape Fri
once/twice and take short notes to fill take Chineseclasses
in the chart. Sat
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask sts to compare their answer in work (busy)
pairs. Sun
- Play the tape once again, stop the go on a picnic
tape where necessary and conduct Key: Tuesday
the correction. - Check their answer, and then correct
their work if necessary.
- Study the chart and find out a day
when both of the girls can go to the
cinema. Sts give their answer.

- Ask sts to look at the chart again


and find out if there is a day when
both Lan and Huong are free to go to
the cinema together.
8 4. After you listen: - Work in pairs talking about the two
- Ask sts to work in pairs and use the people' plans
chart to talk about Lan and Huong's - Some sts present.
plan for nextweek
- Revise some structures to show
one's plans:
- be going to V
- be Ving
- Move round to check the activities
and to make sure that sts are working
effectively.
- Ask some sts to present in front of
the whole class.
- Check and gives remarks.

5. Homework:
3 Write a short paragraph about your
plan for week.
EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 02/03/2011 UNIT 13: FILMS AND CINEMA


Period : 81 LESSON 4 : WRITING

Clas Date of teaching Students absence Notes


s
10A

I. Objectives:
1. Education Aims: - Students can write a description of a film.
2. Knowledge:
a. General knowledge: - The film Titanic.
b. Language: - Language used to describe a film.
- The present tenses .
3. Skills: - Reading: read the description of the film Titanic and then answer the
questions.
- Writing: write about a film they have seen.
II. Teaching Aids:
- board, textbook, chalk.
-sub-board and hand out
III. Procedures:
Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
WARM-UP:
5 Network
-Gives instructions. - Work in groups of 4 or 6 students
-Distributes the handouts to each and find out as many words which
group. relate to the topic word as possible.

film
film

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

- Check and find out the


winnner.
-Leads in the lesson.
2. Before you write:
- Aims: to get sts to recognise - Listen to the teacher carefully.
17 how to describe a film and to
read the information about the
film Titanic.
+ Task 1:
- Introduce the topic of the
lesson: describing a film.
-Call a student to read the
passage aloud in front of the
class. -All students read through th
- Introduce some new words: - Copy down the words into theit
+'tragic (a): bi thm notebooks.
+'luxury (n) : s xa hoa
+'voyage (n): a long
journey by sea
+ ad'venturer (v) : ngi - Listen and repeat.
thch phiu lu. - Some sts stand up and read again.
+ be engaged: nh hn - Read the description of the film
+ 'iceberg (n): tng bng Titanic in task 1 and to answer the
tri questions about the film.
- Ask sts to listen and repeat and - Work in pairs to ask and answer and
then copy down these words into then share their answer with their
their notebooks. friends.
- Ask some sts to read these - Present their ideas.
words again. 1. The name of the film is Titanic.
-Use the subboard to show the 2. It is a tragic love story film.
questions and form of answers or 3. It is about the sinking of a luxury
write it up on the suboard. liner.
4. It is made in America.
- Allow sts to work in pairs to ask 5. It is based on the true story of
and answer the questions orally. Titanic.
- Move around to help if 6. The main character are Jack
necessary. Dawson and Rose DeWitt Bukater.
- Ask sts to compare their answer 7. Jack is a young and generous
with other pairs. adventurer. Jack and Rose fall in love
with each other.
8. It has a sad ending.
- Get feedback and give remarks.
+ Task 2:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask sts to think of a film they
have already seen and then work - Listen to the teacher.
in pairs to ask and answer
similar questions to those in task - Think of a film that they have seen.
1.
- Allow sts to work in pairs in 5
minutes. - Work in pairs to ask and answer
- Move around to help if about the films they have seen.
necessary and to check . - Listen to the teacher.
- Correct sts' mistakes if there are
13 any.

3. While you write:


- Aims: Sts practise writing a
description of a film they have
seen basing on the answers.. -Work in groups.
- Distributes the hand outs to ech - Do the writing task.
groups.
- Ask sts to write down what they
have discussed into their
notebooks.
- Let sts write in 10 minutes.
- Ask them to refer to the model
description in task 1 if necessary.
- Move around to conduct the
activity.
4. After you write: - Read their writing: ( a sample
8 Aims: to get feedback and check paragraph)
sts' work. " Of all the films I have seen, " Gone
- Collects Sts writing and hangs with the wind" is the film I like best. "
them on the board. Gone with the wind" is a love story
- Ask some other sts to give film. It is about the change in a
remarks. woman 's life during the civil war
- Check and give the correct in America. The film is made in
answer. America. It is based on the famous
novel " Gone with the wind" written
by Margaret Mitchell. The main
character is Scallet O'hara. She is a
beautiful but ambitious woman....."

- If time allowed, gives an extra


exercises( use sub board).

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

2 - Whole class.
5. Homework: ( 1min)
- Part D (page 79 - workbook).

IV-EXPERIENCES:
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................

Date: 07/03/11 UNIT 13: FILMS AND CINEMA


Period : 82 LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10
I. Objectives:
- Students know how to pronounce the sound /f/ and /v/ correctly.
- Students learn about: - Adjectives of attitude.
- Structure: It is/was not until ... that ...
- Articles: a/an and the
II. Language focus: + Language: - Pronunciation: /f/ and/v/ .
- Adjectives of attitude.
- Structure: It is/was not until ... that ...
- Articles: a/an and the
III. Skills: + Speaking: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises.
+ Reading: - Read words and sentences aloud.
- Read the sentences silently to do the exercises.
IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
V. Procedures:
T Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking: ( 5mins)
5 - Ask two sts to talk about the films they - Two sts talk about the films they
have seen. have seen..
- Ask another st to give remarks. - Give remarks.
- Check and give a mark. - Listen to the teacher.
2. Pronunciation:( 10 mins)
- Aims: to introduce two sounds /f/ and
/v / and help sts to practise these
10 sounds.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
a. Write two sounds on the board and - Write down two sounds.
pronounce them clearly twice, then ask - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
sts to repeat. - Look at the book , listen and
- Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds repeat.
accurately. /f/ /v/
/ f / : a voiceless sound fan van
/ v / : a voiced sound first vine
- Ask sts to pay attention to the length of form view
two sounds. ...........................
- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen - Read these words in pairs and
and repeat. check for their partners.

- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read


the words again so that they can check - Look at the book and work in
for each other. pairs.
- Move around to help . - Answers:
- Ask two sts to read again and give /f/ /v/
remarks. feels Stephen
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page enough driving
139 in the book. photograph van
- Ask them to work in pairs to read the ...............................
sentences and then find out the words - Read the sentences.
containing sound /f / and sound /v / .
- Ask them to work in 2 minutes.
- Move around to conduct the activity.
- Ask one st to report and other sts to
give remarks.
- Check and give the correct answers.
3. Grammar: ( 29 mins)
Aims: to introduce adjectives of
attitude, structure: " It is/was not - Listen to the teacher
until ... that ...", articles: " a/an" and - Read the instruction and the
"the" and have sts do Ex1,EX2 , EX 3 example and then do task 1.
and EX4.
29 a. Adjectives of attitude: Key:
- Firstly ask sts to read the instruction 1. fascinating 2.
and the example in task 1. exciting
- Ask them to do task 1. 3. terrifying 4. irritating
+ Exercise 1: 5. horrifying 6. boring
- Ask two sts to write the adjectival 7. surprising 8. amusing
forms of the verbs on the board. ................................
- Ask sts to compare their answers with
other sts. - Listen to the T.
- Move round to conduct the activity. - Look at the example.
- Look at the board and give remarks. - One st tells the difference:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
+ Tell sts that there may be two + The -ing adjectives: the nature of
adjectival forms of a verb. One ends in sth/sb
-ing and the other ends in -ed. + The -ed adjectives: how sb feels
- Ask sts to look at the example and tell (about sth).
the difference - Some pairs report.
E.g: interest => interesting and 1. depressing - depressed
interested 2. interested - interesting
- This book is interesting. 3. boring - bored
- I am interested in this book. I 've ...................................
read it twice. - Listen and correct their work if
- Ask sts to do task 2. necessary.
+ Exercise 2:
- Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and - Read the examples.
then share the answers with their - Pay attention to the underlined
friends. parts.
- Move round to help if necessary. - Tell the T that the second
- Ask some sts to report. sentences are more emphatic.
- Check and give remarks.
- Do the Ex individually.
b. It is/was not until ... that ... : EX3:
- Give examples so that sts can see the 1.... 1990 that she became a teacher.
use as well as the form of this structure: 2..... he was 30 that he knew how to
E.g: Mary didn't know how to make swim.
cakes until I taught her. 3..... 1980 that they began to learn
= It was not until I taught Mary that she English.
knew how to make cakes. .................................
I did not start to learn English until - Listen to the teacher.
1995. - Read the example and the tell the
= It was not until 1995 that I started to T the use of these articles:
learn English. + A/an: indefinite articles.
- Ask sts to read the examples and tell A/an + N (sing)
the teacher which sentences are more + The: definite article.
emphatic. The + N
+ Exercise 3: - Do the exercise in pairs.
- Ask sts to do Ex 3 individually and - Some sts report:
then share the answers with their 1. a...the...the
friends. 2. an...a...a...the...the...the
- Move round to help if necessary. 3. the...the...the...the
- Ask two sts to write their answers on 4. an...a...a...the....a
the board. - Listen and correct their work if
- Check and give remarks. necessary.
c. A/an and the
- Give an example so that sts can revise
the use of these articles:
E.g: I have a cat and a dog. The cat is
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
lazy and the dog is intelligent.
- Ask sts to do Ex 4.
+ Exercise 4:
- Ask sts to do this execise in pairs.
- Move round to help if necessary.
- Ask some sts to report.
- Check and give remarks.
1 5. Homework
- Part B( page 77 - workbook)
EXPERIENCES:

Date: 08/03/11 UNIT 14: THE WORLD CUP


Period : 83 LESSON 1 : READING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know more about the World Cup.
II.Language focus:
a. General knowledge: - Knowledge about the World Cup.
b. Language: - The passive.
- Vocabulary concerning sport: tournament, final, trophy......
III. Skills: - Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups.
- Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through matching the
words in A with the definitions in B, sentence completing and marking true/false
statements.
IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk, some pictures.
V. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm-up:
5 - Show sts some pictures of the 2006
World Cup tournament. - Look at the T's pictures .
- Ask sts what they know about the 2006 - Stand up and say aloud what they
World Cup tournament. know about the latest World Cup
- Get feedback and check. tournament.
2. Before you read: .........
12 Aims: To introduce the topic and
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
provide sts with words/phrases about
the World Cup.
a. Answering questions:
- Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and - Work in pairs to ask and answer.
answer the questions in Before you read. - Give answers orally.
- Go round to help if necessary. 1. It was held in Japan and Korea.
- Ask some sts to give answers. 2. Brazil did.
- Listen and check. Sts may give 3. Germany was.
different answers. b.Vocabulary. ...................................
- Provide sts with the new - Others listen
words/phrases:
+ 'tournament (n): gii u
+ 'final (n): chung kt - Listen and read after the T.
+ 'witness (v): chng kin
+ elimi'nation game (n): trn
u loi - Write down these words into their
+ 'honoured title (n): danh hiu notebooks.
cao qu
+ 'victory (n): chin thng - Listen and repeat.
- Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask
sts to repeat it. - Read these words and check for
- Leave sts 1 minute to self-practice. their partner.
- Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases - Read the words aloud.
aloud in front of the class( 1 st/ 1 time) - Listen to the T.
- Listen and help sts to read the
18 words/phrases correctly.
3. While you read:
Aims: Read for information to match the
words in A with the definitions in B, to
do sentence completing and to mark
true/false statements..
+ Task 1: Matching: - Work individually.
- Ask sts to read the passage
independently then read the words as
well as the definitions given in task 1
and scan the passage to match. - Report their answers one by one.
- Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help 1. - b 2-c 3 - a
and encourage them to try to guess the 4 - e 5-d
meanings of the words in contexts of - Listen to the T
the reading.
- Ask sts to share their answers with
their partners.
- Call on 5 sts to read their answers
aloud in front of the class. - Scan the passage and find the
- Get feedback and give remarks. information.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
+ Task 2: Sentence completing.
- Ask sts to scan the passage - Work in pairs to compare their
independently then complete each answers.
sentence with a word or a number. - Report their answers sentence by
- Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help sentence.
and encourage them to try to scan the 1. 13 2. 32 3.
information as fast as possible. Argentina
- Move round to help and ask sts to 4. one 5. 26
share their ideas. - Listen to the T
- Call on 5 sts to read and explain their
answers aloud in front of the class. - Read the passage again and mark
- Feedback and give remarks. true/false statements.
+ Task 3: - Present their ideas:
- Ask sts to read the passage again 1. F ( in 1930)
individually and mark true/false 2. F ( every four years)
statements. 3. T
- Move around to help. 4. T
- Ask sts to share the answers with their 5. F ( .... has won the trophy 5
friends and correct the false sentences. times )
- Ask 5 sts to give answers. - Listen to their friends and the T.
- Listen and check.
9
4. After you read: - Work in groups orally.
Aims: Students' summary of the reading - Some sts report.
passage. E.g: 13 is the number of teams that
- Ask sts to look at the figures and work took part in the first tournament.
in groups to talk about the events 1930 is the year when the first
mentioned in the passage. World Cup was held.
- Go round to help sts with their work. ................................
- Some presentatives of the groups are - Listen to the T.
required to report in front of the class.
- Listen and help sts to give correct
1 answers.
5. Homework:
- Write a summary of the reading text on
what they have discussed in After you
read.

EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 09/03/11 UNIT 14: THE WORLD CUP


Period : 84 LESSON 2 : SPEAKING

Date of Students absence Notes


Class teaching
10
10
I. Objectives:
- Students know about the World Cup.
II. Language focus:
a. General knowledge: - Students can talk about the World Cup winners.
b. Language: - The simple present tense.
- Vocabulary about football .
III. Skills: - Asking and answering questions about the World Cup.
- Talking about the World Cup winners.
IV. Teaching aids:
Textbook, chalk, board, handouts, posters.
V. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm- up: Jumble words
5 Aims :Sts get used to the topic. - Listen to the T.
- Divide the class into small groups of 3 or 4
and introduce the games: Sts are to rearrange - Work in groups and find out the
the letters into meaning words. words.
- Write some groups of letters on the board. - Answers: winner, score,
- Ask sts to work in groups. runner-up,host country,
- Ask some goups to give answers . champion.
- Introduce the new lesson: Today we will
talk about the World Cups.

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
2. Before you speak:
Aims: :to focus sts on the topic and
12 introduce the words and phrases used in the
task. - Answer the question of the T.
+ Task 1: A World Cup 2002 quiz 1- England 3- Italy
- Ask S to name the team in the photos on 2- France 4- Germany
page 145:
- Before doing the task T give S some new - Listen and write down these
words: words into their notebooks.
+ draw (v,n): e.g. a score of 1- 1 Answer:
+ lose the match to sb
+ defeat sb: beat sb
+ penalty shoot - out 1. 4 times
- Give S some handouts and in each handout
T writes two questions about the four 2. Zinedine Zidane
football teams:
Q1. How many times has Italy won the 3. 1 - 1( Italy won the game 5 - 3
trophy up to World Cup 2006? in a penalty shoout- out.
Q2. Who was the captain of the French 4. France.
national football team in World Cup 2006? 5.Jurgen Klinsmann
Q3. What was the score of the World Cup
2006 final? 6. German
Q4. Which team was the runner-up in the
World Cup 2006? 7.David Beckam
Q5. Who was the head coach of the German
team in World Cup 2006? 8. Portugal (by 3-1)
Q6. What nationality was the top scorer in
World Cup 2006? - Listen to their friends and
Q7. Who was the captain of the English check.
national football team in World Cup 2006?
Q8. Who beat England in the World Cup
2006 quarter final?
- Ask sts to work in groups to answer the
questions.
- Go around to check that S work and speak - Read the table in 2 minutes.
English. - Listen to the T and then some
- Ask some Ss to answer the questions. sts read the model again.
15
3. While you speak: - Work in pairs to make similar
Aims: Sts can talk about the World Cup dialogues.
tournaments. - Say aloud their dialogues:
+ Task 2: S1: Where was the second World
- Ask sts to read the information about 17 Cup held?
World Cup tournaments in the table. S2: It was held in Italy.
- Read the model dialogue aloud and then S3: Which teams played in the
ask two pairs to read the dialogue again. final match?
- Ask sts to work in pairs to make similar S4: Italy and Czechoslovakia.
dialogues about the World Cup tournaments. ...............................
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Move round to make sure that Sts are - Listen to the T.
working and to help if necessary.
- Ask sts to compare their answers with other
pairs. - Listen to the T.
- Ask some pairs to report. - Some Sts read the model.
- Listen and give remarks. - Work in group to talk about the
WC winners.
4. After you speak: - Some Sts present in front of the
Aim: S can talk about the World Cup class.
10 winners Suggested answer:
+ Task 3: The 17th World Cup was help in
- Introduce the task: S are going to take turns Korea and Japan in 2002. The
to talk about the World Cup winners in final match was between Brazil
different years. and Germany. Brazil defeated
- Ask Sts to read the model in the textbook. Germany by 2 to 0. Brazil
- Ask Sts to work in groups and take turns to becema the champion and
talk about the WC winner in a certain year. Germany was the runner- up.
- Go around to check and to offer help.
- Ask some Sts to talk about different World
Cup if time permit.
1

5. Homework:
Write a paragraph to talk about World Cup
2006.

EXPERIENCES:

Date: 0/03/11 UNIT 14: THE WORLD CUP


Period : 85 LESSON 3 : LISTENING

Date of Students absence Notes


Class teaching
10
10
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
10
I. Objectives:
- Sts know some information about Pele, the most famous footballer in the
world.
II. Language: - Vocabulary on football.
- The simple past tense.
III. Skills: - Listening: Listen and fill in the table, and answer the questions.
- Speaking: Talk about important events in Pele's life.
IV. Teaching aids:
- Tape, cassette player, textbook, chalk, board.
V. Procedures:
T Teachers activities Students activities
7 1. Homework checking:
- Ask one st to talk about some World Cup - One st presents.
tournaments. - Others listen and give remark.
- Listen and give remarks.

2. Before you listen:


12 Aims: to focus sts on the topic and to - Work in groups to talk about
review/ introduce the words and phrases their favourite football players
used in the listening text.
a. Ask sts to work in groups and talk about - Discuss the players in the
their favourite football players, the name of pictures
their football clubs, their nationalities... - Some sts stand up and give their
- Ask sts to work in groups again to look at answers.
the pictures in the textbook and discuss the 1. Pele 2. Maradona 3. Zidane
football players in the pictures. 4. Barthez 5. Beckham

b. Introduce some new words - Copy the words and phrases.


- as a/ an...... : When he/ she was a/an....
- kick (v):( miming)
-control(v): to make people/ things do
what you want.
- participate in (v): take part in - Listen and repeat.
- ambassador(n) i s - Read the words in pairs and
- promote(v):to help the progress of st. correct each others mistakes.
-Read the words and ask sts to repeat. - Some individuals read the words
- Ask sts to read the words in pairs. aloud
- Ask some sts to read the words again. Sts listen to the T.
3. While you listen: Sts work in pairs to have a look at
+ Task 1: the table.
Aims: Sts practise listening for specific
17 information by filling in a table. - Listen and do the task.

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Tell sts that they are going to listen to a - Compare their notes.
talk about Pele. - Some sts report.
- Ask sts to have a look at the table in pairs Year Events
and make sure they know what information
they need to fill in the blanks. (1) 1940 Born in Brazil
- Ask sts to listen to the tape twice and take
short notes to fill in the table. 1956 (2) Joined in a
- Ask sts to compare their answers in pairs. Brazilian football club
- Ask some sts to report.
- Play the tape once again, stop the tape (3) 1962 First world cup
where necessary and conduct the correction. championship

(4) 1974 1200th goal


+ Task 2:
Aims: Sts practsce listening for specific 1977 (5) Retired
information by answering questions.
- Ask sts to read the questions in pairs and - Check their answer, and then
make sure they understand the questions. correct their work if they have
- Ask sts to listen to the tape twice and take wrong answers.
short notes to answer the questions. Sts work in pairs to read the
- Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. questions
- Ask some sts to report.

- Listen and do the task.


- Compare their answer.
- Play the tape once again, stop the tape - Some sts report.
where necessary and conduct the correction. 1. He was fanous for his powerful
kicking and controlling the ball.
4. After you listen: 2. He participated in 3 World
- Ask sts to work in pairs and use the Cups.
8 information in the table and the answers in 3. He played for an American
Task 2 to talk about important events in football club before he retired.
Pele's life 4. He became an international
- Move round to check the activities and to ambassador for the sport.
make sure that sts are working effectively. - Check their answer, and then
- Ask some sts to present in front of the correct their work if they have the
whole class. wrong answer.
- Check and give remarks.
- Work in pairs to talk about Pele's
life.
5. Homework: - Some sts present.
1 - Write a short paragraph about Pele.

EXPERIENCES:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 16/3/11 UNIT 14: THE WORLD CUP


Period : 86 LESSON 4 : WRITING
Date of Students absence Notes
Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students can write an announcement.
II. Language focus:
a. General knowledge: - An announcement concerning football.
b. Language: - Language used to write an announcement.
- The future tenses and the passive voice.
III. Skills: - Reading: read the model announcement.
- Speaking: discuss in pairs.
- Writing: write an announcement.
IV. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk.
V. Procedures:
T Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking :
5 - Ask one st to talk about the milestones - Listen to their friend and give
in Pele's life. remarks.
- Ask other sts to listen to their friend and
give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.
- Check and give remarks.
2. Before you write:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
20 - Aims: to get sts to know how to write
an announcement.
+ Task 1:
- Introduce the topic of the lesson:
Writing an annoucement. - Listen to the teacher carefully.
- Introduce some new words:
+a'nnounce (v): thng bo
+ a'nnouncer (n):ngi thng bo
+ announcement (n): thng bo
+ co'mmittee (n): u ban - Copy down the words into theit
+ post'pone (v):tr hon notebooks.
+due to (prep): v, do
+ se'vere (adj) : very bad.
+ con'tact (v):lin lc
+ The Ho Chi Minh Communist
Youth Union : on Thanh nin
Cng Sn H Ch Minh
- Ask sts to listen and repeat and then - Listen and repeat.
copy down these words into their - Some sts stand up and read again.
notebooks. - Read the announcement in pairs and
- Ask some sts to read these words again. then answer the questions that follow.
- Ask sts to read the announcement in - Work in pairs to ask and answer and
their notebooks and then work in pairs to then share their answer with their
answer the questions that follow. friends.
- Allow sts to work in pairs to ask and - Present their ideas.
answer the questions orally. 1. The national football championship
- Move around to help if necessary. organizing committee is.
- Ask sts to compare their answer with 2. The match between Nam Dinh and
other pairs. Binh Duong.
3. The match will be played at 3 p.m on
Sunday, April 25th.
- Get feedback and give remarks. 4. It will be played at My Dinh national
- Tell sts that these four questions are the Stadium.
main contents of an announcement. - Listen to the teacher.

+ Task 2: - Read two situations.


- Ask sts to read two situations in task 2. - Work in pairs to discuss two
- Ask them to work in pairs to answer the situations.
similar questions to those in task 1. - Some pairs report.
- Ask sts to create the time and the place + Situation 1:
of the meeting in the first situation. 1. Nguyen Trai High School Football
- Allow sts to work in pairs in 5 minutes. Team.
- Move around to help if necessary and to 2. The team are looking for new
check . players for the new football season.
- Ask sts compare their answers with 3. The first meeting of volunteers will
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
other pairs. be at 7 p.m on Sunday, April 15th.
- Ask some pairs to report. 4. It will be at Hai Duong Central
Stadium.
+ Situation 2:
1. The HCM Communist Youth Union
of NT High School.
2. A friendly match with New Stars
Football Club.
3. It will be played at 5 p.m on Sunday,
April 20th.
4. It will be played in the football field
of New Stars Football Club.
10 - Correct sts' mistakes if there are any. - Listen to the teacher.
3. While you write:
- Aims: Sts practise writing one of the
two situations.
- Ask sts to write down what they have
discussed into their notebooks. - Do the writing task.
- Let sts write in 10 minutes.
- Ask them to refer to the model - Read their writing: ( a model
announcement in task 1 if necessary. announcement)
9 - Move around to conduct the activity. " Nguyen Trai High School Football
4. After you write: Team wishes to announce that the team
Aims: to get feedback and check sts' are looking for new players for the new
work. football season. Volunteers must be
- Get feedback by asking some sts to read good at football and are students of
their work aloud. Nguyen Trai High School. The first
- Ask some other sts to give remarks. meeting will take place at 7 p.m on
- Check and give the correct answer. Sunday, April 15th at Hai Duong
- If there is enough time, T can have sts Central Stadium.If you want any
exchange their writing among sts within a further information, you can contact
group so that they can check their friend's Nguyen Van Ba, class 10 of Chemistry
work and give remarks. or at 860.222."

5. Homework:
- Part D (page 84 - workbook).

EXPERIENCES:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 20/04/11 UNIT 14: THE WORLD CUP


Period : 87 LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS

Date of Students absence Notes


Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Students know how to pronounce the sound /g/ and /k/ correctly.
- Students revise: - The uses of will.
- The difference between will and be going to.
II.Languge focus:
+ Language: - Pronunciation: /g/ and/k/ .
- The uses of will.
- Will vs. be going to.
III. Skills: + Speaking: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises.
+ Reading: - Read words and sentences aloud.
- Read the sentences silently to do the exercises.
IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
V. Procedures:
T Teacher's activities Students' activities
5 1. Homework checking:
- Ask two sts to read the announcements - Two sts read the announcements
they wrote aloud. aloud.
- Ask another st to give remarks.
- Check and give marks. - Give remarks.
2. Pronunciation: - Listen to the teacher.
10 - Aims: to introduce two sounds /g/ and
/k / and help sts to practise these
sounds.
a. Write two sounds on the board and
pronounce them clearly twice, then ask - Write down two sounds.
sts to repeat. - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
- Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds - Look at the book , listen and repeat.
accurately. /g/ /k/
/ k / : a voiceless sound group club
/ g / : a voiced sound game kick
- Ask sts to pay attention to the length of together cup
two sounds. ...........................
- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen - Read these words in pairs and check
and repeat. for their partners.

- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read


the words again so that they can check - Look at the book and work in pairs.
for each other. - Answers:
- Move around to help . /g/ /k/
- Ask two sts to read again and give group scored
remarks. goal took
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page Uruguay cat
150 in the book. ...............................
- Ask them to work in pairs to read the - Read the sentences.
sentences and then find out the words
containing sound /g / and sound /k / .
- Ask them to work in 2 minutes.
- Move around to conduct the activity.
- Ask one st to report and other sts to
give remarks.
- Check and give the correct answers.
- Ask some sts to read these sentences - Listen to the T.
aloud. - Look at the examples.
- Listen and give remarks. - One st tells the difference:
3. Grammar: + Will: to talk about the future and
29 Aims: to revise the difference between the decision is made at the moment of
will and be going to, and the uses of speaking.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
will, and have sts do EX1,EX2 and EX3. + Be going to: to talk about
a. will vs. be going to: intentions/ decisions which are made
- Firstly ask sts to look at the examples before we report them.
and tell the difference
E.g:
- Wife: This dress looks beautiful. It - Some pairs report.
must fit me well. 1. I'll get 2. I'm going to
Husband: Ok. I will buy it for you. wash
- A: Why did you buy so much paint? 3. are you going to paint
B: I'm going to repaint my bedroom 4. I'm going to buy 5. I'll show
tomorrow. ...................................
- Listen to the S and give remarks. - Listen and correct their work if
- Ask sts to do task 1. necessary.
+ Exercise 2:
- Ask sts to do Ex 1 in pairs and then - Read the example.
share the answers with their friends.
- Move round to help if necessary.
- Ask some pairs to report. - Pay attention to the underlined part.

- Check and give remarks.


b. Will: making predictions - Tell the T that will is used to talk
- Give an example so that sts can about what the speaker predicts about
remember the use of will. the future.
E.g: A: I like that car very much but I
don't have enough money to buy it. - Do the Ex individually.
B: Ask Jack for some money, please. EX3:
He is rich and generous. I'm sure he will 1....he will help .....
lend you some. 2. ... won't lend me .....
- Ask sts to read the examples and tell 3. ... it will rain.......
the teacher the use of will in this .................................
situation. - Listen to the teacher.
+ Exercise 3:
- Ask sts to do Ex2 individually and then - Read the example.
share the answers with their friends.
- Move round to help if necessary. - Pay attention to the underlined part.
- Ask two sts to write their answers on - Tell the T the use of will in this
the board. situation:
to make offer/ to show willingness.
- Do the exercise in pairs.
- Check and give remarks. - Some pairs report:
c. Will: making offer 1. I will make you a glass of orange
- Give an example so that sts can revise juice.
the use of will: 2. I'll open it.
E.g: A: I'm so tired but I still have a lot 3. I'll lend you some.
of work to do. ................................
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
B: Oh, I will help you to finish it. - Listen and correct their work if
- Ask sts to do Ex 3. necessary.
+ Exercise 3:
- Ask sts to do this execise in pairs.
- Move round to help if necessary.
- Ask some sts to report.

- Check and give remarks.


1 5. Homework
- Part B( page 81 - workbook)
EXPERIENCES:

Date: 20/03/11 TEST YOURSELF E


Period: 88

Date of Students absence Notes


Class teaching
10
10
10

I. Objectives:
- Sts revise what they have learned in unit 12, unit 13 and unit 14.
II. Knowledge: - General knowledge in unit 12, unit 13 and unit 14.
- Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units.
III. Skills: listening, speaking and writing.
IV. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board.
V. Procedures:
T Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking:
5 - Ask one st to do Ex 4 in the EX 4:
workbook on the board. 2. It will look ....... 3. you will like...
- Ask one st to give remarks. 4. you will get ....... 5. They'll be....
- Give remarks and marks. 6. we'll meet ..... 7. she'll come......
8. I'll be..........
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- One st gives remarks.
2. The new lesson:
- Ask sts to do part II, part III and
part IV at home in advance to save
time.
- Give sts the time duration for each
part : part II: 10 minutes, part III: 10 - Look at the textbook and read the
minutes, part IV: 15 minutes. statements.
- Ask sts to do listening in class. - Try to focus on the important words.
2.1. Listening: - Copy down these words into their
10 - Ask sts to read the requirement of notebooks.
the task. - Listen and read after the teacher.
- Introduce new words:
+ 'Jupiter (n): Sao Mc - Listen carefully and do the task.
+ senior citizen (n): ngi gi - Work in pairs to discuss their answers.
+ re'duce (v): gim - Some sts report.
- Play the tape twice and ask sts to 1. 8.45 2. students
do the task. 3. Mountain 4. are reduced
- Ask sts to share their ideas with 5. 7.30
their partners. - work in groups to share their ideas.
- Get feedback and play the tape - Some sts stand up to report.
again so that sts can check their 1.He/She has to do a lot of practice and
answers. often spends a Saturday or Sunday
- Ask other sts to give remarks. away from home.
- Check and give feedback. 2. They are often played on Saturdays
2.2. Reading: and Sundays.
- Ask sts to work in groups to 3. To play against other school teams.
10 compare their answers. 4. No. Sometimes parents, friends and
- Ask some sts to report his/ her other students will travel with them.
answers aloud. 5. The whole school does....
- Listen and check. - Discuss in groups.
- Answers:
2.3. Grammar: 1. 0 2. the
2.3.1. .3. 0 .4. 0
- Ask sts to discuss their answers in 5.the 6. a
groups. .7. the 8. the
- Ask some sts to report. 9. the 10. a
- Compare their answers with their
- Ask two other sts to give remarks. parners.
10 - Check and give the correct - Write these sentences on the board.
answers. 1. I stayed in to watch a film on T.V.
2.3.2. to-infinitive: 2. I wrote them a letter to thank them
- Ask sts to share their answers with for the weekend.
their friends. 3. She went to university to study
- Ask 2 sts to write on the board. egineering.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
4. You should go to Britain to improve
- Check and give remarks. your English.
2.4. Writing: 5. You should book your tickets well in
- Ask some sts to read their writing advance to see that football match.
aloud. - Read their writing aloud
" The monitor of class 10G wishes to
announce that the musical performance
- Ask some sts to give remarks. of class 10G to raise money for the
people in the flooded areas will be held
at 7.30 p.m on Thursday, November
23rd in the school meeting hall. The
3. Homework: ticket price is 5,000 VND."
- Part A ( Page 80 - workbook) - Listen to the teacher's remarks.

EXPERIENCES:

Date: 03/02/10 Forty five minute test Period: 89,90


I. Listening:
You are going to listen to a talk about Maximilian. Listen carefully and decide if the
following statements are true or false. Tick in the right box to indicate your answer.
You will listen to the tape twice.
T F
1. After leaving school, Maximilian worked on his brother's
farm.
2. He left the village when he was 18.
3. The ship he worked on was sailing to the UK.
4. He made a lot of money on Wall Street.
5. He became a millionaire when he was 35.
6. His first wife was a model.
7. He lives with his first wife now.
8. Both of his daughters have become drug addicts.
9. He loves travels and he has visited every country in the
world.
10 Neither he nor his brother is happy.
.
II. Reading:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Complete the following passage by choosing one of the given phrases to fill
in each blank.

a. was watched b. elimination rounds c.


organised by d. every four years e. elimination
tournaments f. host nation g. the sport's governing body
h. viewed and followed i. was held k. the final
tournament
World Cup is the most important competition in international football,
and the world's most reprentative team sport event. (1) ...................... Federation
Internationale de Football Association (FIFA), (2)................., the World Cup is
contested by men's national football teams which are FIFA members. The World
Cup is held (3) ................... (except in times of war), but the (4)................... of the
competition (which narrows the field of as many as 197 teams down to the final
32 teams) take place over a three-year period, using regional (5).....................
The (6) ............... phase (often called the "Finalists") involves 32 national
teams competing over a four-week period in a previously nominated
(7).................... Only seven nations have won the World Cup Finals. The most
recent football World Cup (8).................. in Germany between June 9 and July
10, 2006. The World Cup Finals is the most widely (9).................. sporting event
in the world. The final match of the 2002 World Cup (10).................. by more
than one billion people.
III. Writing:
Use the prompts below to make up complete sentences about Cher, a famous
American pop star.
1. Cher/ born/ May 20th, 1946/ El Centro/ the USA.
............................................................................................................................
2. She/ leave/ high school/ when/ she/ 16/ and/ go/ Los Angeles
.......................................................................................................
3. She/ plan/ take/ acting lessons/ there.
................................................................................................................
4. However,she/ meet/ Salvatore Bono/ there/ and/ become/ famous singer/ when/
she/ only/
19. ...............................................................................................................................
5. Cher/ get married/ twice/ and/ have/ a daughter/ a son.
..........................................................................................................................
6. 1977/ she/ decide/ turn/ acting/ again.
...................................................................................................................................
7. Cher/ win/ Best Actress/ the Cannes Film Festival/ 1985/ and/ Oscar/ 1987.
............................................................................................................................
8. Her long career/ Cher/ be/ successful/ both/ serious actress/ pop star.
..................................................................................................................................
IV. Language Focus:
A. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the
others.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
1. a. laugh b. photo c. orphan d. Stephen
2. a. because b. tense c. nose d. please
3. a. village b. engineer c. age d. game
4. a. team b. bread c. meat d.
season
5. a. God b. globe c. phone d. host
B. Complete the second sentence so that it it has a similar meaning to the first one.
1. He didn't return to his native village until the war ended.
It was
not..........................................................................................................................
2. We couldn't relax until all the guests had gone home.
It was
not .........................................................................................................................
3. I only recognized him when he came into the light.
It was not
until..................................................................................................................
4. Roger wants to buy a book, so he's gone to town.
Roger has
gone .............................................................................................................
5. Jane wanted to earn some pocket money, so she got a part-time job.
Jane
got .......................................................................................................................
ANSWERS
I. Listening:
+ key: 1- F 2-T 3-F 4-T 5-F
6-T 7-F 8-F 9-F 10 - F
+Tape script:
When he left school, Maximilian also started work on the family farm. But he soon
became bored. Country life wasn't for him. And so at the age of 18 he left the village.
He's only been back three times since then. He went to Buenos Aires and there he got
a job on a ship that was sailing to the USA. On the ship he met a rich American
businessman. He liked Maximilian and offered him a job. Maximilian learnt quickly
and in the next ten years he made a lot of money on Wall Street. He became a
millionaire when he was only 25. Since then he has been part of the international jet
set. He's had three wives. When he was 30 he married a beautiful model, but she died
two years later in a car crash. His second and third marriages both ended in divorce.
For the last ten years he has lived alone in his luxury villa in the Bahamas. His
family life has not been happy. Two years ago his son went to prison. One of his two
daughters has become a drug addict. He's been on television several times and the
newspapers have followed his life closely. For the whole of his life he has loved to
travel. He's visited almost every country in the world. ' Yes, I've made a lot of money.
I've been everywhere and I've done everything. But has it made me happy? Not really.
Now look at my brother, Emilio. For several years his life hasn't changed at all. But
he's happy. Yes, Emilio is a happy man.'
II. Reading:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
(1) - c 2)- g (3) - d (4) - b (5)- e
(6) - k (7) - f (8) - i (9) - h (10) - a
III. Writing:
Use the prompts below to make up complete sentences about Cher, a famous
American pop star.
1. Cher was born on May 20th, 1946 in El Centro in the USA.
2. She left high school when she was 16 and went to Los Angeles.
3. She planned to take acting lessons there.
4. However, she met Salvatore Bono there and became a famous singer when she was
only 19.
5. Cher got married twice and has a daughter and a son.
6. In 1977 she decided to turn to acting again.
7. Cher won the Best Actress at the Cannes Film Festival in 1985 and an Oscar
1987.
8. In her long career Cher has been successful both as a serious actress and as a pop
star.
IV. Language Focus:
A. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the
others.
1.- d ; 2 - b; 3 - d; 4 - b ; 5 - a.
B. Complete the second sentence so that it it has a similar meaning to the first one.
1. It was not until the war ended that he returned to his native village.
2. It was not until all the guests had gone home that we could relax.
3. It was not until he came into the light that I recognized him.
4. Roger has gone to town to buy a book.
5. Jane got a part-time job to earn some pocket money.
..................................................................................................................
..
Date: 04/02/10 UNIT 15: CITIES
Period : 91 LESSON 1 : READING

I. Objectives:
1. Education aims: - Students know more about New York City.
2. Knowledge:
a. General knowledge: - Knowledge about New York City.
b. Language: - The passive.
- Vocabulary used to describe a city.
3. Skills: - Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups.
- Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through guessing
words' meanings in contexts, finding specific information.
II. Anticipated problems:
- Students may not have much knowledge about New York City.
III. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk, some pictures.
IV. Procedures:
Teachers activities Students activities
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
1. Warm-up:(3 mins)
- Ask sts some questions so that they can find - Listen to the T and find the
out which city they are reading about. answer.
What is the largest city in the USA? S1: New York City is the largest city
Where is the Statue of Liberty situated? in the USA.
- Introduce the topic of the lesson. S2: It is situated in New York.
2. Before you read:( 12 mins) - Listen to the T.
Aims: To introduce the topic and provide sts
with words/phrases about New York City.
a. Answering questions:
- Ask sts to look at the pictures of some well-
known places in New York and then ask them
some questions: - Look at the pictures and answer
Do you know these places? the T.
What are they? Ss: Yes, we know.
- Encourage sts to answer freely. S1: No 1 is the Empire State
- Guide sts to read the names of these places Building.
aloud. S2: No 2 is the United Nations
- Ask them to match the names to the Headquarters.
pictures. ...................
- Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and answer - Work in pairs to ask and answer.
the questions in Before you read. - Give answers orally.
- Go round to help if necessary. 1. It is in the northeast of the USA.
- Ask some sts to give answers. 2. Sts' answer.
- Listen and check. Sts may give different ...................................
answers. b.Vocabulary. - Others listen
- Provide sts with the new words/phrases:
+ lo'cate (v): t
+ 'harbour (n):bn cng - Listen and read after the T.
+ 'global (a): belong to globe
+ 'finance (n):ti chnh
+ 'business (n):kinh doanh - Write down these words into their
+' characterise(v):c trng ho notebooks.
- Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask sts
to repeat it. - Listen and repeat.
- Leave sts 1 minute to self-practice.
- Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases - Read these words and check for
aloud in front of the class( 1 st/ 1 time) their partner.
- Listen and help sts to read the words/phrases - Read the words aloud.
correctly. - Listen to the T.
3. While you read:( 20 mins)
Aims: Read and guess the meanings of the
words from contexts, and find specific
information.
+ Task 1: Matching:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Ask sts to read the passage independently
then read the words in column A as well as
the definitions given in column B and scan - Work individually.
the passage to match.
- Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and
encourage them try to guess the meanings of
the words in contexts of the reading text. - Report their answers one by one.
- Ask sts to share their answers with their 1. - d 2-c 3 - e
partners. 4 -a 5-b
- Call on 5 sts to read their answers aloud in - Listen to the T
front of the class.
- Get feedback and give remarks. - Read the sentences first and try to
+ Task 2: True or False. focus on the key words.
- Ask sts to read the sentences in task 2 first, - Read the passage again and do the
and focus their attention on key words. task.
- Ask sts to read the passage independently - Share their ideas with their friends.
and then decide whether the statements are - Report their answers sentence by
true or false. sentence.
- Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and 1. T
encourage them to try to scan the information 2. F. It is ice-free in all seasons.
as fast as possible. 3. T. It is on the Hudson & Passaic
- Move round to help and ask sts to share River.
their ideas and correct the false sentences. 4. T
- Call on 5 sts to read and explain their 5. T
answers aloud in front of the class. - Listen to the T

- Feedback and give remarks. - Read the passage again and work
+ Task 3: in pairs to ask and answer.
- Ask sts to read the passage again and work - Present their ideas:
in pairs to ask and answer the questions. 1. It's in the southeastern part of
- Move around to help. New York state.
- Ask sts to share the answers with their 2. 7 million in the city and 19
friends million in the metropolitan region.
- Ask 5 pairs to give answers. 3. Because it was founded by the
Dutch.
...............................
- Listen to their friends and the T.
- Listen and check.
4. After you read:( 9 mins)
Aims: to test sts' understanding about the
reading passage. - Work in groups orally.
- Ask sts to work in groups of three or four to
discuss two questions.
If you could visit New York, which place(s) of
interest there would you like to see?
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Why?/ Why not? - Some sts report.
- Go round to help sts with their work.
- Some presentatives of the groups are
required to report in front of the class. - Listen to the T.
- Listen and help sts to give correct answers.
5. Homework:( 1 min)
- Write a paragraph to answer the questions in
After you read.

Date: 05/02/10 UNIT 15: CITIES


Period : 92 LESSON 2 : SPEAKING

I. Objectives:
1. Education aims: - Students know about diferent cities.
2. Knowledge:
a. General knowledge: - Students can talk about the differences between
London and New York.
b. Language: - The comparative structures.
- Vocabulary to describe a city.
3. Skills: - Asking and answering questions about the two cities.
- Making the comparisions between London and New York.
- Talking about the preferences and explain the reasons.
II. Anticipated problems:
Sts might have problem using the comparative form of short vs long adjectives
fluently.
III. Teaching aids: Textbook, chalk, board, handouts.
IV. Procedures:
Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm- up: (5 minutes)
Aims : get used to the topic.
- Divide the class into 2 big groups and introduce
the quiz: T is going to read out the questions - Work in groups and find the
about Hanoi and Ho Chi Minh City. Sts need to answers quickly.
listen and give the answers quickly.
- The quiz:
1. Which city is larger in area- Hanoi or Ho Chi 1. Ho CHi Minh City. ( Area of
Minh City? HCM: 2,095 km2, Hanoi: 921
2. Which city has a bigger population- Hanoi or km20
Ho Chi Minh City? 2. Ho Chi Minh City. ( pop. Of
3. Which city is older- Hanoi or Ho Chi Minh HCM: 6. 2 milion, Hanoi: 3
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
City? milion)
4. Which city was known by more names through 3. Hanoi ( founded in 1010)
history- Hanoi or Ho Chi Minh City? 4. Hanoi
5. Which city has more districts- Hanoi or Ho
Chi Minh City? 5. Ho Chi Minh City
6. Which city is closer to the sea- Hanoi or Ho
Chi Minh City? 6. Ho Chi Minh City
2. Before you speak: (8 minutes)
Aims: : focus sts. on the topic and introduce the
words and grammar used in the task.
+ Task 1: Complete each question in A with a
suitable word in B
- Ask S to do the task individually. - Listen to the T
- Ask some S to go and write their answers on - Work individually.
the board. - Some S write on board
- Get feedback. - Answers:
3. While you speak: (20 minutes) 1-d 2- f 3- a-e
Aims: Sts can ask and asnwer about the two 4-a-e 5- b-c 6- c-b.
cities .
+ Task 2:
- Ask sts to work in pairs: One S read the
infformation about New York city and the other - Work in pairs to ask and
about London, then ask and asnwer about the answer.
cities S1: Do you know when NY was
- In their pairs, Ss will take turn to ask and founded?
answer about New York and London using the S2: It was founded in 1624. And
questions in Task 1. what about London?
- Go around to check and offer help. S1: It was founded in 43AD. Ans
- Ask sts to share their answers with other pairs. what is the population of New
- Call on some pairs to perform in front of the York?
class and give feedback. S2: 7 milion. What about
- Listen and give remarks. London?
+ Task 3: S1: 7 milion, too. Whats the
- Introduce the task: S are going to work in pairs area of New York?
again and compare the two cities they have just S2: It covers an area of 946
asked and answer about. km2. And how large is London?
- Call on two students to read aloud the model .................................................
conversation in the textbook. ..
- Pay attention to the words and phrases printed .
in bold and review the comparative forms of
Adjs and nouns: - Read the model aloud.
a Equal Comparison
+ Structure: - Pay attention to the words/
S + V + as adj / adv as + phrases in bold.
S + Modal V/Aux V/Be - Listen to the T and take notes.
NP
Pro
- Equal comparison of nouns:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
......... as+ many/ few+ countable N+ as
..........as+ much/ little+ uncountable N+ as
Eg.: as many parks as/ as much money as
b Comparative form:
+ Structure:
S+V+ comparative adj /adv +than+
S + Modal V/Aux V/Be
NP
Pro
- Comparative nouns: more + count/ uncount -
N
E.g: more buildings, more money
- Ask S to work in pairs to compare the two
cities, basing on the model conversation. - Work in pairs.
- Go around to help Sts. - Compare the two cities.
- Ask some Sts to perform in front of the class. - Some pairs present in front of
4. After you speak: (10 minutes) the clas
Aim: S can talk about the preferences and give - Work in groups to listen and
the reasons. take notes their opinions into the
+ Task 4: table.
- Introduce the task: S are going to work in - some sts present:
groups to talk about their preferences and to E.g.:Hoa prefers New York to
give reasons to back up their opinions. London because people are
- Ask S to draw this table and take notes of their friendlier and opener. Binh
friends opinions . prefers living in London because
Name there are more high buildings
City preferred but Nga prefers working in
Reasons London because there are more
- Go around to observe and offer help if holidays
necessary.
- Call some S to report their findings.
- Give corrective feedback.

5. Homework: (2 minutes )
Write a paragraph about New York and
London.

Date: 06/02/10 UNIT 15: CITIES


Period : 93 LESSON 3 : LISTENING

1. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students should appreciate a wonderful


work of the French, the Statue of Liberty.
2. Lexical items
- General knowledge: ss get the specific information about the Statue of
Liberty.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Language: words related to the Statue of Liberty
3. Skills: Listen for specific information
4. Teaching aids: pictures of the Statue of Liberty, some pictures of some
famous cities, posters, textbook

Teachers Activities Students Activities


Warm up: (3minutes) Matching:
- Use a poster: Match the names of the cities in
column A with the names of the countries in - Go to the board and match the
column B words
- Correct
* Pre-listening (6minutes)
- Get Ss to work in pairs to answer 6 Qs in textbook Ssanswers may vary
1. It is the Statue of Liberty
2. It is the Statue of a woman /It is tall/ It is big
3. It got a crown in her head
4. Its got a tablet in her left hand
5. Its holding a burning torch
6. Its wearing a robe
* While-listening (23minutes)
+ Task 1.
- Explain the instruction and has Ss read the task - Read the task quickly
quickly in 1 minute before listening
- Play the tape twice - Listen and choose the correct
- Listen to Ssanswers(from 1-5) and get Ss to answers
listen the last time to make sure that they can - Give their answers
correct their answers by themselves. - Listen again to correct their
Answer key: answers
1. B 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. C
+ Task 2
- Explain the instruction
- Get Ss to read quickly Task 2 in 1 minute
- Play the tape twice -Listen to teachers explanation
- Ask Ss what they have heard. - Read the task quickly
- Listen to Ssanswers - Listen to the tape and fill in the
- Play the tape the last time to make sure that Ss table
can fill in the table enough with correct information
Answer key - Give their answers
Liberty Enlightening the World
46 meters - Listen to the tape and correct the
205 tons answers
Copper (outside) and iron (frame)
(Made of) stone and concrete
9.30 a.m to 5 p.m daily (everyday)

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
except Christmas Day

* Post- listening (13minutes)


- Divide the class into 2 groups
- Have Ss sit in groups of six and retell their
friends what they have learnt about the Statue of - Work in groups
Liberty, using the information in the table.
- Go around to help students
- Get 2 representatives of 2groups to present their
talks
- Give feedback - 2 Ss present their talks in front of
Homework class- Other Ss listen to their
-Review the lesson friends presentation
Write a paragraph (about 50 words) about the
Statue of Liberty
Comments:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Date: 07/02/10 UNIT 15: CITIES
Period : 94 LESSON 4 : WRITING

1. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a paragraph
describing a city.
2. Lexical items
- Grammar : + Defining and non defining relative clauses
+ Simple present, simple past.
- Vocabulary : Some new words related to the topic
3. Skills: Writing a short paragraph to describe the city which students know well.
4. Teaching aids: pictures, posters, textbook
PROCEDURE:
Teachers activities Students activities
I. Warm up : (3)
- ask some questions Answer
1. What do you know about London? (individually)
2. Do you like it? Give reason(s)
II. Pre - writing : (15)
- ask students to look at the pictures in the texbook - Work in groups, discuss, and
- ask students to read paragraph in silence. answer the questions in task 1
- goes around class to help students
- explains some structures when describing a city
+ (be) situated
+ cover an area of translati
+ (be) founded by on
+ (be) famous for
+ The best thing about is

- Ask Ss to answer the questions.


- Gives feedback
- Answers
1. In southern English, on river Thames
2. It covers an are a of 1,610 square kilometres
3. 7 million
4. It is a capital city
5. It was founded by the roman in 43AD
6. It is famous for many things : such as St pauls
cathedral and the houses of parliament, its
museums and its many shops
7. The best thing about London is the park
III. While - writing : (15)
- Elicit some famous cities - Give the name of some famous
Give cues cities in Viet Nam
* HCM city : - Population about 8 million people
- Area : 2,092 square km
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Founded : 1968
- Famous : BenThanh market, Duc Ba church.
* CanTho : - Population - about 2 million people
- Area : 2,964 square km
- Founded : 2004
- Famous : Ninh Kieu pier, Can Tho port .
- ask students some questions about each of them
(questions in task 1)
- ask Ss to write a paragraph to describe one of the - work in groups to write about a
above cities (based on Qs in task 1) by using posters. city of their interest
- Go around class to help students
- ask groups of ss to exchange their writings - exchange their writings and
- go around to help them if necessary correct them each other
- ask 1 Ss in each group to stick the posters on the
board
IV. Post - writing : (11) - correct
- correct mistakes - do the work at home.
- T & ss work together
V. Homework : (1)
- ask students to write a short paragraph about
the province of Ben Tre

Comments:

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Date: 08/02/10 UNIT 15: CITIES
Period : 95 LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS

1. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to pronounce two
sounds //, / / correctly; use Non- defining and defining Relative Clauses and
Although correctly
2. Lexical items -pronunciation: //, / /
- Non- defining and defining relative clauses
-Although
3. Teaching aids: pictures, posters, textbook
PROCEDURE:
Teacher, s activities Students s activities
Warm up.(3 mns)
- Shows a picture of Toms family (3 brothers).
- Asks:How many people are there in Tom s
family? -five people

- How many brothers are there in Tom s family?
-Writes this sentence on the blackboard. three brothers

There are three brothers in Tom s family.
Pronuciation(12mns)
Ex: There are three brothers in Toms family.
// // -read in chorus.
- asks students to read this sentence in chorus. -pronounce the sounds in chorus
- ask them to pronounce two sounds:
- describe how to pronounce the two sounds
clearly.
Activity 1: repeat after the teacher(3 times)
Ask students to open their books page 164. pratise in pairs
Ask them to listen and and repeat the words. pronounce
- ask students to practise in pairs
- get some students to pronounce these words
individually before the class
Activity 2
-Practise the sentences. -Repeat in chorus.
(These sentences are written on a poster)
-ask students to listen and repeat
-get some ss to go to the blackboard and use two
kinds of coloured chalk to underline the words
pronounced //, / / -Practise
-Teacher conduct correction -Read
-Get ss to practise 3 minutes.
-Get some ss to read these sentences individually. -Read in chorus.
-Correct their mistakes.
-Get students to read these sentences in chorus
again
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Grammar(30mns)
A. Exercise 1
Non-defining and defining relative clauses. -Answer: It is New York Harbour
Relative pronouns: which, who, whom, whose,
that.
Activity 1:
-Show a picture of New York Harbour (textbook)
Asks: What is it?.
*Says: New York Harbour, which is ice-free in -Copy down
all seasons, is one of the largest and finest
harbours in the world. -Write down
- Write this sentence on the blackboard who lives next door is relative
- explain the grammar note. clause
Gives another example.
*The man who lives next door is very friendly.
-explains.
@ Note
That is not used in non-defining relative -Work individually
clauses -Correct in pairs
Activity 2.
Do exercise 1:
-Give the instruction.
-Ask students to work individually
-Get ss to correct in pairs.
-Get some students to do this exercise before the
class.
-Correct.
B.Exercise 2
Connecting contrasting ideas: Although.
Activity 1
- Answer:
It is raining
They are playing football

-Give an example
-Ask questions: It
What are they doing?
-Say: Although it is raining,theyre still playing
football. S V -Copy down
-Write this sentence on the b.b
-Explain
-Ask students to look at the example in their
textbooks -Take notes
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
-analyse and explain -Work individually
@ notes -Correct in pairs.
_Although = Even though= Though
ex: Though it is raining, theyre still playing Do the exercises again
football.
Activity 2.
Do exercise 2
-Give the instruction
-Ask students to work individually
-get them to correct in pairs
-correct
Homework:
-Review the lesson
-do the exercise again.

Comments:

Date: 09/02/10 UNIT 16: HISTORICAL PLACES


Period : 96 LESSON 1 : READING

I. Objectives:
1. Education aim:
- Sts know about Van Mieu Quoc Tu Giam.
2. Knowledge:
a. General knowledge:
- Sts can talk about Van Mieu Quoc Tu Giam.
b.Language: Sts can recall more about:
- The simple past tense.
- Vocabulary to talk about historical places.
3. Skills:
- Reading for general ideas and specific information.
- Choosing the best suitable words and guessing in context.
- Deciding on True or False statements.
- Discussing in group.
II. Teaching aids: - Textbook, blackboard, chalk, ...
III. Anticipated problems:
- Students may not have sufficient words to talk about the topic .
IV. Procedure
Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm-up: Network..(5minutes)
- Ask students to work in groups of 3-4 students .
- Ask the students to name some historical places in - Work in groups
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Vietnam.
- After 2 minutes, the group which has the longest list will be
the winner

2. Before you read: (8 minutes)


Aims: To provide students with words/phrases about
historical places.
- - Work in pairs.
- Students are required to work in pairs to answer the
questions in the textbook.
- Go around to offer help S.
- Ask some S to answer the questions.
- Listen and help S to give correct answers. - Some S answer the
Suggested answers: questions
1. Co Loa Citadel. Hoa Lu Capital. Con- Son- Kiep Bac
Site. Den Hung Remains, Quang Tri Citadel, Hue Imperial
City. Hoi An City, etc.
2. Yes, it is. It is the first university of Vietnam.
3. Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam was founded in 1070 by the Ly
Dynastry. It is one of the most visited places in Hanoi.
- Give S some new words:
* The new words/phrases are:
+ Confucian ( a): ngi theo o Khng, nh nho - Read after the T and
+ engrave ( v): khc, trm tr then read individually.
+ stelae ( n): bia - Listen and take notes
+ banyan trees ( n): cy a
+ tortoise ( n): con ra
Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask the students to repeat -
it.
Ask 4-5 students to read all the word/phrases aloud in front
of the class (1 student/ 1 time)
Listen and help the students to read the words/phrases
correctly.

3. While you read: (20 minutes)


Aims: Read for information to do the task, and do the tasks.
Task 1: Guesing in context
- Ask the students to read the passage indepently then find
the italicised words in task 1. - Work individually
- Write these words on board: - Some S do the task
Originally, representative, memorialise, engrave, flourish. orally while others
- Ask S to go back to the text to locate and underline these listen.
words and try to guess the meanings.
- T might want to check that S understand all these words by
callingon some S to tell the meanings in Vietnamese.
- S are required to compare their answers with their partner.
- Call on students to read and explain their answers aloud in
front of the class.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Feedback and give correct answers:
* Key: - Read the text and do
1. b 2. a 3. c 4. b 5. c the task individually
Task 2: Deciding on True or False statement - Check the answers
- Ask S read the text more carefully and decide whether the with a partner.
statements are true (T) or false (F). Correct the false
information. - Some S present.
- Ask s to do the task individually and then check their
answers with their friend.
- Ask some representatives to give their choice orally in front
of the class and explain their answers.
- Listen and help S to give the right answer.
Answer:
1. F ( it was built in 1070)
2. T -
th th
3. F ( from 11 century to 18 century)
4. F ( it is an example of well- preseved traditional
Vietnamese architecture)
5. T
6. T
4. After you read: (10 minutes)
Aims: S can talk briefly about Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam.
- Ask S to work in groups of 3 or 4 and prepare a talk about - Listen to the T
Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam, using the suggestions in the - Work in groups
textbook. - S take turn to talk
- Go round to help the students with their work. about Van Mieu- Quoc
- Ask some S to talk in front of the class and give feedback. Tu Giam.
Suggested talk:
Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam is a historical and cultural relic
of Vietnam, which attracts a great number of visitors every
year. Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam was built originally by the Ly
dynasty in 1070 in Hanoi. Quoc Tu Giam was considered the
first university of Vietnam, which was established on the
grounds of Vietnam. Royal exams used to take place here
and the first comers were honoured by having their names
carved on the stone stelae. These talae were carried on the
backs of giant tortoises, which can still be seen today.
5. Homework: (2 minutes)
- Write a passage about Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam.
Date: 10/02/10 UNIT 16: HISTORICAL PLACES
Period : 97 LESSON 2 : SPEAKING

I/ Objectives
1. Education aims:
- Sts know about the historical places .
2. Knowledge:
- General knowledge:
Sts can talk about a historical place.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Language:
The simple past tense.
Vocabulary on a historical place.
3. Skills:
- Asking and answering questions about a historical place.
- Talking about historical places.
II/ Anticipated problems:
Sts might not have sufficient vocabulary to talk about the topic.
III/ Teaching aids:
Textbook, chalk, board, handouts.
IV/ Procedure:
Teachers activities Students activities
1. Warm- up: (5 minutes)
Aims : get used to the topic.
- Introduce the game: You are going to work in groups to - Work in group.
match the names of different historical places of interest in
Hanoi with their English translatations. - Give the answers.:
1. Cha Mt Ct a. Presidential Palace
2. Ct C H Ni b. Temple of Literature 1-e 2- h 3- i
3. Bo tng Cch mng c. Ho Chi Minh Mausoleum 4- b 5- c 6- a
4. Vn Miu d. National Museum of 7- d 8- j 9- f
Ethnology 10- e
5. Lng H Ch Tch e. Co Loa Citadel
6. Ph ch Tch f. National Museum of Fine
Arts
7. Bo tng Dn tc hc g. One Pillar Pagoda
8. Bo tng Lch s h. Flag Tower of Hanoi
9. Bo tng M thut i. Revolution Museum
10. Thnh C Loa j. Vietnamese National History
Museum
- Go around to observe and check that S work.
- Check with the whole class.
2. Before you speak: (8 minutes)
Aims: : focus sts. on the topic and introduce the words and
grammar used in the task.
Task 1: Ask and answer about President Ho Chi Minh
Mausoleum. - read the fact sheet and
- Ask S to study the fact sheet of the monuments and listen to the T.
explain new words if any.
+ stand : place
+ late( adj): nguyn, c cu
+ maintenance ( n): bo dng - Read the model
- Ask S to read the model conversation in the textbook. conversation.
- Ask S some questions as examples. - Answer the teachers
- Ask S to work in pairs to ask and answer about President questions.
Ho Chi Minhs Mausoleum. - Work in pairs.
- Go around to help S. - Some pairs present in
- Call on some pairs to perform in front of the class. front of the class.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
Suggested questions:
+ Where is it located?
+ When did the construction start?
+ When did the constuction finish?
+ How many floors are there?
+ What is the use of each floor?
+ What time is it open?
+ What time is it closed?
+ Is photography allowed inside?
3. While you speak: (20 minutes)
Aims: Sts can ask and asnwer about the two historical
places .
Task 2: An information gap activity
- Introduce the task: S going to ask and answer about Hue - Listen and take notes.
Imperial City and Thong Nhat Conference Hall.
- Give S some new words:
+ World Cultural Heritage:Di sn vn ho th gii
+ Comprise (v): bao gm
+ The Royal Citadel: Hong thnh
+ The Imperial Enclosure: Thnh ni
+ The Forbidden Purple City: T cm thnh
+ Admission: gi v vo ca
+ Reunification Hall: Dinh Thng nht
+ To be heavily damaged: b ph hu nng n
+ Air bombardment: nm bom
+ Chamber: phng
- Ask S to work in pairs
- In their pairs, Ss will take turn to ask and answer about
two histirical places using the questions in task 1.
- Go around to check and offer to help.
- Call on some pairs to perform in front of the class and
give feedback.

4. After you speak: (10 minutes)


Aim: S can talk about the historical place they have been
to.
Task 3:
- Introduce the task: S are going to work in groups to ask
and answer questions about a historical place they have
been to.
- Remind S to take notes of their friends talk while
listening so that they can report in front of the class.
- Go around to help S .
- Call some S to report their findings.
- Give corrective feedback.
5. Homework: (2 minutes )
Write a paragraph to talk about a historical place .

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 11/02/10 UNIT 16: HISTORICAL PLACES


Period : 98 LESSON 3 : LISTENING

I. Objectives:
1. Educational aim:
- Students should take part in maintaining and protecting the cultural and
historical sites.
2. Knowledge:
- General knowledge: Students learn about some historical places in Vietnam
and all over the world.
- Language: New words: the words related to description of historical and
cultural places.
3. Skill:
- Listening for gist and for specific information.
II. Methods:
Integrated, mainly communicative.
III. Teaching aids:
- World map.
- Pictures of some historical sites in Vietnam and the world as well.
IV. Procedure:
Contents activities
I. Warm up: (3ms)
- Tell some historical places that you - Ask
know.
- Tell some historical places that you
had chance to visit.
Suggested names:
- The Great Wall in China.
- The Royal Citadel in Vietnam.
- Ancient Capitals of Japan.
II. Pre-listening: (a) - Explain the task after putting the five
- Look at the pictures on pages 202, pictures on the board.
203 and match the word / phrases with - Ask ss opinion and give feedback.
them.
Suggested answer:
1. b 2.d 3.a 4.e 5.c - Give handouts and explain the task.
III. While-listening: - Play the recording the 1st time.
Task 1: (b) - Play the recording the 2nd time and let
- Listen to a tour guide giving some ss discuss with their partners.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
information about transportation in - Play the recording the 3rd time and give
Hue and choose the correct answers. feedback.
Suggested answers:
1.D 2.C 3.C 4.A 5.B

- Write the question on the board and


have Ss discuss.

Task 2: (c) - Ask ss opinion and do not correct


- Listen to a tour guide talking to
visitors about some mistakes.
attraction features of Hue & write
short answers to the questions below: - Play the recording the 1st time.
1. How long did the Nguyen - Play the recording the 2nd time.
Dynasty last?
2. Are the buildings in Hue varied
in styles?
3. Where is Thien Mu Pagoda - Check ss task.
located? - Play the recording the 3rd time, correct
4. Besides its ancient buildings and the task and give feedback.
beautiful landscapes, what has
made Hue more attractive?
5. What can tourists see in local
villages? - Let Ss listen again and help them to
Suggested answers: answer the five questions
1. 143 years.
2. Yes, they are.
3. On the Perfume River.
4. Hues tradition dishes.
5. Skillful handicraft works.

IV. Post-listening: - Assign homework.

Homework:
Write a short paragraph about a
historical place you have visited.

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 12/02/10 UNIT 16: HISTORICAL PLACES


Period : 99 LESSON 4 : WRITING

I. Objectives:
1. Education Aims: - Students can describe a chart.
2. Knowledge:
a. General knowledge: - Student knows how to read the information in a chart.
b. Language: - Language used to describe a chart.
- The past tenses.
3. Skills: - Reading: read the model description.
- Speaking: discuss in pairs.
- Writing: write a description.
II. Anticipated problems:
- Students are not familiar with this type of writing.
III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk.
IV. Procedures:
Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking :( 5 mins)
- Ask one st to talk about the ancient town of - Listen to their friend and give
Hoi An. remarks.
- Ask other sts to listen to their friend and
give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.
- Check and give remarks.
2. Before you write:( 20 mins)
- Aims: to get sts to know how to write a
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
description of a chart.
+ Task 1:
- Firstly, ask sts to look at the chart and
explain the information in the chart. - Read the chart and try to understand
- Ask them to look at the chart and then the information in the chart.
answer the questions in pairs. - Work in pairs to ask and answer and
- Move around to help if necessary. then share their answer with their
- Ask sts to compare their answer with other friends.
pairs. - Present their ideas.
1. The USA had the biggest number
of visitors to Vietnam in 2001.
2. 99,700 visitors.
3. Australia did.
4. No, it isn't.
5. France did.
6. The number of American visitors to
- Get feedback and give remarks. Vietnam in 2002 increased by 29,497
- Introduce some useful words/expressions in comparison with that in 2001.
that sts can use when describing a chart. - Listen to the teacher.
+ Beginning: Answer the question: " What
does the chart show?"
- Answer: The chart shows.................
The chart presents some
information .... - Copy down these words into their
+Expressions: As we can see from the notebooks.
chart, .............
It can be seen from the chart
that .........
According to the
chart, .................
+ Verbs: increase >< decrease
reduce, rise, .....
+ Adverbs: rapidly, quickly, sharply, steadily,
etc.
+ Comparatives and superlatives. - Do the writing task.
3. While you write:( 10 mins)
- Aims: Sts practise describing the chart.
+ Task 2:
- Ask sts to write a description of the chart. - Read their writing: ( a model
- Ask them to use the answers to the questions description)
above to write. " The chart shows the number of
- Let sts write in 10 minutes. visitor arrivals to Vietnam from the
- Move around to conduct the activity. USA, France and Australia in 2001
4. After you write:( 9 mins) and 2002. The statistics were
Aims: to get feedback and check sts' work. provided by Vietnam National
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Get feedback by asking some sts to read Administration of Tourism. It is clear
their work aloud. from the chart that the number of
- Ask some other sts to give remarks. visitors to Vietnam from the USA,
- Check and give the correct answer. France and Australia in 2002 is
- If there is enough time, T can have sts higher than that in 2001. According
exchange their writing among sts within a to the chart, the USA had the biggest
group so that they can check their friend's number of visitors to Vietnam with
work and give remarks. 230,470 visitors in 2001 and 259,967
in 2002. France ranked second with
99,700 visitors in 2001 and 111,546
in 2002....... "

5. Homework: ( 1min)
- Part D (page 95 - workbook).

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School


Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013

Date: 13/02/10 UNIT 16: HISTORICAL PLACES


Period : 100 LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS

I. Objectives:
1. Education Aims:- Students know how to pronounce the sound / / and / /
correctly.
- Students revise: - Comparatives and superlatives.
2. Knowledge:
+ Language: - Pronunciation: / / and/ / .
- Comparatives and superlatives.
- Making comparisons.
3. Skills: + Speaking: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises.
+ Reading: - Read words and sentences aloud.
- Read the sentences silently to do the exercises.
II. Anticipated problems:
- Students may forget the knowledge about comparisons.
III. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook.
IV. Procedures:
Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking: ( 5mins)
- Ask two sts to read the description of the - Two sts read the announcements
chart they wrote at home aloud. aloud.
- Ask another st to give remarks.
- Check and give marks. - Give remarks.
2. Pronunciation:( 10 mins) - Listen to the teacher.
- Aims: to introduce two sounds / / and / /
and help sts to practise these sounds.
a. Write two sounds on the board and
pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts to
repeat. - Write down two sounds.
- Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds - Listen to the teacher and repeat.
accurately. - Look at the book , listen and repeat.
/ / : a voiceless sound // //
/ / : a voiced sound television shop
- Ask sts to pay attention to the length of two pleasure machine
sounds. measure Swedish
- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen and ...........................
repeat. - Read these words in pairs and check
for their partners.
- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the
words again so that they can check for each
other. - Look at the book and work in pairs.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
- Move around to help . - Answers:
- Ask two sts to read again and give remarks. // //
b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page 175 in pleasure shouldn't
the book. Asia shop
- Ask them to work in pairs to read the illusions washing
sentences and then find out the words ...............................
containing sound / / and sound / / . - Read the sentences.
- Ask them to work in 2 minutes.
- Move around to conduct the activity.
- Ask one st to report and other sts to give
remarks.
- Check and give the correct answers.
- Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud.
- Listen and give remarks.
3. Grammar: ( 29 mins)
Aims: to revise comparatives and - Listen to the T.
superlatives, and making comparisons, and - Look at the examples.
have sts do EX1,EX2 and EX3. - One st tells the T the comparative
a. Comparatives and superlatives: and superlative form of the
- Firstly ask sts to look at the examples and adjectives:
revise the comparative and superlative form Adjectives Comparatives
of the adjectives. Superlatives
E.g: My house is smaller than your house. Short adjs .....- er
My house is the smallest in this street. the .....- est
Exercise 1 is more difficult than long longer the
exercise 2. longest
Exercise 1 is the most difficult in this hot hotter the
book. hottest
- Ask sts to tell the T the comparative and .... ..... ......
superlative form of the adjectives. ...
- Listen to the S and give remarks. Long adjs more ..... the
- Notes: most ....
Irregular adjs expensive more expensive the
good => better => the best most ex.
bad => worse => the worst ....... .......... .......
far => further/farther => the ....
furthest/farthest
- Ask sts to do EX 1.
+ Exercise 1:
- Ask sts to do Ex 1 in pairs and then share - Some sts report.
the answers with their friends. 1. young => younger => the
- Move round to help if necessary. youngest
- Ask some pairs to report. 2. happy => happier => the happiest
3. big => bigger => the biggest
- Check and give remarks. 4. busy => busiest => the busiest
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
...................................
+ Exercise 2: - Listen and correct their work if
- Ask sts to read the requirement and the necessary.
example carefully.
- Ask sts to do the Ex individually. - Read the requirement and the
- Move round to help if necessary. example carefully.
- Ask sts to share their ideas with their - Do the Ex individually.
friends. 2. My sister is younger than me.
- Ask two sts to write the sentences on the 3. Who is the oldest in the class?
board. 4. Concord used to be the fastest
- Ask other sts to give remarks. passenger plane in the world.
.................................
- Listen to the teacher.
b. Making comparisons:
- Ask sts to EX3.
+ Exercise 3:
- Ask sts to do Ex3 in pairs and then share the - Do the exercise in pairs.
answers with their friends. - Some sts report:
- Move round to help if necessary. 1. v 2. so 3.
- Ask some sts to report in front of the whole more
class. 4. the 5. the 6. v
7. than 8. of 9. v
................................
- Check and give remarks. - Listen and correct their work if
5. Homework ( 1 min) necessary.
- Part B( page 91 - workbook)

Date: 13/02/10 TEST YOURSELF F Period: 101


I. Objectives:
1. Aims: - Sts revise what they have learned in unit 15 and unit 16.
2. Knowledge: - General knowledge in unit 15 and unit 16.
- Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
3. Skills: listening, speaking and writing.
II. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board.
III. Procedures:
Teacher's activities Students' activities
1. Homework checking:( 5 mins)
- Ask one st to do Ex 4 in the workbook on EX 4:
the board. 3. larger 4. the longest 5. the
- Ask one st to give remarks. worst
6. happier 7. the most popular
- Give remarks and marks. ...........................
2. The new lesson:( 39 minutes) - One st gives remarks.
- Ask sts to do part II, part III and part IV at
home in advance to save time.
- Give sts the time duration for each part :
part II: 10 minutes, part III: 10 minutes,
part IV: 15 minutes.
- Ask sts to do listening in class.
2.1. Listening:
- Ask sts to read the requirement of the
task. - Look at the textbook and read the
- Play the tape twice and ask sts to do the statements.
task. - Listen carefully and do the task.
- Ask sts to share their ideas with their - Work in pairs to discuss their answers.
partners. - Some sts report.
- Get feedback and play the tape again so 1. three 2. friends 3.
that sts can check their answers. capital
- Ask other sts to give remarks. 4. crowds 5. noisy 6.
- Check and give feedback. interesting
2.2. Reading: ............................
- Ask sts to work in groups to compare
their answers. - work in groups to share their ideas.
- Ask some sts to report his/ her answers - Some sts stand up to report.
aloud. 1. C 2. A 3. A 4. A 5. A
- Listen and check.
2.3. Grammar: - Discuss in groups.
2.3.1. Non-defining Relative Clauses: - Answers:
- Ask sts to discuss their answers in groups. 1. Their house, which is quite big and
- Ask some sts to write on the board. modern, ....
2. The new English teacher, who I met
yesterday, .....
3. Sandra has got a new job with
- Ask two other sts to give remarks. Capital Insurers, which is a much .....
- Check and give the correct answers. ..........................................
- Compare their answers with their
parners.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 school year 2012-
2013
2.3.2. Comparisons: - Answers:
- Ask sts to share their answers with their 1. bigger 2. best
friends. 3. better 4. more
- Ask some sts to report:. polluted
- Check and give remarks. 5. more stressful
2.4. Writing: - Read their writing aloud
- Ask some sts to read their writing aloud. "Taipei, which is the capital city of
- Ask some sts to give remarks. Taiwan, was founded in the 18th
century. It has a population of 2.3
million. It is the country's most exciting
city, but the weather there is very humid
3. Homework: ( 1 min) and not very pleasant. Taipei is a busy
- Part A ( Page 85 - workbook) city, and the streets are always full of
people. It is famous for excellent
museums."
- Listen to the teacher's remarks.

Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School

Anda mungkin juga menyukai